Vista 50P V1 Installation Manual

User Manual: Vista-50P v1 Installation Manual AlarmHow.net Library

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 196 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

N5944-6V1 Rev B 4/99

VISTA-50P

VISTA-50PUL

PARTITIONED SECURITY SYSTEM

with SCHEDULING

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

and

PROGRAMMING GUIDE

– i –

TABLE OF CONTENTS

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ......................................................... vii

CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL................................. viii

RECOMMENDATIONS FOR PROPER PROTECTION............... ix

Section 1: GENERAL DESCRIPTION............................................................... 01

Section 2: PLANNING A PARTITIONED SYSTEM........................................ 05

Theory of Partitioning............................................................................ 05

Setting Up a Partitioned System........................................................... 05

Common Lobby Logic............................................................................. 06

Master Keypad Setup and Operation ................................................... 08

Section 3: INSTALLING THE CONTROL ........................................................ 10

Mounting the Cabinet ............................................................................ 10

VISTA-50PUL Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing ......................... 11

VISTA-50PUL Grade A Mercantile Safe And Vault Listing ............... 11

Installing the Circuit Board .................................................................. 12

Standard Phone Line Connections ........................................................ 12

Connecting the AC Transformer ........................................................... 13

Installing the Backup Battery............................................................... 15

Earth Ground Considerations ............................................................... 15

Section 4: THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING ....................................... 16

Using Data Field Program Mode........................................................... 16

System and Communication Defaults................................................... 16

Entering Data Field Program Mode...................................................... 16

Moving From One Page of Programming to Another .......................... 17

Viewing Data Fields............................................................................... 17

Entry Errors ........................................................................................... 17

Programming System Wide dta fields .................................................. 18

Programming Partition Specific Data Fields........................................ 18

#93 Menu Mode Programming .............................................................. 19

Section 5: INSTALLING THE KEYPADS ......................................................... 20

Keypads That May Be Used .................................................................. 20

Wiring to the Keypads ........................................................................... 20

Using a Supplementary Power Supply ................................................. 21

Mounting the Keypads ........................................................................... 22

Addressing the Keypads/Preliminary Checkout .................................. 22

Programming the Keypads .................................................................... 23

–ii–

Section 6: BASIC HARDWIRED ZONES 1-9 .................................................... 25

Common Characteristics of Hardwired Zones ...................................... 25

Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to ones 1-8 .................................. 25

Wiring 2-Wire Smoke Detectors to Zone 1............................................ 26

Compatible 2-Wire Smoke Detectors .................................................... 27

Unsupervised Usage of Zone 1 .............................................................. 27

Wiring 4-Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1-8 ....................................... 27

Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detetors ...................................................... 28

Configuring Zone 7 for Alternate Keyswitch Function ........................ 29

Wiring 2-Wire Glassbreak Detectors to Zone 8 .................................... 29

Compatible Glassbreak Detectors ......................................................... 30

Zone 9 Applications................................................................................ 30

Programming Hardwired Zones ............................................................ 30

Checkout Procedure for Hardwired Zones............................................ 32

Section 7: POLLING LOOP ZONES 10-86 ........................................................ 33

Polling Loop Overview ........................................................................... 33

Common Characteristics of Polling Loop Zones ................................... 33

Wiring/Addressing Polling Loop Devices .............................................. 33

Polling Loop Limitations........................................................................ 34

Polling Loop Supervision ....................................................................... 35

Programming Polling Loop Zones ......................................................... 36

Checkout Procedure for Polling Loop Zones ......................................... 38

Compatible Polling Loop Devices .......................................................... 39

Section 8: WIRELESS (RF) ZONE EXPANSION ............................................ 41

Common Characteristics of Wireless Zones.......................................... 41

Wireless Systems Available................................................................... 41

Wireless System Operation and Supervision ....................................... 42

Wireless System Installation Advisories .............................................. 42

Installation and Setup of 4281/5881 RF Receivers .............................. 43

Installation/Wiring of the 5800TM Module .......................................... 44

Programming The Wireless Receiver.................................................... 44

House ID Sniffer Mode........................................................................... 45

5700 Series Transmitter Setup ............................................................. 46

Wireless Zone Assignments for 5700 Series Transmitters .................. 47

Compatible 5700 Series Transmitters .................................................. 48

5800 Series Transmitter Setup ............................................................. 49

Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters .................................................. 50

Programming Wireless Transmitters ................................................... 52

Checkout Procedure for Wireless Zones................................................ 55

Section 9: RELAY OUTPUTS & POWERLINE CARRIER DEVICES ......... 56

Output Device Basics............................................................................. 56

Wiring the 4204 Relay Module.............................................................. 56

Wiring the 4300 Transformer................................................................ 57

Programming the 4204 Relay Module .................................................. 58

Output Programming Options Defined................................................. 58

Programming Output Devices ............................................................... 60

Zone List Programming ......................................................................... 63

Relay Voice Descriptors ......................................................................... 63

– iii –

Section 10: 4285 VISTA INTERACTIVE PHONE (VIP) MODULE ................ 65

General Information .............................................................................. 65

Mounting the 4285 VIP Module ........................................................... 65

Wiring the 4285 VIP Module ................................................................. 66

Programming 4285 VIP Module Options.............................................. 67

Custom Word Substitutes for VIP Module Annunciation.................... 68

Section 11: AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATION (AAV) UNIT............................. 69

General Information .............................................................................. 69

AAV Module Operation .......................................................................... 69

AAV Module Connections ...................................................................... 70

Programming Audio Alarm Verification Module Options ................... 70

Section 12: VOLTAGE TRIGGERS (Connector J7) ......................................... 72

General Information .............................................................................. 72

Ground Start Trigger Setup .................................................................. 74

Open/Close Trigger Setup...................................................................... 75

Remote Keypad Sounder........................................................................ 75

Keyswitch Setup..................................................................................... 76

Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment (7720, 7920SE)....................... 78

Section 13: EXTERNAL SOUNDERS .................................................................. 79

General Information .............................................................................. 79

Wiring ..................................................................................................... 79

UL985 Household Fire Installations..................................................... 79

UL1023&UL609 Commercial Burglary Installations.......................... 80

Non-UL Installations ............................................................................. 80

Programming External Sounders.......................................................... 80

Compatible Sounders and Siren Drivers .............................................. 81

Section 14: EVENT LOG OPTIONS ..................................................................... 82

General Information .............................................................................. 82

Event Log Printer Connections ............................................................. 82

Programming Event Log Options .......................................................... 83

Event Logging Procedures ..................................................................... 83

Section 15: FINAL POWER-UP PROCEDURE.................................................. 86

General Information .............................................................................. 86

Earth Ground Considerations ............................................................... 86

Connecting the AC Transformer ........................................................... 86

Programming Power And AC Options .................................................. 88

Polling Loop Current Draw Worksheet ................................................ 88

Auxiliary Device Current Draw Worksheet.......................................... 88

Connecting The Battery......................................................................... 89

Section 16: FALSE ALARM REDUCTION FEATURES.................................... 90

General Information .............................................................................. 90

Exit Error Logic...................................................................................... 90

Exit Delay Reset..................................................................................... 90

Cross Zoning ........................................................................................... 91

Call Waiting Defeat ............................................................................... 91

–iv–

Section 17: ZONE TYPE DEFINITIONS............................................................. 92

Section 18: DATA FIELD DESCRIPTIONS........................................................ 94

Section 19: #93 MENU MODE PROGRAMMING............................................ 108

#93 Main Menu Options ...................................................................... 108

Zone Programming............................................................................... 110

Learning Serial Numbers .................................................................... 111

Programming Alpha Descriptors......................................................... 113

Alpha Descriptor Vocabulary And Character (ASCII) Chart ............ 117

Device Programming............................................................................ 118

Relay Voice Descriptors ....................................................................... 119

Custom Word Index ............................................................................. 121

Section 20: SCHEDULING OPTIONS ............................................................... 122

Introduction To Scheduling ................................................................. 122

Time Window Definitions .................................................................... 124

Open/Close Schedule Definitions......................................................... 125

Programming with #80 Scheduling Menu Mode ................................ 126

Basic Scheduling Menu Structure....................................................... 127

Time Window Definitions Worksheet ................................................. 128

Programming Time Windows .............................................................. 129

Open/Close Worksheet ......................................................................... 129

Programming Open/Close Schedules .................................................. 130

Holiday Definitions & Schedule Worksheet ....................................... 131

Programming Holiday Schedules ........................................................ 131

Time Driven Event Worksheet............................................................ 132

Programming Time Driven Events ..................................................... 134

Limitation of Access by Time Worksheet............................................ 136

Programming Access Control Schedules ............................................ 136

#81 Temporary Schedule Menu Mode................................................. 137

Programming Temporary Schedules................................................... 138

#83 User Scheduling Menu Mode ........................................................ 139

Section 21: SYSTEM COMMUNICATION ........................................................ 141

A Successful Transmission .................................................................. 141

Reporting Formats ............................................................................... 141

Loading Communication Defaults....................................................... 144

Section 22: DOWNLOADING PRIMER............................................................. 150

General Information ............................................................................ 150

Getting On-Line with a Control Panel ................................................ 150

On-Line Control Functions .................................................................. 151

Access Security ..................................................................................... 152

Connecting a 4100SM Module for Direct Wire Downloading............ 153

Section 23: SETTING THE REAL-TIME CLOCK............................................ 154

General Information ............................................................................ 154

Setting the Time and Date .................................................................. 154

– v –

Section 24: SECURITY ACCESS CODES .......................................................... 155

General Information ............................................................................ 155

User Codes and Levels of Authority.................................................... 155

To ADD, a Master, Manager or Operator Code.................................. 158

To CHANGE a Master, Manager, or Operator Code ......................... 159

Adding an RF Key to an Existing User............................................... 160

To DELETE a Master, Manager, or Operator Code........................... 160

To EXIT the User Edit Mode ............................................................... 160

Section 25: KEYPAD FUNCTIONS .................................................................... 161

General Information ............................................................................ 161

Arming Functions ................................................................................ 161

Global Arming ...................................................................................... 162

Access Control ...................................................................................... 163

Delay Closing Time .............................................................................. 163

Partition "GO TO" Command .............................................................. 163

Viewing Capabilities of a User ............................................................ 163

Viewing Zone Descriptors .................................................................... 163

Viewing Downloaded Messages........................................................... 164

Using the Built-in User's Manual ....................................................... 164

Panic Keys ............................................................................................ 164

Speed Key [D] (Macros)........................................................................ 164

Manual Relay Activation Mode (#70).................................................. 165

Section 26: TESTING THE SYSTEM ................................................................. 166

Using Test Mode................................................................................... 166

Armed System Test.............................................................................. 167

Turning the System Over to the User................................................. 167

To the Installer ..................................................................................... 167

Trouble Conditions............................................................................... 168

REGULATORY AGENCY STATEMENTS.................................... 170

DIP SWITCH TABLES..................................................................... 174

SUMMARY OF SYSTEM COMMANDS ........................................ 177

SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................... 178

PROGRAM FORM/SYSTEM WORKSHEET.................. Blue Insert

SUMMARY OF CONNECTIONS DIAGRAM ... Inside Back Cover

–vi–

LIST OF FIGURES

1. Installing The Lock .......................................................................... 10

2. Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations ..................................... 11

3. Mounting The PC Board .................................................................. 12

4. Standard Phone Line Connections .................................................. 13

5. AC Power And Battery Connections ............................................... 14

6. 4300 Transformer Connections........................................................ 14

7. Keypad Connections to Keypad Port Terminals............................. 21

8. Using a Supplementary Power Supply for Additional Keypads .... 22

9. Zones 1-9 Wiring Connections ......................................................... 25

10. Wiring 2-Wire Smoke Detectors to Zone 1...................................... 26

11. 4-Wire Smoke Detector Power Reset Using 4204 Relay Module ... 28

12. Wiring Latching Glassbreak Detectors to Zone 8........................... 29

13. Polling Loop Connections................................................................. 34

14. Polling Loop Extender Module Wiring ............................................ 35

15, 5881 RF Receiver (showing receiver setup) .................................... 43

16. 4204 Module...................................................................................... 57

17. 4300 Transformer Connections........................................................ 57

18. 4285 Voice Module Connections ...................................................... 67

19. Audio Alarm Verification Module Connections .............................. 71

20. J7 Connector For Voltage Triggers ................................................. 73

21. Ground Start Module Connections.................................................. 74

22. Remote Keypad Sounding Connections........................................... 75

23. Remote Keyswitch Wiring ............................................................... 77

24. Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment ........................................... 78

25. External Sounder Connections ........................................................ 79

26. AB12 Bell Box Wiring ...................................................................... 80

27. Event Log Printer Connections ....................................................... 82

28. 1321 Transformer and Battery Connections .................................. 87

29. 4300 Transformer Connections........................................................ 87

30. Direct Wire Downloading Connections (With 4100SM Module).. 153

Summary Of Connections Diagram ............... Inside Back Cover

– vii –

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

This manual is written to accommodate both the new and the experienced installer of

Ademco products. A general description of the entire system is located at the

beginning of the manual, followed by the basics of programming. The wiring and

physical setup of the hardware follows.

The sections at the core of the manual include both hardware setup and

programming requirements of each device to make that specific device operational in

the system. A checkout procedure is included at the end of each section. We

recommend this method to ensure that each device is working properly before

proceeding to the next section. It must also be used if you are making a particular

addition to the system of one of these devices.

Each of the sections covering the installation of peripheral devices includes the

programming for that device. If you are an experienced user of Ademco products, you

may choose to wire and then program the entire system at once. If so, refer to

Sections 18 through 20 (for complete system programming options) after the

hardware setup is complete. A blank pull-out programming form is included with

this manual. Use this in addition to the #93 and #80 Menu modes for complete

system programming options.

Without an understanding of the programming methodology, you will not be able to

successfully perform the required programming in each of these sections. We

therefore urge you to read Section 4: THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING

before any programming is performed.

This manual uses various icons to denote critical notes and technical tips to assist

you with the installation of this system. These are easily seen in the lefthand column

of the relevent information.

–viii–

CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL

MAIN SECTION TITLES ARE SHOWN IN REVERSE TYPE

Before you begin using this manual, it is important that you understand the

meaning of the following symbols (icons).

ULThese notes include specific information which must be followed if you are

installing this system for a UL Listed application.

These notes include information that you should be aware of before continuing

with the installation, and which, if not observed, could result in operational

difficulties.

This symbol indicates a critical note that could seriously affect the operation of

the system, or could cause damage to the system. Please read each warning

carefully. This symbol also denotes warnings about physical harm to the installer.

Enter Zn Num.

(00 = Quit) 01

Many system options are programmed in an

interactive mode by responding to Alpha keypad

display prompts. These prompts are shown in a

double-line box.

*00 When programming the system, data fields are

indicated by a “star” (*) followed by the data field

number.

PRODUCT MODEL NUMBERS: Unless noted otherwise, references to specific

model numbers represent Ademco products.

– ix –

RECOMMENDATIONS FOR PROPER PROTECTION

The Following Recommendations For The Location Of Fire And Burglary Detection Devices Help Provide

Proper Coverage For The Protected Premises.

Recommendations For Smoke And Heat Detectors

With regard to the number and placement of smoke/heat detectors, we subscribe to the

recommendations contained in the National Fire Protection Association's (NFPA) Standard #72

noted below.

Early warning fire detection is best achieved by the installation of fire detection equipment

in all rooms and areas of the household as follows: For minimum protection a smoke detector

should be installed outside of each separate sleeping area, and on each additional floor of a

multi-floor family living unit, including basements. The installation of smoke detectors in

kitchens, attics (finished or unfinished), or in garages is not normally recommended.

For additional protection the NFPA recommends that you install heat or smoke detectors in

the living room, dining room, bedroom(s), kitchen, hallway(s), attic, furnace room, utility and

storage rooms, basements and attached garages.

In addition, we recommend the following:

• Install a smoke detector inside every bedroom where a smoker sleeps.

• Install a smoke detector inside every bedroom where someone sleeps with the door partly or

completely closed. Smoke could be blocked by the closed door. Also, an alarm in the hallway

outside may not wake up the sleeper if the door is closed.

• Install a smoke detector inside bedrooms where electrical appliances (such as portable

heaters, air conditioners or humidifiers) are used.

• Install a smoke detector at both ends of a hallway if the hallway is more than 40 feet (12

meters) long.

• Install smoke detectors in any room where an alarm control is located, or in any room where

alarm control connections to an AC source or phone lines are made. If detectors are not so

located, a fire within the room could prevent the control from reporting a fire or an intrusion.

DINING

KITCHEN

BEDROOM

LIVING ROOM

✪

✪✪

✪

▲

BEDROOM

BDRM

DINING

LIVING ROOM

TV ROOM KITCHEN

■■

■

✪

✪✪

✪

▲

✪

BEDROOM BEDROOM

■

LVNG RM

BASEMENT

KTCHN

▲

CLOSED

DOOR

GARAGE

▲

Smoke Detectors for Minimum Protection

Smoke Detectors for Additional Protection

Heat-Activated Detectors

Recommendations For Proper Intrusion Protection

For proper intrusion coverage, sensors should be located at every possible point of entry to a home or

commercial premises. This would include any skylights that may be present, and the upper windows in a

multi-level building.

In addition, we recommend that radio backup be used in a security system so that alarm signals can still

be sent to the alarm monitoring station in the event that the telephone lines are out of order (alarm signals

are normally sent over the phone lines, if connected to an alarm monitoring station).

–x–

– 1 –

Section 1: GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The VISTA-50P is an 8-Partition alarm control panel that supports up to 86 zones using basic hardwired, polling

loop, and wireless zones. In addition, the control offers relay control and scheduling capabilities for automating

system functions. The major system features are outlined below.

Basic Hardwired Zones

Provides 9 basic hardwire zones with the following characteristics:

• EOLR supervision (optional for zones 2-8) supporting N.O. or N.C. sensors

• Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions

• Up to 16 2-wire smoke detectors on zone 1

• 4-wire smoke or heat detectors on zones 1-8 (power to 4-wire smokes must

be supervised for UL installations)

• Up to 50 2-wire latching glassbreak detectors on zone 8

Optional Expansion Zones

Polling Loop Expansion:

Supports up to 77 additional hardwire zones using a built-in polling (multiplex)

loop interface. Current draw can total up to 64mA. Polling loop zones have the

following characteristics:

• Must use RPM (Remote Point Module) devices

• Supervised by control panel

• Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions

Wireless Expansion:

Supports up to 63 wireless zones using 4281 type RF Receiver or 86 wireless

zones using 5881 type RF Receiver (less if using hardwire and/or polling loop

zones). Wireless zones have the following characteristics:

• Supervised by control panel for check-in signals (except certain non-

supervised transmitters)

• Supervised for low battery condition

• Tamper protection for 5800 series supervised transmitters

• Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions

For specific information regarding number of wireless zones supported by each

RF receiver, see the section on

Wireless Expansion

later in this manual.

Supervisory Zones

Provides additional zones for supervision of the following:

RF Receivers Zones 88-91

Polling Loop Zone 97

4285 VIP Module Zone 87

–2–

8 Partitions Provides the ability to control 8 separate areas independently, each functioning

as if it had its own separate control. Partitioning features include:

• A "Common Lobby" partition, which arms automatically when the last

partition (1-8) that shares the common lobby is armed and disarms when the

first partition (1-8) that shares the common lobby is disarmed

• A Master Partition (9) to which keypads may be assigned to view the status of

all 8 partitions at the same time

• Keypads assignable to one of 8 partitions or to Master Partition 9 to view

system status

• Ability to assign Relays/Powerline Carrier devices to one or all 8 partitions

• Certain system options selectable for each partition , such as Entry/Exit

Delay and Subscriber Account Number

User Codes Acccommodates 75 user codes, all of which can operate any or all partitions.

Each user, if assigned to more than one partition, retains the same user number

across all partitions, and will only utilize one user "slot" in the system. Certain

characteristics must be assigned to each user code, which are as follows:

• Authority level for each partition (Master, Manager, or several other

Operator levels)

• Opening/Closing central station reporting option

• What partitions the code can operate

• Global arming capability (ability to arm and disarm all partitions the code

has access to in one command)

• Use of a wireless transmitter to arm and disarm the system (wireless

transmitter must first be learned into the system

Peripheral Devices

Supports up to 16 addressable devices, which can be any combination of

keypads (6139, 6137, 6128, 5137AD, 4137AD),RF receivers (4281/5881), relay

modules (4204), and the 4285 VIP module. Peripheral Devices have the

following characteristics:

• Terminated at the Keypad Port terminals on the control panel

• Each device set to an individual address (physically) according to the

device's instructions

• Each device enabled in the system using the

Device Programming Mode

(covered later in this manual)

Keypad Panic Keys

Accommodates three keypad panic keys: 1+* (A), *+# (B), and 3+# (C).

Characteristics of the panic keys are:

• Designated as zones 95(1+*), 96(3+#), and 99(*+#)

• Activated by wired and wireless keypads

• Activated and reported separately by partition, distinguished by Subscriber

Acct. No. (or Partition No. if Contact ID reporting is used)

– 3 –

Keypad Macros

Accommodates one keypad macro command per partition (each macro is a

series of keypad commands), which can be assigned to the D key on each

partition's keypads. This means, for example, that by pressing the "D" key, the

system can be programmed to log onto another partition, bypass zones 2 and 3,

and arm that partition in the AWAY mode (explained in detail later in this

manual). Characteristics of keypad macros are:

• Assignable to the "D" key by partition

• Can each be 16 characters (keystrokes) in length

Optional Output Devices (4204 Relays and Powerline Carrier (i.e., X-10) Devices)

Accommodates the use of 16 output devices, which can be a combination of

ADEMCO's 4204 Relay Modules or Powerline Carrier Devices (i.e., X-10, ACT,

Leviton). Each 4204 module provides four "Form C" relays for general purpose

use.

Powerline Carrier Devices are controlled by signals sent through the electrical

wiring at the premises via a 4300 transformer. Therefore, if using Powerline

Carrier Devices, a 4300 transformer must be used in place of the regular system

transformer.

Output devices have the following characteristics:

• Can be programmed to activate in response to system events

• Can be programmed to activate using time intervals

• Can be activated manually using the #70 relay command mode

• Can each have an alpha descriptor assigned to it

Optional Vista Interactive Phone Module

Supports the Ademco 4285 VIP Module. This permits access to the security

system to do the following:

• Obtain system status information

• Arm and disarm security system

• Control relays and/or Powerline Carrier devices

Access Control

If programmed, provides users with a command which activates a relay for two

seconds to open access doors (e.g. lobby door). Each partition can be assigned

one access control relay.

Optional Keyswitch

Supports the Ademco 4146 keyswitch on any one of the systems's 8 partitions. If

used, zone 7 is no longer available as a protection zone.

Voltage Triggers

Provides a trigger connector whose pins change state for different conditions.

Used with LORRA (Long Range Radio) equipment or other devices such as a

remote keypad sounder, keyswitch Armed and Ready LEDs, or a printer to print

the system's Event Log.

Event Log

Keeps a log of different event types (enabled in programming). The Event Log

has the following characteristics:

• Stores a total of 224 events

• Can be viewed at the keypad or through the use of V-Link software

• Can be printed on a serial printer using a 4100SM module

–4–

Scheduling

Provides the following scheduling capabilities:

• Open/Close schedules (for control of arming/disarming, and reporting)

• Holiday schedules (allows different time windows for Open/Close

schedules)

• Timed Events (for activation of relays, auto-bypassing and unbypassing,,

auto-arming and disarming, etc.)

• Access schedules (for limiting system access to users by time)

• End User Output Programming mode (provides 20 timers for relay control)

Audio Alarm Verification Option

Provides a programmable Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) option which can be

used in conjunction with an output relay to permit voice dialog between an

operator at the central station and a person at the premises

• Requires the use of an optional AAV unit, such as Eagle model 1241

• If using, Zone 5 is no longer available as a protection zone

Cross-Zoning Capability

Helps prevent false alarms by preventing a zone from going into alarm unless its

cross-zone is also faulted within five minutes.

Exit Error False Alarm Prevention Feature

• System can tell the difference between a regular alarm and an alarm caused

by leaving an Entry/Exit door open. If not subsequently disarmed, faulted

E/E zone(s) will be bypassed and the system will arm

• Generates an "Exit Error" report by user and by zone so the Central Station

knows it was an exit alarm and who caused it

Communications Formats

Supports the following formats for the Primary and Secondary Central Station

receivers:

• Ademco Low Speed (Standard or Expanded)

• Sescoa/Radionics

• Ademco Express

• Ademco High Speed

• Ademco Contact ID

Built-in User's Manual and Descriptor Review

Contains a built-in Users Manual and Descriptor Review mode (alpha keypad

only).

• By depressing and holding any of the function keys on the keypad for 5

seconds, a brief explanation of that particular function scrolls across the

alpha-numeric display.

• By pressing and holding the READY key for 5 seconds and then releasing

it, all programmed zone descriptors can be displayed (one at a time). This

serves as a check for installers to be sure all descriptors are entered

properly.

Improved Downloading Speed

Uploads and downloads at 300 baud (old rate is 75 baud), making

upload/download speed approximately three times faster.

– 5 –

Section 2: PLANNING A PARTITIONED SYSTEM

This section provides the following information:

• Theory of partitioning

• Setting up a partitioned system

• Common Lobby Logic

• Master keypad setup and operation

Theory of Partitioning

This system provides the ability to arm and disarm up to 8 different areas, each

as if it had its own control. These areas are called partitions. Partitions are used

when the user desires to disarm certain areas while leaving other areas armed,

or to limit access to certain areas to specific individuals. Each user of the system

can be assigned to operate any or all partitions, and can be given a different

authority level in each.

Facts you need to know about partitioning:

First, you must determine how many partitions are required (1-8). This must be

done before anything can be assigned to those partitions.

Keypads

Each keypad must be given a unique "address" and assigned to one partition

(can also be assigned to Partition 9 if "Master" keypad operation is desired--

see

Master Keypad Setup and Operation

later in this section).

Zones

Each zone must be assigned to one partition.

The zones assigned to a partition will be displayed on that partition's

keypad(s).

Users

Each user can be assigned to one or more partitions. If a user is to operate

more than one partition and would like to arm/disarm all or some of those

partitions with a single command, the user must be enabled for "Global

Arming" for those partitions (when entering user codes).

A user with access to more than one partition (multiple access) can "log on" to

one partition from another partition's keypad, provided that program field 2*18:

ENABLE GOTO is enabled for each partition you want to log on to from

another.

A partition can be selected as a "common lobby" partition, and other partitions

can affect this partition by causing arming/disarming of this partition to be

automated (see

Common Lobby Logic

, later in this section).

Setting Up a Partitioned System

The basic steps to setting up a partitioned system are described below. If you

need more information on how to program the prescribed options, see Section 4:

THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING

, as well as each corresponding section's

programming procedure.

1. Determine how many partitions the system will consist of (programmed in field

2*00).

2. Assign keypads to partitions (#93 Device Programming mode).

3. Assign zones to partitions (#93 Zone Programming mode).

4. Confirm zones are displayed at the keypad(s) assigned to those partitions.

5. Assign users to partitions.

6. Enable the GOTO feature (program field 2*18) for each partition a multiple-

access user can "log on" to (alpha keypad only).

7. Program Partition-Specific fields (see Section 17:

DATA FIELD

DESCRIPTIONS).

–6–

Common Lobby Logic

When an installation consists of a partition shared by users of other partitions in a

building, that shared partition may be assigned as the "common lobby" partition

for the system (program field 1*17). An example of this might be in a medical

building where there are two doctor's offices and a common entrance area (see

example that follows explanation).

This option employs logic for automatic arming and disarming of the common

lobby . Two programming fields affect the way the common lobby will react

relative to the status of other partitions. They are: 1*18 (Affects Lobby) and 1*19

(Arms Lobby).

1*18 Affects Lobby (must be programmed by partition)

Setting this option to 1 for a specific partition causes that partition to affect the

operation of the common lobby as follows:

a. When the first partition that affects the lobby is disarmed, the lobby will also be

disarmed.

b. The common lobby cannot be armed unless every partition selected to affect

the lobby is armed.

c. Arming the last partition that affects the lobby

will not

automatically attempt to

arm the lobby.

1*19 Arms Lobby (must be programmed by partition)

Setting this option to 1 for a specific partition causes that partition to affect the

operation of the common lobby as follows:

a. When the first partition that affects the lobby is disarmed, the lobby will also be

disarmed.

b. The common lobby cannot be armed unless every partition selected to affect

the lobby is armed.

c. Arming the last partition that is programmed to arm the lobby will automatically

attempt to arm the lobby. If any faults exist in the lobby partition, or another

partition that affects the lobby is disarmed, the lobby cannot be armed, and the

message "UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION" will be displayed.

You cannot select a partition to "arm" the lobby unless it has first been selected

to "affect" the lobby. Enable field 1*18 before enabling field 1*19.

The following chart sums up how the common lobby partition will operate, if

different options are set for another partition in fields 1*18 and 1*19.

1*18 1*19 Disarms when Attempts to arm when Can be armed if

Affects Lobby Arms Lobby partition disarms? partition arms? other partitions

disarmed?

0 0 NO NO YES

1 0 YES NO NO

1 1 YES YES NO

0 1 ---ENTRY NOT ALLOWED---

– 7 –

Example

Here is an example of how the lobby would react in a typical setup.

MAIN ENTRANCE

OFFICE #1 OFFICE #2

COMMON LOBBY

User #1 has access to Office #1 and the Common Lobby.

User #2 has access to Office #2 and the Common Lobby.

Office #1 is set up to affect the Common Lobby, but not arm it.

Office #2 is set up to affect and arm the Common Lobby.

For the purpose of this example, the ( ) indicate the current status of the other

partition when the user takes action.

Sequence #1:

Office 1 Office 2 Lobby Action

User #1: Disarms (Armed) Disarms

User #2: (Disarmed) Disarms No Change

User #1: Arms (Disarmed) No change

User #2: (Armed) Arms Arms

Sequence #2:

Office 1 Office 2 Lobby Action

User #2: (Armed) Disarms Disarms

User #1: Disarms (Disarmed) (No change)

User #2: (Disarmed) Arms No Change

User #1: Arms (Armed) No Change

Notice that in sequence #1, since Office #2 was the last to arm, the lobby also

armed (Office #2 is programmed to affect

and

arm the lobby). In sequence #2,

the lobby could not arm when Office #2 armed, because Office #1, which affects

the lobby, was still disarmed.

When Office #1 armed, the lobby still did not arm because Office #1 was not

programmed to arm the lobby. User #1 would have to arm the lobby manually.

Therefore, you would want to program a partition to affect

and

arm the lobby, if

the users of that partition are expected to be the "last out" of the building.

–8–

How User Access Codes Affect the Common Lobby

Codes with "Global" Arming

If a code is given "global arming" when it is defined (see Section 24:

SECURITY

ACCESS CODES

), the keypad will ask "Arm all?" or "Disarm all?" whenever the

user tries to arm or disarm the partitions he has access to from an alpha keypad.

This allows the user to pick and choose the partitions to be armed or disarmed,

and so eliminates the "automatic" operation of the lobby. Keep in mind, however,

that if attempting to arm all, and another "affecting" partition is disarmed, the user

will not be able to arm the lobby, and the message "UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY

PARTITION" will be displayed.

Codes with "Non-Global" Arming

If arming with a non-global code, or if arming with a global code from a non-alpha

keypad, the lobby partition operation will be automatic, as described by fields

1*18 and 1*19.

Other Methods of Arming/Disarming

When arming or disarming a partition that affects and/or arms the common lobby

in one of the following manners, lobby logic remains active:

• Quick-Arm

• Keyswitch

• Wireless Button

• Wireless Keypad

Arming/Disarming Remotely

If arming or disarming remotely (through VLINK downloading software), the lobby

will not automatically follow another partition that is programmed to arm or disarm

the lobby. The lobby must be armed separately, after arming all affecting

partitions first.

Auto-Arming/Disarming

If scheduling is used to automatically arm and/or disarm partitions, the Lobby

partition will not automatically follow another partition that is programmed to arm

or disarm the lobby. The lobby must be included as a partition to be

armed/disarmed.

If using auto-arming, make sure that the Auto-arm Delay and Auto-arm

Warning periods (fields 2*05 and 2*06) combined are longer than that of any

other partition that affects the lobby. This will cause the lobby to arm last.

Master Keypad Setup and Operation

Although this system has eight actual partitions, it provides an extra partition

strictly for the purpose of assigning keypads as "Master" keypads for the system.

Any keypad assigned to Partition 9 in #93 Device Programming mode will make

that keypad a "Master" keypad. A Master keypad reflects the status of the entire

system (Partitions 1-8) on its display at one time. This is useful because it

eliminates the need for a security officer in a building to have to "log-on" to

various partitions from one partition's keypad to find out where an alarm has

occurred.

– 9 –

The following is an example of a typical display:

S Y S T E M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

S T A T U S R R N N A * B

Possible status indications include:

A = Armed Away M = Armed Maximum

S = Armed Stay I = Armed Instant

R = Ready N = Not Ready

B = Bypassed/Ready * = Alarm Memory/Trouble present

To obtain more information regarding a particular partition, enter * + [Partition

No.] (i.e., *4). In order to affect that partition, the user must use a code that has

access to that partition. Also, in order for a user of any partition to log onto

Partition 9 to view the status of

all

partitions, that user must have access to all

partitions. Otherwise, access will be denied.

The following is an example of what would be displayed for a fault condition on

Zone 2 (Loading Dock Window) on Partition 1 (Warehouse) when logging on

from a keypad on Partition 9:

WHSE DISARMED

HIT * FOR FAULTS

This is the normal display that appears at Partition 1's keypad(s). Pressing* will

display:

FAULT 02 LOADING

DOCK WINDOW

Additional zone faults will be displayed one at a time. To display a new partition's

status, press * + [Partition No.]. This will display the status of the new partition.

The "Armed" LED on a Master keypad will be lit only if

all

partitions have been

armed successfully. The "Ready" LED will be lit only if

all

partitions that are

disarmed are "ready to arm." Neither LED will be lit if only some partitions are

armed and only some disarmed partitions are "ready."

The sounder on a Master keypad will reflect the sound of the most critical

condition on all of the partitions. The priority of the sounds is as follows:

A. Pulsing fire alarm sounds

B. Steady burglar alarm sounds

C. Trouble sounds (rapid beeping)

The sounder may be silenced by pressing any key on the Master keypad or a

keypad on the partition where the condition exists.

A Master keypad uses the same panics as Partition 1. Master keypad panics are

sent to Partition 1, and will activate on Partitions 1. Therefore, panics must be

programmed for Partition 1.

–10–

Section 3: INSTALLING THE CONTROL

This section provides installation instructions for the following:

• Mounting the control cabinet

• Installing the cabinet lock (if used)

• Installing the main circuit board

• Standard phone line connections

• Connecting the AC transformer

• Installing the backup battery in the cabinet

• Making earth ground connections

Mounting the Cabinet

• Mount the control cabinet to a sturdy wall using fasteners or anchors (not

supplied) in a clean, dry area which is not readily accessible to the general

public. The back of the control cabinet has 4 holes for this purpose.

• Before mounting the circuit board, remove the metal knockouts for the

wiring entry that you will be using. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE

KNOCKOUTS AFTER THE CIRCUIT BOARD HAS BEEN INSTALLED.

Installing The Cabinet Lock

Use an Ademco No. N6277 Cam Lock and No. N6277-1 Push-On Retainer Clip

(supplied).

1. Remove the lock knockout on the

control cabinet cover. Insert the key

into the lock. Position the lock in the

hole making certain that the latch will

make contact with the latch bracket

when the door is closed.

2. While holding the lock steady, insert

the retainer clip into the retainer slots.

CABINET DOOR BOTTOM

RETAINER

CLIP

RETAINER CLIP

(NOTE POSITION)

RETAINER

SLOTS

LOCKED

UNLOCKED

Figure 1. Installing The Lock

ULFor UL installations which are intended to provide certificated burglary service,

refer to the special requirements and ATTACK RESISTANCE

CONSIDERATIONS diagram to follow.

– 11 –

Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing

• The panel door must be supervised. Mount the clip-on tamper switch

(supplied) to the cabinet's right side wall as shown in the diagram and wire it to

any EOLR supervised zone (1-8). Program this zone for Trouble by Day/Alarm

by Night (type 05) or 24-hour audible alarm (type 07) response. The 24-hour

alarm response must be used for multiple partitioned systems.

• Use a bell with a tamper protected housing such as the Ademco AB12. The

bell housing's tamper switch and inner linings tamper must be wired to the

same zone that supervises the panel's tamper switch (see EXTERNAL

SOUNDER section for more information.

• All wiring between the bell and panel must be run in conduit. Remaining wires

do not need to be run in conduit.

• All wiring which is not run in conduit must exit from the knock-out openings

on the bottom or back of the cabinet.

• All unused knockouts must be plugged using the disc plugs and carriage bolts,

supplied, as indicated in the diagram below

• Fasten the cabinet door to the cabinet backbox using the 20 one inch long

philips heads screws (supplied) after all wiring, programming and checkout

procedures have been completed

CABINET ATTACK RESISTANCE CONSIDERATIONS

(Shows typical local Grade A listing installation)

C-COM

PCB

RUN BELL WIRES

IN CONDUIT

▲

PLUG THIS

KNOCK-OUT

▲

CLIP-ON DOOR

TAMPER SWITCH

CABINET

MOUNTING HOLE

(4 PLACES)

▲

PLUG THIS

KNOCK-OUT

PLUG THIS

KNOCK-OUT

PLUG THIS

KNOCK-OUT

▲

RUN ALL REMAINING

WIRES THRU HERE

▲

TO PLUG AN UNUSED KNOCKOUT OPENING, REMOVE KNOCKOUT AND

INSTALL A PAIR OF DISC PLUGS AND A CARRIAGE BOLT AS SHOWN:

KNOCK-OUT

OPENING

DISC PLUGS (DIMPLES IN DISC

PLUG SHOULD REGISTER INSIDE

KNOCK-OUT OPENING

CARRIAGE BOLT

HEX NUT AND

LOCK WASHER CABINET SIDEWALL

(OUTSIDE)

▲

Figure 2: Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations

Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing

• Follow the instructions given above for Mercantile Premises listing,.

• In addition, mount a shock sensor such as Sentrol No. 5402 to the panel’s

backbox. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for proper sensor mounting.

This sensor must also be wired to the same zone that is used to supervise

the panel's tamper switch.

–12–

Installing the Control's Circuit Board

Refer to the diagram below when mounting the PC board.

• Hang the three mounting clips on the raised cabinet tabs. Make sure the

clip orientation is exactly as shown in the diagram to avoid damage to the

clip when mounting screws are tightened. This will also avoid problems with

insertion and removal of the PC board.

• Insert the top of the circuit board into the slots at the top of the cabinet. Make

certain that the board rests in the slots as indicated in step 2 detail.

• Swing the base of the board into the mounting clips and secure the board to

the cabinet with the accompanying screws (as illustrated in

Figure 3

Make certain that the mounting screws are tight. This insures that there is a good

ground connection between the PC board and the cabinet. Also, dress field

wiring away from the microprocessor (center) section of the PC board. Use the 2

loops on the left and right sidewalls of the cabinet for anchoring field wiring using

tie wraps. These steps are important to minimizing the risk of panel RF

interference with television reception.

3RD CLIP

REQUIRED

DETAIL SIDE VIEW OF CLIP INSTALLATION

A-CABINET TAB WITHOUT CLIP

B-CABINET TAB WITH HANGING CLIP

DETAIL SIDE VIEW OF CLIP AND

BAORD INSTALLED

DETAIL SIDE

VIEW OF BOARD

INSERTED INTO

SLOTS

Figure 3. Mounting The PC Board

Standard Phone Line Connections

1. Connect the incoming phone line and handset wiring to the main terminal

block as follows (also see

Figure 4

TB1-26: Local Handset (TIP)

TB1-27: Local Handset (RING)

TB1-28: Incoming Phone Line (TIP)

TB1-29: Incoming Phone Line (RING)

– 13 –

2. If you want to connect the panel to phone lines that require ground start

capability, then a 675 Ground Start Module must be used. This module is

triggered by one of the outputs on the connector labeled J7 (see

VOLTAGE

TRIGGERS

section).

ULThe system must be connected to a phone line which provides loop start service.

Phone lines which provide ground start service are not permitted in UL

applications.

To prevent the risk of shock, disconnect phone lines at telco jack before servicing

the panel.

PABX

•If the communicator is connected to a telephone line inside a PABX, be sure

the PABX has a back-up power supply that can support the PABX for 24

hours. Many PABXs are not power backed up and connection to such a

PABX will result in a communication failure if power is lost.

TERMINALS

ON CONTROL

EARTH GROUND

INCOMING TELCO LINE

➡

Handset Incoming

Telco Line

TIP

RING

RJ31X

JACK

PLUG

DIRECT

CONNECT

CORD

➧

TIP

RING

GROUND

▲

▲▲

PREMISES

PHONES

▲

{

BROWN (TIP)

GRAY (RING)

GREEN (TIP)

RED (RING)

26 27 28 29 30

Figure 4. Standard Telephone Line Connections

Connecting the AC Transformer

1361:

1. Wire the 1361 transformer (1361CN in Canada) to terminals 1 and 2 on the

control panel (before connecting the battery) as shown

Figure 5

. See wiring

table below for wire guage to use.

Do not plug the transformer into the AC outlet until you are instructed to do so.

–14–

NO CONNECTION

TRANSFORMER

16.5VAC, 40VA

ADEMCO No.1361

(IN CANADA

USE No. 1361CN)

or 4300 IF

X-10 DEVICES

WILL BE USED

Connect to

24hr. 120VAC,

60 Hz Outlet

123

RED (+)BLK (–)

Connect to

12VDC, 4AH

or 12VDC, 7AH

GEL CELL

BATTERY

CHARGING

VOLTAGE

13.7 VDC

Replace

every

3 years

NOTE:

WHEN POWERING UP

THE PANEL, PLUG THE

TRANSFORMER IN BEFORE

CONNECTING THE BATTERY.

BATTERY

TABS

PRIMARY POWER

Supplied by 1361*

Plug-in

Transformer which

is rated at

16.5VAC, 40VA.

Caution must be

taken when wiring

this transformer to

the panel to guard

against blowing the

fuse inside the

transformer (non-

replaceable).

Figure 5: AC Power And Battery Connections

4300

If using Powerline Carrier devices, the 4300 transformer interface must be used

instead

of the regular 1361 transformer. The 4300 supplies the control panel

with AC, and also acts to send control pulses through the premises electrical

system to control the Powerline Carrier devices. Connect the 4300 as follows:

1. Connect terminals 1 and 3 (AC) and terminal 2 (Ground) of the 4300

transformer interface to control panel terminals 1, 2, and 30, respectively.

2. Run a 6-conductor cable between the 4300 and the panel. Splice this cable

to a 4142TR cable as shown in

Figure 6

. Note that the white and yellow

wires of the 4142TR must be spliced together.

123456789

GROUND

OUT 6

IN 2

GROUND

IN 3

GROUND

OUT 5

J8 CONNECTOR

BLACK

BLUE

BROWN

GREEN

RED

WHITE

YELLOW

GRAY

VIOLET

4142TR CABLE

123456

TB1

-1 TB1

-30 TB1

-2

AC Earth

Ground AC Sync Data Com

4300 TRANSFORMER/INTERFACE

Figure 6: 4300 Transformer Connections

Do not plug the transformer into the AC outlet until you are instructed to do so

later in the manual.

– 15 –

The complete wiring for the 4300 transformer is also covered in Section 9:

RELAY OUTPUTS & POWERLINE CARRIER DEVICES

Installing The Back-Up Battery

If necessary, refer to Section 15:

FINAL

POWER-UP PROCEDURE

for

information regarding battery size to use, etc.

Do not attach the connector cable to the battery terminals until you are

instructed to do so later in the manual.

1. Place the 12-volt back-up battery in the control cabinet.

2. Attach Red and Black wires on the battery connector cable as follows:

a. Red to the positive (+) battery terminal on the control board (see

Figure 4

or the Summary of Connections Diagram for location, if necessary).

b. Black to the negative (–) battery terminal on the control board.

ULUse a 4AH battery or larger for UL installations.

Earth Ground Considerations

In order for the lightning transient protective devices in this product to be

effective, the designated earth ground terminal (terminal 30), must be terminated

in a good earth ground. Recommended wire gauge for the ground connection is

#16 AWG run no further than 30 feet. The following are examples of good earth

grounds available at most installations:

• Metal Cold Water Pipe: Use a non-corrosive metal strap (copper is

recommended) firmly secured to the pipe to which the ground lead is

electrically connected and secured.

• AC Power Outlet Ground: Available from 3-prong, 120VAC, power outlets

only. To test the integrity of the ground terminal, use a three-wire circuit tester

with neon lamp indicators, such as the UL-Listed Ideal Model 61-035, or

equivalent, available at most electrical supply stores.

–16–

Section 4: THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING

This section provides the following information:

• Using Data Field Program Mode

• System and communication defaults

• Entering Data Field Program Mode

• Moving from one level (page) of program fields to another

• Entering and viewing data fields

• Programming partition-specific data fields

• #93 Menu Mode Programming

Using Data Field Program Mode

Data Field program mode is the program mode through which many system

options are programmed. The field numbers on the program form show the

number of entries required for each field. When an entry is completed, the

keypad "beeps" three times and advanced to the next field. At this point, you can

either make the required entry in the new field, or press * + the next field number

you want to program.

There are several "question and answer" modes, which we call "Menu" modes

that can be accessed once Data Field program mode has been entered. These

modes prompt the user for information, and for this reason, a 2-line alpha keypad

(5137AD, 6139) is required.

System and Communication Defaults

• The system is shipped with a set of pre-programmed default values that are

designed to meet the needs of many installations. These can be changed by

the installer to suit specific needs if desired.

• There are four sets of pre-programmed communication defaults available,

including Low Speed, 4+2 Express, Ademco High Speed, and Ademco

Contact ID. Loading one of these defaults automatically programs industry

standard codes that will suit most of your needs.

• These defaults can be changed directly from the alpha keypad (5137AD or

6139), or they can be changed by using V-LINK downloading software (be

sure that the software version used includes a VISTA 50 with scheduling

menu selection). Downloading can be performed either remotely from an IBM

compatible computer (using an approved modem) or at the job site (direct-wire

download using the 4100SM Serial Module)

The factory loaded defaults (*97) enable keypad addresses 00-03 only. A keypad

set to one of these addresses must be used to program the system.

Entering Data Field Programming Mode

1. Enter program mode using either method A or B:

A) Press both the [*] and [#] keys at the same time within 30 seconds after

power is applied to the Control.

B) Enter the [Installer Code] + [8] + [0] + [0] keys. The factory installer

code can be changed once in the program mode (field *00).

Local keypad programming can be disabled through VLink downloading software.

If this is done, programming can only be accomplished via the downloading

software.

– 17 –

2. After entry into the program mode, the following will be displayed:

Program Mode

*Fill # View -00

3. Following this display, enter * and the first field number to be programmed.

Enter the first field number to be programmed (ex. *00, installer's code) and

make the desired entry. When the field is complete, the keypad will normally

"beep" three times and will advance to the next field. If you do not desire to

change the next field, press * and the next field number to be programmed.

First Page of fields

(*00-*90)

press *99 or *98 to exit program mode

Moving from One Page of Programming to Another

• The data fields are grouped into three levels (referred to as "pages"). The first

page is accessed as soon as programming mode is entered.

• The second and third pages of data fields are indicated at the keypad by a

"1" or "2" respectively in front of the 2-digit field address. The words "ALT

PROGRAM MODE" along with a "100" or "200", depending on which page of

program fields is accessed, to indicate the higher page of fields.

1. To access the next level of fields, press *94.

2. Then press * + [XX], where XX=the last two digits of the program field, and

make the desired entry.

3.To return to the previous page of fields, press *99.

press *94 to move to 2nd page press *99 to move back to 1st page

second page of fields

(1*01-1*76)

press *94 to move to 3rd page press *99 to move back to 2nd page

third page of fields

(2*00-2*21)

Viewing Data Fields

To view the contents of a data field, press [#] plus the 2-digit field address. The

field's entries will be displayed, but no changes can be made.

Entry Errors

• If an address is improperly entered, the keypad will display FC.

• If a program entry is improperly entered (for example, a larger number than

that which is permitted), the keypad display will go blank.

• In either of the above cases, simply re-enter * + the correct field number.

SUMMARY OF DATA FIELD PROGRAMMING COMMANDS

*94 Next page of fields

*99 Previous page of fields or exit programming mode with no installer lockout

*91 Select partition for programming partition-specific fields

*98 Exit programming mode with installer lock-out

–18–

Programming System-Wide Data Fields

Values for some programming fields are system-wide (global), and some can be

different for each partition (partition-specific). Note that the partition-specific

programming fields are automatically skipped when programming the global

fields. If the system has only 1 partition, the partition-specific fields

will not

automatically skipped. To program system-wide data fields, do the following:

1. Enter Program Mode: Installer code + 8 0 0.

2. When the program screen is displayed, press *00 to begin programming the

Installer Code data field.

When you have completed the entry, the keypad sounds three beeps and

automatically displays the next program field in sequential order.

3. To program specific data fields out of sequence, press * plus the 2-digit field

address of the field number you want to program, then make the required

entry.

If the number of digits that you enter in a data field is less than the maximum

permitted (ex. phone number), the keypad displays the last entry and waits.

To proceed, enter * + the next data field you wish to program (ex. press *05).

Partition-Specific programming fields are skipped.

4. To change to the next page of fields, press *94.

To return to the previous page of fields, press *99.

Programming Partition-Specific Data Fields

To program partition-specific data fields once in program mode, do the following:

1. Press *91, which will prompt you for the partition number desired.

2. Enter a partition-specific field number (ex. *09) to begin programming. When

the first field’s entry is completed, the next partition-specific field will

automatically be displayed. When all partition-specific fields are

programmed, the system returns to the global programming fields (page 1

fields). To return to the global program fields before finishing all fields, enter

any global field number.

3. Repeat this procedure for each partition in the installation.

PROGRAMMING PARTITION-SPECIFIC FIELDS

Press *91 to select a partition

Enter the partition to be programmed

Enter a partition-specific field # and make entry

After partition -specific fields are programmed,

press *91 to select next partition.

Enter any global field number to return to the global fields at any time.

– 19 –

#93 Menu Mode Programming

The #93 Menu Mode is a mode through which much of the system's

programming is done. It offers main menu selections for the following:

Zone Programming

Serial Number Programming

Alpha Programming

Device Programming

Relay Programming

Relay Voice Descriptors

Custom Index Programming (VIP Module substitute words)

Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES) in response to the displayed menu selection. Pressing

0 will display the next choice in sequence. The keypad will then prompt you with

questions regarding the programming of a particular zone or device. (Refer to

the individual sections to program each option shown.)

The following is a list of commands used while in the menu mode.

#93 Menu Mode Key Commands

#93 Enters Menu mode

[*] Serves as ENTER key. Press to have keypad accept entry.

[#] Backs up to previous screen.

0 Press to answer NO

1 Press to answer YES

00+[*] Escapes from menu mode, back into data field programming

mode, if entered at the first prompt of each main menu option.

–20–

Section 5:

INSTALLING THE KEYPADS

This section provides the following information:

• A list of wired keypads that may be used

• Instructions for wiring and mounting the keypads

• Instructions for addressing the keypads

• A preliminary check-out procedure to ensure that the keypads are

functioning properly in the system

Keypads That May Be Used

• Two Line Alpha Display: 6139, 5137AD

• Fixed-Word Display: 6137, 6128, 4137AD

• Up to 16 addressable devices, including keypads, may be used in the system,

as long as the auxiliary current is available (you may need to use an auxiliary

power supply if the 750mA auxiliary output is exceeded)

Wiring To The Keypads

1. Determine wire gauge by referring to the wiring length/gauge chart below.

2. Wire keypads to a single wire run or connect individual keypads to separate

wire runs. The maximum wire run length from the control to a single keypad

which is home-run back to the control must not exceed the lengths listed in

the table.

Wire Run Length Table

Wire Gauge Length

#22 gauge 450 feet

#20 gauge 700 feet

#18 gauge 1100 feet

#16 gauge 1750 feet

1. The length of all wire runs combined must not exceed 2000 feet when

unshielded quad conductor cable is used (1000 feet if shielded cable is

used.)

2. If more than one keypad is wired to a run, then the above maximum lengths

must be divided by the number of keypads on the run (i.e. the maximum

length would be 225 feet if two keypads are wired on a #22 gauge run).

For keypads connected to a single 4-wire run, determine the current drawn by all

units connected to the single wire run, then refer to the Wiring Run chart to

determine the maximum wire length that can be safely used for each wire size.

Current draw for all devices can be found in the

SPECIFICATIONS AND

ACCESSORIES

section.

3. Run field wiring from the control to the keypads (using standard 4-conductor

twisted wire cable using the wire gauge determined in step 1).

– 21 –

4. Connect keypads to the Keypad Port terminals 6, 7, 8, and 9 on the control

board, as shown in Figure 4.

KEYPADS

BLACK

RED

GREEN

YELLOW

CONTROL

TERMINALS

Figure 7. Keypad Connections To the Keypad Port terminals.

Using a Supplementary Power Supply to Power Additional Keypads

The control provides 750mA of auxiliary standby power for powering keypads

and other devices from the auxiliary power output. Aside from this, the control

can support up to 16 peripheral devices (keypads, RF receivers, relay modules,

etc.). The backup battery will supply power to these devices in the event that AC

power is lost.

When the control’s auxiliary power load for all devices exceeds 750mA, you can

power additional keypads from a regulated, 12VDC power supply (e.g., 487-12

supplies 12V, 250mA; 488-12 supplies 12V, 500mA). Use a UL Listed, battery-

backed supply for UL installations.

The 487-12/488-12 power supplies have a backup battery which can power these

keypads in the event of AC power loss.

Keypads powered from supplies which do not have a backup battery will not

function when AC power is lost. Therefore, be sure to power at least one

keypad from the Control's auxiliary power output.

Connect the additional keypads as shown in

Figure 8

, using the keypad wire

colors shown. Be sure to observe the current ratings for the power supply used.

1. Make connections directly to the screw terminals as shown in Figure 5.

Make no connection to the keypad blue wire (if present).

2. Be sure to connect the negative (–) terminal on the Power Supply unit to

terminal 7 (AUX – ) on the control.

–22–

SUPPLEMENTARY

POWER SUPPLY

+–

CONTROL

TERMINAL STRIP

AUX AUX.DATA DATA

+ – IN OUT

6789

IMPORTANT:

MAKE THESE

CONNECTIONS

DIRECTLY TO

SCREW

TERMINALS AS

SHOWN.

TO KEYPAD RED WIRE

TO KEYPAD BLK WIRE

TO KEYPAD YEL WIRE

TO KEYPAD GRN WIRE

TO KEYPAD RED WIRE

TO KEYPAD YEL WIRE

IMPORTANT:

Make connections directly to screw

terminals. Make no connection to the

keypad blue wire (if present).

TO KEYPAD BLK WIRE

TO KEYPAD GRN WIRE

Figure 8: Using A Supplementary Power Supply For Keypads

Mounting the Keypads

1. Mount the keypads at a height that is convenient for the user. Refer to the

instructions provided with the keypad for mounting procedure.

You can either surface mount or flush mount keypads (using an appropriate

Trim Ring Kit: 5137TRK or 6139TRK). Refer to the mounting instructions

and template included with the keypad and/or trim ring kit for specific

information.

Addressing the Keypads/Preliminary Check-out Procedure

If you want to check that the system is working before connecting field wiring

from zones and devices, do the following:

1. Temporarily connect a 2000 ohm end-of-line resistor across each of the basic

hard-wire zones 1–8, as shown in the Summary of Connections diagram.

Connect a jumper across the zone 9 terminals. Without actual zone wiring or

EOL resistors connected, the keypads will not display the “Ready” message.

2. Power up the system temporarily by plugging the AC transformer (previously

wired to the control) into a 120VAC outlet.

The keypads will not operate until they are physically addressed and enabled in

the system's Device Programming Mode.

3. Set each keypad to an individual address (00-30) according to the keypad's

instructions. Set one alpha keypad for address "00" and other keypads for

higher addresses (01, 02, and 03 are enabled in the system's default

program). Any keypads set for address 04 and above will appear blank until

they are enabled in the system's program.

Keypads set to the non-addressable mode (address 31) may interfere with other

keypads (as well as other devices) connected to the keypad terminals.

– 23 –

4. After addresses are set, the green “READY” LED (or “POWER” LED on some

types of keypads) should light, and the word READY (Fixed-word keypads), or

DISARMED...READY TO ARM (Alpha keypads) should be displayed on

keypads set to addresses 00, 01, 02, and 03.

If the “Ready” display does not appear on any of the keypads in the system (in

either of the partitions), or a “Not Ready” message is displayed, check the

keypad wiring connections, and make sure each of the 8 basic hard-wired

zones has a 2000-ohm resistor connected across its terminals.

5. When the proper “Ready” message is displayed on the keypad(s) addressed

at 00, 01, 02, and 03 the system is functioning properly at this point.

Do not remove the EOL resistors until you are ready to make connections to

the hard-wired zones, to allow for testing later in the manual.

If an OC or OPEN CIRCUIT is present on the keypad, data from the control is not

reaching the keypad. Please check your wiring.

Programming Remote Keypads

Each keypad's corresponding address must be enabled in the system's

Device

Programming Mode

in order to become operational. To accomplish this, do the

following:

With at least one two-line alpha keypad connected to the system and addressed

as described previously:

1. Enter data field programming mode (Installer Code + 8 0 0 ).

2. Program field 2*00 (Number of Partitions)

Refer to Section 4: THE

MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING

if you need

information about how to move around in program mode).

3. From Data Field Programming mode, press #93.

4. Press 0 (NO) to each menu option until the "DEVICE PROG?" prompt

appears.

DEVICE PROG?

1=YES 0=NO Press 1 (YES) to enter DEVICE PROGRAMMING mode.

The following prompts will appear.

DEVICE ADDRESS

01-31, 00=QUIT

The device address identifies the keypad to the control.

Enter the 2-digit address number as set at the keypad

(01-30). Press * to continue.

DEVICE TYPE Select the type of addressable keypad as follows:

00 = device not used

01 = alpha keypad (5137AD/6139)

02 = fixed word keypad (4137AD/6137/6128)

Press * to continue.

CONSOLE PART. Enter the partition number to which you are assigning

this keypad (01 to maximum number of partitions

programmed for the system in field 2*00). This is the

primary partition for which the keypad is intended to be

used. Enter 09 if the keypad is to be used as a

master

keypad to view the status of all other partitions (see

Master Keypad Setup and Operation

in Section 3:

PLANNING A PARTITION SYSTEM).

Press * to

continue.

–24–

SOUND OPTION Keypads can be individually programmed to suppress

arm/disarm beeps, entry/exit beeps and chime mode

beeps. This helps prevent unwanted sounds from

disturbing users in other areas of the premises.

Enter a number 00-03 for the keypad sounding

suppression options desired for the keypad:

00 = no suppression.

01 = suppress arm/disarm & entry/exit beeps.

02 =suppress chime mode beeps only.

03 =suppress arm/disarm, entry/exit and chime

mode beeps.

Press * to continue. The screen will prompt for the

next keypad address to be programmed.

4. Repeat the procedure above for each keypad used in the system.

5. When all keypads have been programmed, press 00 * at this prompt to exit

Menu mode programming.

The following fields are general keypad options you may want to program now.

These fields do not include Response Types or Report Codes for panic keys,

which must be programmed separately.

*29 QUICK ARM

1*43 PERM. KEYPAD DISPLAY "BACKLIGHT"

6. Enter *99 to exit data field programming mode.

7. Unplug the AC transformer and move on to the next section.

Keypad address 00 is reserved for an alpha keypad with no sounder suppression

options.

– 25 –

Section 6: BASIC HARDWIRED ZONES 1-9

This section provides the following information:

• Common characteristics of hardwired zones

• Wiring burglary and panic devices to zones 1-8

• Wiring 2-wire smoke detectors to zone 1

• Wiring 4-wire smoke detectors to zones 1-8

• Compatible smoke detectors (2- and 4-wire)

• Wiring 2-wire glassbreak detectors to zone 8

• Zone 9 applications

• Check-out procedure for hardwired zones

Common Characteristics of Hardwired Zones 1-8

• EOLR supervision (optional for zones 2-8) supporting N.O. or N.C. sensors

• Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions

• Up to 16 2-wire smoke detectors on zone 1.

• 4-wire smoke or heat detectors on zones 1-8 (power to 4-wire smokes must

be supervised for UL installations)

• Up to 50 2-wire latching glassbreak detectors on zone 8.

Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Zones 1-8

1. Connect sensors/contacts to the hardwire zone terminals (10 through 22).

• Connect N.C. devices in series with the high (+) side of the loop. The

2K EOL resistor must be connected in series with the devices,

following the last device.

• Connect N.O. devices in parallel (across) the loop. Observe polarity

when wiring smoke detectors. The 2K EOL resistor must be connected

across the loop wires at the last device.

–

N.C. N.C.

N.O.

2k EOLR 2k EOLR

+–

–

N.C. N.C.

2k EOLR 2k EOLR

–

N.C.

–

N.C. N.C.

2k EOLR

SMOKE

Zone resistance (Excluding EOLR):

ZONE 1,8: 100 OHMS MAXIMUM

ALL OTHER ZONES: 300 OHMS MAXIMUM

ZONE 1

ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE 5 ZONE 6 ZONE 7 ZONE 8 ZONE 9

2-WIRE SMOKE

DETECTOR LOOP

(Also supports NO/NC Burg contacts)

Programmable Response

(Fast/Normal) Loop

LATCHING TYPE GLASS

BREAK DETECTORS

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

N.C.

N.O.

N.O. N.O.

2k EOLR

N.O. N.O. N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

2k EOLR 2k EOLR

N.C.

GLASS

BREAK

Fire

Usage

Burg.

Usage

Red Jumper

Zone response time:

ZONES 1-8: 350mSec-500mSec

ZONE 9: Programmable for

Fast: 10mSec-15mSec

Normal: 350mSec-500mSec

(default response)

Figure 9: Zones 1-9 Wiring Connections

The maximum zone resistance is 100 ohms for zones 1 and 8, and 300 ohms for

all other zones (excluding the 2K EOL resistor).

–26–

UL1. A zone must be EOLR supervised when used for fire or burglary in UL

Listed Commercial Burglary installations.

2. Zone 9 is unsupervised and may not be used in UL Commercial Burglary

installations

3. A closed-circuit, unsupervised zone may be used for burglary in UL

Residential Burglary installations, provided that interconnecting wires are

no longer than three feet with no intervening walls or barriers.

Wiring 2-Wire Smoke Detectors to Zone 1

Zone 1 has the added capability of supporting 2-wire smoke detectors. This zone

provides enough standby current (2 mA) to power up to sixteen of the smoke

detectors listed on the following page. Each zone provides only enough alarm

current (20 mA) to power one smoke detector in the alarmed state. When

assigned zone type 9, the second entry of a Security Code + OFF sequence at a

keypad will interrupt power to this zone to allow detectors to be reset following an

alarm.

1. Connect 2-wire smoke detectors across zone 1 terminals (10 & 11) as shown

Figure 10

. Observe proper polarity when connecting the detectors.

2. If an EOL resistor is presently connected across zone 1 terminals, remove it.

The EOL resistors must be connected across the loop wires of each

zone at the last detector.

3. See “Programming Hard-Wired Zones” later in this section for a detailed

programming procedure.

The alarm current provided by zone 1 will support only one smoke detector in

the alarmed state.

10 11

2k EOLR

ZONE 1

SMOKE

(+)

(-)

2 WIRE SMOKE

DETECTOR

Figure 10: 2-Wire Smoke Detector Connected to Zone 1

– 27 –

Compatible 2-Wire Smoke Detectors

You may use up to sixteen 2-wire smoke detectors each on zone 1listed in the

table below.

DETECTOR TYPE DEVICE MODEL #

Photoelectric w/heat sensor, direct wire System Sensor 2300T

Photoelectric, direct wire System Sensor 2400

Photoelectric w/heat sensor, direct wire System Sensor 2400TH

Photoelectric w/B401B base System Sensor 2451

Photoelectric w/heat sensor and B401B base System Sensor 2451TH

Ionization, direct wire System Sensor 1400

Ionization w/B401B base System Sensor 1451

Photoelectric duct detect. w/DH400 base System Sensor 2451

Ionization duct detector w/DH400 base System Sensor 1451DH

Ionization, direct wire System Sensor 1100

Ionization w/B110LP base System Sensor 1151

Photoelectric, direct wire, System Sensor 2100

Photoelectric w/heat sensor, direct wire System Sensor 2100T

Photoelectric w/B110LP base System Sensor 2151

NOTE: These smoke detectors are Listed for use with the Vista-50P and are the

only 2-wire smoke detectors that may be used in UL applications.

Unsupervised Usage of Zone 1

Zone 1 can also be used for normally closed, unsupervised devices by doing the

following:

1. Cut the red jumper on the PC board located above Zone 1 (see

Figure 9

2. Connect closed circuit devices in series with terminals 10 and 11.

Wiring 4-Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1-8

When programmed for fire warning usage, all zones can monitor 4-wire smoke

detectors or N.O. fire alarm initiating devices. You may use as many 4-wire

smoke detectors as can be powered from the panel's auxiliary power output

without exceeding the output's rating (see Section 15:

FINAL POWER UP

PROCEDURE

for auxiliary power ratings).

Auxiliary power to 4-wire smoke detectors is not automatically reset after an

alarm and therefore must be momentarily interrupted using either a normally-

closed momentary switch wired in series with one side of the aux. power to the

smokes, or using a 4204 relay as described below.

Using a 4204 relay allows the detectors to be reset via the second entry of a

Security Code + OFF sequence. The 4204 relay must be programmed to

activate on Zone Type/System Operation 54 (Fire Zone Reset). See Section 9:

RELAY OUTPUTS & POWERLINE CARRIER DEVICES

for more information.

1. Connect 12 volt power for the detectors from Auxiliary Power terminals 6 and

7 as follows:: Wire the [+] side of Auxiliary Power (Terminal 6) to the N.C.

contact of the 4204 relay. Wire the Pole of the Relay to the [+] Power side of

the smoke detector. Connect the [-] side of the smoke detector to [-] Aux.

Power (Terminal 7). Observe proper polarity when connecting detectors (see

Figure 11

–28–

ULPower to 4-wire smoke detectors must be supervised (use a System Sensor A77-

716-01 EOL relay module connected as shown).

4-WIRE

SMOKE

DETECTOR

EOL

RELAY

NO CONNECTION

{

PANEL

ZONE

(ZONE 2-8)

{

PANEL

AUXILIARY

POWER

(TERMINALS 6, 7)

CNCNO

RESET

RELAY 1, 2, 3 OR 4

4204 RELAY MODULE

NOTES:

• PROGRAM THE RELAY TO

TRANSFER ON FIRE ZONE

RESET (ACTIVATION CODE 54).

SEE 4204 RELAY MODULE

SECTION FOR DETAILS.

• SECOND CODE AND OFF

ENTERED AT CONSOLE

MOMENTARILY INTERRUPTS

DETECTOR POWER.

–

Figure 11: 4-Wire Smoke Detector Power Reset Using 4204 Relay Module

2. Connect detectors (including heat detectors, if used) across terminals of

the zone selected. All detectors must be wired in parallel. Remove the

2000 ohm EOL resistor if connected across the selected zone terminals.

You must connect the EOL resistor across the loop wires at the last

detector.

Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors

Use any UL listed 4-wire smoke detector which is rated for 10-14VDC operation

and which has alarm reset time not exceeding 6 seconds. Some compatible 4-

wire smoke detectors are listed below.

Photoelectric, direct wire System Sensor 2412

Photoelectric w/heat sensor, direct wire System Sensor 2412TH

Ionization, direct wire System Sensor 1412

– 29 –

Configuring Zone 7 for Alternate Keyswitch Function

Zone 7 may be programmed to serve as a keyswitch input. If using a keyswitch,

it can be assigned to only one partition. To enable the keyswitch, do the

following:

1. Enter the partition number to which the keyswitch is assigned in program field

*15.

2. Zone 7 is automatically assigned a response type 10 (Interior w/Delay).

3. Wire the keyswitch to zone 7. Connect the EOL resistor across the zone. If

using keyswitch LEDs, wire as shown in the

VOLTAGE TRIGGERS

section.

Wiring 2-Wire Latching Glass Break Detectors To Zone 8

Use zone 8 for connection of compatible 2-wire latching-type glass break

detectors. Wire as follows (also see

Figure 12

1. Connect all detectors in parallel across zone 8 (terminals 21 and 22).

Remove the 2000 ohm EOL resistor if connected across the selected zone

terminals. You must connect the EOL resistor across the loop wires at the last

detector.

GLASSBREAK

DETECTOR

ZONE 8 (+)

(-)

LATCHING TYPE GLASS

BREAK DETECTOR LOOP

2000

OHMS

EOLR 21

Figure 12: Wiring Latching Glassbreak Detectors to Zone 8.

After an alarm, the first code + OFF turns off the siren and disarms the system;

the second code + OFF clears the memory of alarm and resets the glassbreak

detector.

–30–

Compatible Glass Break Detectors

Use detectors that meet the following ratings:

Standby Voltage: 5VDC–13.8VDC

Standby Resistance: Greater than 20k ohms (equivalent resistance of all

detectors in parallel)

Alarm Resistance: Less than 1.1k ohms (see note below)

Alarm Current: 2 mA–10 mA

Reset Time: Less than 6 seconds

The IEI 735L series detectors have been tested and found to be compatible

with these ratings. You can use up to fifty IEI 735L detectors connected in

parallel.

The alarm current provided by zone 8 will support only one Glass Break detector

in the alarmed state.

You can use detectors which exceed 1.1k ohms in alarm, provided they

maintain a voltage drop in alarm of less than 3.8 volts.

1. Do not use other N.O. or N.C. contacts when using glass break detectors on

zone 8. Other contacts may prevent proper glass break detector operation.

2. If latching type devices are installed on both zones 1 and 8, both zones

should be assigned to the same partition. If they are not, and both devices

are in alarm at the same time, the resetting of one could cause a loss of

alarm memory in the other.

Zone 9 Applications:

This zone is unsupervised and is suitable for monitoring fast acting glass break

sensors or vibration sensors. When using zone 9, keep the following in mind:

• Use only closed circuit devices connected in series with one another.

• Program zone 9 as any response type

except

fire (type 09) or panic (types 6,7

or 8)

• Program fast (10 msec) or normal (350 msec-500 msec) response in data field

*14.

Avoid using mechanical magnetic or relay type contacts on zone 9 when

programmed for fast response.

Programming Hardwired Zones

1. With at least one two-line alpha keypad (5137AD/6139) wired and set to a

proper address, power up the system temporarily by plugging the AC

transformer into a 120VAC outlet (previously wired to the control).

2. Enter data field programming mode: [Installer Code] + 8 0 0 and

program the following data fields:

*14 ZONE 9 FAST/NORMAL RESPONSE (1=fast; 0=normal)

*41 NORMALLY CLOSED OR EOLR (Zones 2-8) (1=N.C. loops; 0=EOLR)

2*00 NUMBER OF PARTITIONS (1-8) if you haven't already done this in previous s

3. From data field programming mode, press #93 to display the "ZONE

PROG?" prompt.

– 31 –

ZONE PROG?

1=YES 0=NO Press 1 to enter ZONE PROGRAMMING mode.

While in this mode, press * to display the next

screen, or press # to display the previous screen.

ENTER ZN NO.

00=QUIT 02 Enter the zone number to be programmed 01-09.

Press * to continue.

02 ZT P RC In:L

00 1 00 HW:N A summary screen for that zone will appear. ZT =

zone type; P=partition to which zone is assigned; RC

= report code for that zone; In = input type of zone; L

= Loop number (applies only to 5800 series RF

zones).

Press * to continue.

02 Zone Type

Zone disabled 00 Each zone in a system must be assigned a zone

type, which defines the way in which the system

responds to faults in that zone. Enter the zone

response type for each zone. The screen will

automatically display the zone type for the number

entered. If a different zone response type is desired,

enter a different number and press * to continue.

Zones 1-9 can be assigned any response type

(except zone 9, which cannot be assigned as a fire

zone).

Refer to the ZONE TYPE DEFINITIONS section for

definitions of each zone type.

Zone Types for hardwired zones are as follows:

00 Assign For Unused Zones

01 Entry/Exit #1, Burglary

02 Entry/Exit #2, Burglary

03 Perimeter, Burglary

04 Interior Follower, Burglary

05 Trouble By Day/Alarm By Night

06 24 Hour Silent Alarm

07 24 Hour Audible Alarm

08 24 Hour Auxiliary

09 Fire

10 Interior Delay, Burglary

23 No Alarm Response (Used for

Relay Activation)

02 Partition Enter the partition number (1-8) you are assigning

this zone to. Press * to continue.

02 Report Code Enter the report code for this zone. (Enter the first

digit and press * . Enter the second digit and press

* again. A summary of both digits. will be

displayed). Press * to continue.

–32–

02 Input Type

Hardwired 1:1: Enter the input device type as follows:

0 = not used; 1=hardwired

Press * to continue.

The summary screen is displayed.

Press * to display the "ENTER ZN NO?" prompt for

programming the next hardwired zone.

After all zones have been programmed, enter 00 at

this prompt and press * . The system will prompt

"Quit Menu Mode?" Press 1 to quit. This will return

you to normal (data field) programming mode.

Press *99 to exit program mode.

Enter the [Installer Code] + OFF to cancel the

system's settling delay.

Check-Out Procedure For Hard-Wired Zones

After installation of all hard-wired zones is complete,

each

partition of the security

system should be checked as follows:

1. Make certain that all devices and sensors connected to the hard-wired zones

are not in a faulted state. Doors and windows with contacts should be closed,

PIRs should be covered (use a cloth to mask them temporarily if necessary).

2. With all hard-wired zones intact, the Alpha keypads connected to the system

should display:

DISARMED

READY TO ARM.

If the following is displayed,

DISARMED Press *

to show faults

press the [*] key to display the faulted zone(s). Restore any faulted zone(s)

as necessary (also make sure that you have connected a 2000 ohm EOL

resistor across the terminals of unused zones). When the

DISARMED...READY TO ARM message is displayed, you can proceed to the

next step.

4. Fault and then restore every contact or sensor on each zone individually to

ensure that it is being monitored by the system. Each time a zone is faulted,

the keypads in the partition to which the zone is assigned should display the

number of the faulted zone. When each zone is restored, the READY TO

ARM message should appear again.

If a zone or zones are not displayed at the correct partition's keypad(s), check

both keypad and zone programming to verify the correct partition assignment.

5. When you get the proper displays on the keypad(s), the hard-wired zones in

the system are functioning properly.

6. Unplug the AC transformer and continue to the next section.

– 33 –

Section 7: 2-WIRE POLLING LOOP ZONES 10 - 86

This section provides the following information:

• Polling loop overview

• Common characteristics of polling loop zones

• Wiring RPM devices to the polling loop

• Addressing RPM devices

• Polling loop limitations

• Programming polling loop zones

• Checkout procedure for polling loop zones

Polling Loop Overview

You can expand the system from the basic 9 zones to up to 86 zones using the

built-in 2-wire polling loop. Each device that is connected to the polling loop has

the ability to communicate with the panel about its status. These devices are

called RPMs (Remote Point Modules). The polling loop provides both power and

data to the RPM zones, and is constantly monitoring the status of all zones

enabled on the loop. The maximum current draw of all devices on the polling

loop cannot total more than 64mA (unless using a 4197 Polling Loop Extender

Module).

Refer to the list of compatible devices at the end of this section.

Common Characteristics of Polling Loop Zones

Polling loop zones have the following characteristics:

• Must use RPM (Remote Point Module) devices

• Supervised by control panel

• Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions

Wiring/Addressing RPM Devices

All devices on the pollong loop must be wired in parallel to the [+] and [-] Polling

Loop terminals of the control panel (24 and 25, respectively). You can wire from

device to device, or have multiple branches connected directly to the control

panel in a star configuration. Be sure to observe proper polarity.

Although each polling loop device is wired in parallel, each device has its own

unique zone number (or group of zones if it is an 8- zone expander). On some

devices, this is determined by the setting of DIP switches. Other devices have a

built-in unique serial number which must be "learned" into the control as the zone

number desired. Set up the polling loop as follows:

1. Run wires to each device on the polling loop using the guidelines in the

following table for maximum wire runs per wire gauge. Twisted pair wire is

recommended for all wire runs.

Maximum Polling Loop Wire Runs

Wire Gauge Max. Length

#22 gauge 650 feet

#20 gauge 950 feet

#18 gauge 1500 feet

#16 gauge 2400 feet

Maximum total wire runs combined must not exceed 4000 ft regardless of wire

gauge (2000 ft. if shielded wire is used).

–34–

When running polling loop wires, they must be at least 6" away from A.C. voltage,

telephone, or intercom wiring. Since the polling loop is carrying data between the

control panel and the devices, interference on this loop can cause an interruption

of this communication. The polling loop can also cause outgoing interference on

the intercom or phone lines. If this spacing cannot be achieved, shielded wire

must be used. (Note that the maximum total wire length supported is cut in half

when shielded wire is used.)

2. Wire each device to the polling loop, making sure to use correct polarity

when making connections (refer to the device's instructions).

3. Note the polling loop devices that have DIP switches on them. Set each

device's DIP switches for the zone number you are assigning it. Refer to the

device's instructions or the DIP Switch Tables found at the end of this

manual when setting addresses.

Certain polling loop devices, such as the 4139SN and 4191SN, do not have

DIP switches. Instead, they have embedded serial numbers which must be

"enrolled" by the control during #93 Menu Mode Zone Programming.

4190

RPM

4278

PIR

Polling loop rating:

64mA maximum.

POLLING LOOP

21 22 23 24 25

+–

4192SD

SMOKE

TO RIGHT LOOP

Figure 13. Polling Loop Connections

Note Twisted pair

recommended for all normal

wire runs.

IMPORTANT: When in a star

configuration, no individual run can

be longer than the table indicates,

and the total length of all the sensor

star runs, combined, cannot exceed

4000'. If using unshielded wire in

conduit or shielded wire, the

maximum is 2000'. If longer wire

runs are needed, a 4197 Loop

Extender Module must be used.

Polling Loop Limitations

The built-in polling loop has the following limitations that must be observed:

• The maximum allowable current draw from the polling loop is 64mA. (Refer to

the POLLING LOOP CURRENT DRAW WORKSHEET (found in Section 15:

FINAL POWER-UP PROCEDURE

for current draws of various polling loop

devices.) If devices total more than 64 mA, a 4197 Polling Loop Extender

Module is required.

• Regardless of current draw, no more than 64 devices can be connected to this

loop. Installations which require up to 86 zones will require the use of zone

expanders which accommodate more than one zone per RPM device

(4190WH (2 zones) or 4208 (8 zones)). If more devices are needed, a 4197

Polling Loop Extender Module must be used.

– 35 –

The 4197 Polling Loop Extender Module may be used to provide additional

polling loop current, to extend the polling loop wire run, and/or to provide

individual, electrically isolated polling loops (see

Figure

Be sure to include the total current drawn on the polling loop when figuring the

total auxiliary load on the panel's power supply (use the AUXILIARY CURRENT

DRAW WORKSHEET in Section 15:

FINAL POWER UP PROCEDURE

RPM RPM

INPUT POLLING LOOP

• 64 MA MAX

• UP TO 64 DEVICES/87 ZONES

• NO INDIVIDUAL WIRE RUN ON THIS LOOP CAN BE

LONGER THAN THE TABLE LENGTHS.

• TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL WIRE RUNS, COMBINED,

CANNOT EXCEED 4000 ft. (2000 ft. IF USING

UNSHIELDED WIRE IN CONDUIT OR SHIELDED WIRE).

{

RPM RPM

EXTENSION POLLING LOOP

• 64 MA MAX

• UP TO 64 DEVICES/87 ZONES

• NO INDIVIDUAL WIRE RUN ON THIS LOOP CAN BE

LONGER THAN THE TABLE LENGTHS.

• TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL WIRE RUNS, COMBINED,

CANNOT EXCEED 4000 ft. (2000 ft. IF USING

UNSHIELDED WIRE IN CONDUIT OR SHIELDED WIRE).

{

VISTA-50

VISTA-50UL

4197

POLLING

LOOP

EXTENDER

POWER FOR 4197

12VDC AT 80 MA

UP TO 87 DEVICES/87 ZONES COMBINED

TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL WIRE RUNS ON BOTH LOOPS, COMBINED,

CANNOT EXCEED 6400 ft. (3200 ft. IF USING UNSHIELDED WIRE IN CONDUIT OR SHIELDED WIRE).

NOTES: • No more than one 4197 may be used

• Refer to instructions provided with the 4197 for additional

information on mounting, UL considerations, etc.

4197 may be powered from:

• Panel's auxiliary power output

Power wires may run up to 375 feet

using 16 AWG wire

• Separate supply

VISTA-50P

VISTA-50PUL

Figure 14. Polling Loop Extender Module Wiring

Polling Loop Supervision

A short on the polling loop is indicated by a trouble on its supervisory zone (97)

and reports as a trouble condition only, even if the system is armed. As such, it

should be assigned zone type 05 if annunciation is desired.

If a device on the polling loop fails (the panel cannot "see" that device), the

partition (or partitions) that use that device will display a trouble condition for all

zones associated with that device. If the panel is armed when a device fails, the

zones associated with that device will cause an alarm on the corresponding

partition(s).

A trouble on Zone 97 will not prevent a partition from being armed, as long as all

polling loop zones on that partition are bypassed.

–36–

Programming Polling Loop Zones

1. With at least one two-line alpha keypad (5137AD/6139) wired and set to a

proper address, power up the system temporarily by plugging the AC

transformer into a 120VAC outlet (previously wired to the control).

2. Enter data field programming mode: [Installer Code] + 8 0 0.

3. Program data field *24: IGNORE EXPANSION ZONE TAMPER

(0=Enable Tamper; 1=Ignore Tamper)

3. From data field programming mode, press #93 to display the "ZONE

PROG?" prompt.

ZONE PROG?

1=Yes 0=No Press 1 to enter ZONE PROGRAMMING mode.

While in this mode, press * to display the next

screen, or press # to display the previous screen.

Enter Zn No.

00=QUIT 10 Enter the zone number to be programmed (09 to 87).

Press * to accept entry.

10 ZT P RC In: L

00 1 00 --:N A summary screen for that zone will appear. ZT =

zone type; P=partition to which zone is assigned; RC

= report code for that zone; In:L = input type of zone

Press * to continue.

10 Zone Type

Zone disabled 00

Refer to the ZONE

TYPE DEFINITIONS

section for definitions of

each zone type.

Each zone in a system must be assigned a zone

type, which defines the way in which the system

responds to faults in that zone. Enter the zone

response type for each zone. The screen will

automatically display the zone type for the number

entered. Press * to accept entry. If a different zone

response type is desired, enter a different number

and press *

Zone Types are as follows:

00 Assign For Unused Zones

01 Entry/Exit #1, Burglary

02 Entry/Exit #2, Burglary

03 Perimeter, Burglary

04 Interior Follower, Burglary

05 Trouble By Day/Alarm By Night

06 24 Hour Silent Alarm

07 24 Hour Audible Alarm

08 24 Hour Auxiliary

09 Fire

10 Interior Delay, Burglary

23 No Alarm Response (Used for

Relay Activation)

10 Partition Enter the partition number (1-8) you are assigning

this zone to. Press * to continue.

10 Report Code Enter the report code for this zone. (Enter the first

digit and press * . Enter the second digit and press

* again. A summary of both digits. will be

displayed). Press * to continue.

– 37 –

10 Input Type Enter the input device type as follows:

6=serial number polling loop device (SL type); 7=DIP

switch type (left loop) polling loop device (DP type);

8=right loop of DIP switch type device (PS type).

Right loops refer to the use of the right (or secondary) loop on a 4190WH zone

expander module and/or 4278 PIR. This loop allows standard contacts to be

monitored by the polling loop (N.C. non-supervised devices only--CANNOT be

used in UL installations).

10 LOOP NUMBER If this is a previously "learned" sensor, the loop

number for this zone will appear. Press * to

continue.

10 LEARN S/N ?

1=YES 0=NO If type 6 was entered, and the sensor's serial

number has not been "learned," the serial number

can be learned now by entering 1, or it can be

learned later by using the SERIAL NUMBER LEARN

menu. Enter 0 if serial number will be learned later.

The summary screen will then appear (see summary

screen description above).

10 INPUT S/N :L

A000-0000:1 If learning the serial number now (entering 1 at the

last prompt), this prompt appears. Fault the sensor

two times. The keypad will beep twice after the first

fault and three times upon receiving a matching fault

signal. When the serial number has been

successfully learned, its number appears in the

display. Alternatively, if the serial number is printed

on the device, it can be entered in manually. Once

entered, press (*) to display the next screen.

10 PROG AS SL:1

A001-3078:1 Press * to continue. The summary screen will then

appear as it did when first entering the zone number

to be programmed (see summary screen description

above).

Press * to display the "ENTER ZN NO?" prompt

and program the next zone.

After all zones have been programmed, enter 00 at

this prompt and press * . The system will prompt

"Quit Menu Mode?" Press 1 to quit. This will return

you to normal (data field) programming mode.

Press *99 to exit program mode.

Enter the [Installer Code] + OFF to cancel the

system's settling delay.

–38–

Check-Out Procedure For Polling Loop Zones

After installation of all polling loop zones is complete,

each

partition of the

security system should be checked as follows:

1. Make certain that all devices and sensors connected to the polling loop are not

in a faulted state. Doors and windows with contacts should be closed, PIRs

should be covered (use a cloth to mask them temporarily if necessary).

2. With all hard-wired and polling loop zones intact, the Alpha keypads

connected to the system should display:

DISARMED

READY TO ARM.

If the keypad(s) begins beeping and the word "CHECK" is displayed, along

with a zone or zone numbers, the system either

does not see

the displayed

zone(s) or the tamper switches on 4190WH units are tripped. Please check

your DIP switch settings for the zone(s), your connections, and/or that the

covers for the 4190WH units are in place. Once the situation has been

corrected, enter the [Security Code] + [OFF] sequence twice to clear the

trouble.

If the following is displayed,

DISARMED Press *

to show faults

press the [*] key to display the faulted zone(s). Restore any faulted zone(s)

as necessary. When the DISARMED...READY TO ARM message is

displayed, you can proceed to the next step.

4. Fault and then restore every contact or sensor on each zone individually to

ensure that it is being monitored by the system. Each time a zone is faulted,

the keypads in the partition to which the zone is assigned should display the

number of the faulted zone. When each zone is restored, the READY TO

ARM message should appear again.

If a zone or zones are not displayed at the correct partition's keypad(s), check

both keypad and zone programming to verify the correct partition assignment.

5. When you get the proper displays on the keypad(s), the polling loop zones in

the system are functioning properly.

6. Unplug the AC transformer and continue to the next section.

UL1. The 4208 must either be mounted inside the VISTA-50P cabinet or in a

separate enclosure which has a tamper supervised cover.

2. The 4190WH right loop must not be used, and the left loop must be EOLR

supervised.

3. The 4278 auxiliary sensor loop cannot be used.

4. The 4194 is not UL Listed.

5. The 4197 must be powered from the VISTA-50PUL auxiliary power output

or from a UL listed supplementary power supply.

– 39 –

Compatible Polling Loop Devices

4208 8-Zone Expander • Accommodates up to 8 zones via the polling

loop.

• DIP switch programmable.

• The first two zones can be either normal or

fast response (DIP switch selectable).

• All zones are EOLR supervised (first six

zones = 4.7k ohms, last two zones = 30k

ohms), provided with the 4208.

4190WH 2 -Zone Expander • Accommodates up to 2 zones via the polling

loop.

• DIP switch programmable.

• The left zone can be EOLR supervised

(required in UL installations), can accept

either open or closed circuit sensors, and

can be set for fast response.

• The right zone is unsupervised and can

accept closed circuit sensors only (cannot be

used in UL installations)..

4278 Quad PIR • Quad element PIR with built-in RPM

(connects directly to the polling loop).

• DIP switch programmable.

• Includes mirrors for both wide angle and

curtain/long range applications.

• Features an auxiliary sensor loop that is

non-supervised and can accept closed circuit

sensors only (cannot be used in UL

installations).

4275 Dual PIR • Dual element PIR with built-in RPM

(connects directly to the polling loop).

• DIP switch programmable.

• Includes mirrors for both wide angle and

curtain/long range applications and can use

the 1875PA Pet Alley mirror.

• Built-in selectable pulse count capability.

4194 Surface Mount • Wide gap surface mounted reed contact

Reed Contact with built-in RPM (connects directly to

(Wide Gap) the polling loop).

• DIP switch programmable.

with built-in RPM (connects directly to the

polling loop).

• DIP switch programmable.

–40–

Compatible Polling Loop Devices

4197 Extender Module • Used to increase the polling loop current

(64mA), to extend the polling loop wire run

length, and/or to provide individual,

electrically isolated loops.

• Connects to the polling loop and is powered

from panel's auxiliary power or by a

separate power supply with battery backup.

4192SD Photoelectric • One piece photoelectric smoke detector with

Smoke Detector built-in RPM.

• DIP switch programmable.

4192SDT Photoelectric • One piece photoelectric smoke detector with

Smoke Detector 135°F (57°C) heat detector, and built-in

RPM.

w/Heat Detector • DIP switch programmable.

4192CP Ionization • One piece products of combustion ionization

Smoke Detector detector with built-in RPM.

• DIP switch programmable.

4139SN Serial Number • Compact surface mount magnetic reed

Surface Mount contact with built-in RPM.

Reed Contact • Serial number ID "learned" by control

panel.

4191SN Serial Number • Recessed (1/2" dia.) magnetic reed contact

Recessed with built-in RPM.

Reed Contact • Serial number ID "learned" by control

panel.

4939SN Surface Mount • Surface mount magnetic reed contact with

Magnatic Reed built-in RPM.

Contact • 5 ft. jacketed cable.

• Serial Number ID "learned" by control

panel.

4959SN Aluminum • Aluminum overhead door contact

Overhead Door • 24-inch armored cable

Contact • Serial number ID "learned" by control.

7500 Single Technology • Glass break detector with built-in RPM.

Glass Break Detector • DIP switch programable.

9500 Dual Technology • Dual technology glass-break detector with

Glass Break Detector built-in RPM.

• DIP switch programmable.

– 41 –

Section 8: WIRELESS (RF) ZONE EXPANSION

This section provides the following information:

• Common characteristics of wireless zones

• Wireless systems available

• Installing the wireless receiver (4281/5881)

• Installing the 5800TM Module

• Programming the wireless receiver (4281/5881)

• Installing the wireless transmitters (5700/5800 series)

• Programming the wireless transmitters (5700/5800 series)

• Checkout Procedure for wireless zones (test modes)

Common Characteristics of Wireless Zones

• Supervised by control panel for check-in signals (except certain non-

supervised transmitters)

• Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions

ULWireless may not be used in UL Commercial Burglary installations.

Wireless Systems Available

The VISTA-50P supports wireless zones which may be used exclusively or in

addition to hardwire and/or polling loop zones. The system supports two different

wireless systems which have many similarities, but notable differences in the

programming of the transmitters for each system.

The following receivers may be used with this system and each supports the

number of zones shown below:

5700 Series

Recvr Zones

4281L up to 4

4281M up to 8

4281H up to 63

5800 Series

Recvr Zones

5881L up to 8

5881M up to 16

5881H up to 86

In Canada, 5800 systems must use 5882 series receivers: 5882L/5882H.

Information in this manual relative to the 5881 receivers applies as well to the

5882 receivers. 5881 and 5882 receivers can all use the same transmitters.

–42–

Wireless System Operation and Supervision

• The receiver responds to status and alarm signals from wireless transmitters

(@ 345MHz USA; 315MHz (5700 series) and 345 MHz (5800 series)

Canada) within a nominal range of 200 feet, and relays this information to the

control.

• Each supervised transmitter sends a supervisory signal to the receiver every

70-90 minutes. If, after a programmed interval of time (i.e., 12 hrs), the

receiver does not hear from a

particular

transmitter, the word CHECK will

appear at the corresponding partition's keypad(s) accompanied by the zone

number in question. The trouble will not prevent you from arming the panel,

as long as the zone is first bypassed.

• If, within a programmed interval of time (i.e., 12 hrs), the receiver does not

hear from

any

of its transmitters, a CHECK message will appear for zones 88

(2nd receiver) or 90 (1st receiver) if zone type 05 is assigned to these

supervisory zones. This may be an indication that the wireless receiver is not

able to "hear" signals.

• The control checks the receiver connections about every 45 seconds. If the

panel has lost communication with the receiver, a CHECK message will

appear for zones 89 (2nd receiver) or 91 (1st receiver) if type 05 is assigned

to these supervisory zones. This may be an indication that the wiring to the

receiver is incorrect, or that the DIP switches are not set for the same

address the receiver was assigned to in the panel's Device Programming

mode.

• Two identical receivers can be used to provide either a greater area of

coverage, or to provide redundant protection.

• Any zone from 1-63 can be used as a 5700 series wireless zone. Any zone

from 1-86 can be used as a 5800 series wireless zone, with the exception of

zone 64 (reserved for a wireless keypad).

Wireless System Installation Advisories

1. Place the receiver in a high, centrally located area for best reception. Do not

place receiver on or near metal objects. This will decrease the range and/or

block transmissions. Do not mount receivers or transmitters in an attic,

where extreme temperatures could prevent proper operation.

2. For maximum range, install the wireless receiver at least 10 feet from the

Control panel or any keypads to avoid interference from the microprocessors

in these units.

3. If dual receivers are used:

A. Both must be at least 10 feet from each other, as well as from the Control

panel and remote keypads.

B. Each receiver must be set to a different Device Address (01-07). The

receiver set to the lower address is considered the 1st wireless receiver

for supervisory purposes.

C. The house IDs must be the same (applies only to 5700 series or if using

a 5827/5827BD wireless keypad).

D. Using two Receivers

does not

increase the number of transmitters the

system can support (63 zones using 4281H; 86 zones using the 5881H)

plus a wireless keypad).

4281 microprocessor must have part number N5334Vx, where x is any number.

The microprocessor is located just above the DIP switch on the PC board.

– 43 –

Installation and Setup of the 4281/5881 Wireless Receivers

1. Mount the receiver(s). Receivers must be mounted externally to the control

and can detect signals from transmitters within a nominal range of 200 feet.

Take this into consideration when determining mounting location.

2. Connect the receiver's wire harness to the control's keypad terminals (6, 7, 8,

and 9). Plug the connector at the other end of the harness into the receiver

(see

Figure 15

3. Refer to the installation instructions provided with the receiver for further

installation procedures regarding antenna mounting, etc.

MOUNTING

HOLES INTERFERENCE

INDICATOR

LED

CIRCUIT

BOARD

DIP SWITCH

PLUG

SOCKET

INSERT IN

RIGHT-HAND

TERMINALS

ANTENNAS

YELLOW

RED

BLACK

GREEN

}

TO CONTROL’S REMOTE

KEYPAD CONNECTION

POINTS. EACH RECEIVER

MUST BE ON INDIVIDUAL

HOME RUN.

WIRING

OPENING

KNOCKOUT

AREA FOR

SURFACE

WIRING

DIPSWITCH POSITION #5 (PRESENT ONLY ON 5881EH)

ON: SETS 5881EH FOR USE IN COMMERCIAL FIRE

APPLICATIONS (SEE THE RECEIVER’S INSTRUCTIONS).

OFF: USE IN NON-COMMERCIAL FIRE INSTALLATIONS.

ON OFF

NOTE:

SWITCH POSITION

5 PRESENT ON

5881EH ONLY.

Figure 15: 5881 Wireless Receiver (cover removed)

4. Set the receiver's DIP switches for an address (01-07) which is not being used

by another device (i.e., keypads, relay modules, etc.).

Take note of the address you select for the wireless receiver as this address

must be enabled in the system's

Device Programming

mode (described later in

this section).

–44–

Installing the 5800TM Module

Installation of this module is necessary only if you are using one or more 5827BD

Wireless Bi-directional keypads.

The 5800TM must be located between one and two feet from the 4281 or 5881

receiver's antennas. The 5800TM must not be installed within the control

cabinet. Mount the unit using its accompanying mounting bracket.

5800TM Wiring Connections

Connect the 5800TM to the control panel’s keypad connection terminals, using

the supplied connector with flying leads, as follows:

WIRE TERMINAL ON CONTROL

RED (+12VDC) Terminal 6

BLACK (Ground) Terminal 7

GREEN (Data to Control) Terminal 8

YELLOW (Data from Control) Terminal 9

BLUE: Not Used

Cut the red jumper for address setting 28; cut the white jumper for address 29;

cut both jumpers for address 30.

This address must be enabled as an alpha keypad in the control's

Device

Programming

mode and then assigned to a partition, as described later in this

section.

For additional information, refer to the 5800TM’s instructions.

Programming The Wireless Receiver

1. With at least one two-line alpha keypad (5137AD/6139) wired and set to a

proper address, power up the system temprarily by plugging the AC

transformer into a 120VAC outlet (previously wired to the control).

2. Enter data field programming mode: Installer Code + 8 0 0 .

a. If using a 4281: set data field 1*32 to 1

If using a 5881: set data field 1*32 to 2

b. Set data field 1*30 RF RCVR CHECK-IN INTERVAL (02-15 times 2 hrs.).

3. From data field programming mode, press #93 to display the "ZONE

PROG?" prompt. Press 0 (NO) repeatedly until the "DEVICE PROG?"

prompt appears. Follow the instructions below.

DEVICE PROG?

1=yes 0=no Press 1 to enter DEVICE PROGRAMMING mode.

DEVICE ADDRESS?

01-31 Enter the 2-digit device address number as set by

the receiver's DIP switches (01-07). Press * to

continue.

DEVICE TYPE Enter device type 03 = RF Expander.

Press * to continue.

RF EXPANDER

HOUSE ID XX Enter the 2-digit house ID (00-31) as determined by

sniffer mode (use an ID not displayed during sniffer

mode, as explained later in this section). Applies

only to 5700 series systems or if using a wireless

keypad (5827/5827BD) with 5800 series systems.

Press * to continue.

The system will now prompt for the next device

address to be programmed.

– 45 –

The system House ID and the Device Address of the receiver are two different

things.

The House ID allows the system to identify transmitters with a matching

House ID. If using 5700 series wireless systems, the DIP switches on the

transmitters must match the system

House ID

programmed into the control. If

using a 5827BD wireless keypad, the House ID also applies. Other 5800 series

devices do not communicate by House ID, but by transmitting a unique serial

number to the control. In this case, programming a House ID would not be

necessary.

The Device Address allows the system to identify the receiver as opposed to

other devices connected to its keypad terminals. Therefore, the DIP switches on

the RF Receiver must match the

Device Address

4. At the "DEVICE ADD?" prompt, press 00 * to exit Menu Mode programming

and return to Data Field programming. Press *99 to exit programming mode

or proceed to the next section.

If using a 5800 TM module, it must be programmed for Device Address 28, 29, or

30 (depending on which jumper(s) is cut) as either Device Type 1 or 2.

ULFor UL Household Fire/Burglary applications, use of 1 or 2 RF RCVRs requires

enabling their respective faults (88-91) as applicable (type 5).

House ID Sniffer Mode

This mode applies only to 5700 series systems, or if you are using a wireless

keypad (5827/5827BD) in a 5800 series system.

5700 series receivers respond only to transmitters set to the same House ID (01-

31) that is programmed into the control panel. This prevents system interference

from transmitters in other nearby systems. Use the House ID Sniffer Mode to

make sure you do not choose a House ID that is in use in a nearby system. To

enter this mode, proceed as follows:

1. Enter your "Installer Code" + # +2.

2. The receiver will now "sniff" out any House IDs in the area and display them.

Keep the receiver in this mode for about 2 hours to give a good indication of

the House IDs being used. Use a House ID that is not displayed.

3. To exit the Sniffer Mode, simply enter your Installer Code + OFF.

Since Sniffer Mode effectively disables wireless point reception, Sniffer Mode

cannot be entered while any partition is armed.

–46–

5700 Series Transmitter Setup

Each 5700 series transmitter has DIP switches to set both the transmitter's zone

number (Transmitter ID) and the system House ID. The House ID will be the

same for all transmitters and must match the House ID programmed into the

system (via Device Programming) for the wireless receiver. This can be likened

to a family in which everyone has the same last name (House ID), but each

person has a different first name (Transmitter ID). The zone number must then

be programmed into the system using #93 Menu Mode–Zone Programming

Menus.

5700 Series Transmitter Supervision

• Each transmitter (except 5701 and 5727) is supervised by a check-in signal

that is sent to the receiver at 70-90 minute intervals. If at least one check-in is

not received from a transmitter within a certain period of time (Programmed in

field 1*31), the keypad will display the zone number and "CHECK."

• Each transmitter (including 5701 and 5727) is also supervised for a low battery

condition, and will transmit a low battery signal to the receiver when the

battery has approximately 30 days of life remaining. The keypad will display

the transmitter number and "LO BAT," (or "00" and LO BAT for a wireless

keypad).

5700 Series Transmitter Battery Life

• Batteries in the wireless transmitters may last about 2 years for 5700 series

transmitters, depending on the environment, usage, and the specific wireless

device being used. External factors such as humidity, high or low

temperatures, as well as large swings in temperature, may reduce the actual

battery life in a given installation. The wireless system can identify a true low

battery situation, thus allowing the dealer or user of the system time to

arrange a change of battery and maintain protection for that given point

within the system.

• Button type transmitters should be periodically tested by the user for battery

life (ex. 5701).

• After replacing a low or dead battery, activate the transmitter and enter the

Security Code + OFF to clear its memory of the "Low Battery" signal.

Installing 5700 Series Transmitters

A variety of wireless system transmitters can be used to make up the wireless

zones. These include window/door units, smoke detectors, PIRs, and panic

buttons. Zone number assignments can be from 1-63.

1. Set the DIP switches on each 5700 series transmitter to the appropriate zone

number and House ID. Refer to the Compatible Transmitters Table later in

this section for zone numbers and programming information for each

particular transmitter.

2. Install each transmitter in accordance with the instructions provided with the

transmitter.

Before permanently mounting the transmitters, make sure reception of each

transmitter's signal at the proposed mounting location is adequate. To do this,

perform a Go/No Go test, which is described later in this section.

3. Program the transmitters using the #93 Menu mode Zone Programming

option. Refer to

PROGRAMMING WIRELESS ZONES

later in this section

for specific instructions.

– 47 –

Wireless Zone Assignments for 5700 Series Transmitters

Each wireless zone can be assigned any zone response type, such as Entry/Exit,

Interior Follower, Perimeter, etc. (see the ZONE TYPES section for explanations

of each zone type). For 5700 series transmitters, each response type uses a

certain range of zone numbers. Each range of zone numbers is indicated below:

Zone Type Trans/Zone #

Entry/Exit Burg ................................. 1 through 47 *

Perimeter Burg................................. 1 through 47 *

Interior Burg ..................................... 1 through 47 *

32 through 47 * (5775)

Fire................................................... 48 through 63 *

48 through 55 ** (5706)

24 Hour Panic .................................. 48 through 63*

(silent or audible) ............................. 62 or 63 *** (5701)

Day/Night Burglary ........................... 1 through 47 *

24 Hour Auxiliary ............................. 1 through 47 *

* Note that zones 1-63 can be used, but have the following limitations:

1. Transmitters set for zones 48-55 will transmit once every 12 seconds while

the zone is faulted. Transmitters set for zones 56-63 will transmit once every

3 seconds while faulted. These two ranges of zone numbers could adversely

affect transmitter battery life.

2. Transmitters set for an ID of 32 through 47 will have a 3 minute lock-out

between transmissions. Use this last range of zone ID numbers for sensors

protecting frequently used doors or windows to conserve battery life.

** Transmitter IDs 48 through 55 have highest signal priority.

*** Transmitter IDs 62 and 63 are unsupervised to allow removal of the 5701 off

premises -- signal priority is lower than that of fire, but higher than burglary.

–48–

Compatible 5700 Series Transmitters

Model Product Zone Num. Description

5701 Panic Transmitter 62 or 63 • Programmable for either silent or

audible 24 hour alarm.

5706 Photoelectric Smoke 48-55 • One piece smoke detector with built

Detector in transmitter.

• Built-in UL Listed 85 dB piezo

electric alarm sounder and audible

low battery warning.

5711 Slimline Door/ 1-63 • Can be used with any closed or open

Window Transmitter circuit sensor.

5715WH Universal Transmitter 1-63 • DIP switch selectable for fast

response, and open or closed sensor

usage.

• Has a tamper protected cover.

5716 Door/Window 1-63 • Can be used with any open or closed

5716WM Transmitter circuit sensor.

• Features a built-in reed switch.

• 5716WM includes magnet.

5742 Audio Discriminator 1-63 • For use in unoccupied areas to detect

the sound of shattering glass when a

window is broken.

5743 Dual Technology 1-63 • Detects the sound

and

shock of

Glassbreak Detector breaking glass and requires the

presence of

both

to initiate an alarm

condition.

5775 PIR Detector 32-47 • Dual element passive infrared

detector with built-in selectable pulse

count.

Note

: There is a 3 minute lock-out

between fault transmissions to conserve

battery life.

5727 Wireless Keypad House ID • Can be used to turn the burglary

protection on and off

• Features the same built-in panic

functions as wired keypads.

• Must be assigned to a partition.

• Identified as zone "00" (on wired

keypads) when it transmits with a

low battery.

5827BD Wireless Keypad House ID •Same features as above plus:

• Requires use of 5800TM Module

(must be enabled in Device

Programming.

• Can indicate system status via its

3 LEDs and sounder.

• House ID must be set.

5799 Magnets • Package of 8 magnets for use with

5716 transmitters

ULThe 5711, 5715, and 5716 do not supervise their loop wiring. Therefore, the loop

wiring may not exceed 3 feet.

– 49 –

5800 Series Transmitter Setup

5800 series transmitters have built-in serial numbers that must be "learned" by

the system using the # 93 Menu mode programming, or input to the control via

the downloader. 5800 series transmitters (except 5827 described separately) do

not have DIP switches.

Each transmitter's zone number is programmed into the system in # 93 mode.

Some transmitters, such as the 5816 and 5817, can support more than one

"zone" (referred to as loops or inputs). On the 5816 for example, the wire con-

nection terminal block is loop 1, the reed contact is loop 2. Each loop must be

assigned a different zone number and learned separately.

For button transmitters (wireless "keys"), such as the 5803 and 5801, you must

assign a unique zone number to each individual button used on the transmitter.

Each button on the transmitter also has a pre-designated loop or input number,

which is automatically displayed when learned.

5800 Series Transmitter Supervision

Except for some transmitters that may be carried off-premises (5802, 5802CP,

5803, 5827, and 5827BD), each transmitter is supervised by a check-in signal

that is sent to the receiver at 70–90 minute intervals. If at least one check-in is

not received from each

supervised

transmitter within a programmed time period

(i.e., 12 hrs.), the "missing" transmitter number(s) and "CHECK" will be displayed.

The supervision for a particular transmitter that may be carried off the premises

(5801, 5802MN) may be turned off by learning it as a "UR" (Unsupervised RF)

type, as described later.

5800 series transmitters have built-in tamper protection and will cause a

“CHECK” condition to be annunciated if covers are removed, provided that

program field *24 (Disable Expansion Zone Tamper) is set for "0."

5800 Series Transmitter Input Types

All of the transmitters described have one or more unique factory assigned loop

inputs.

Each of the inputs requires its own programming zone

(e.g., a 5803's

three button inputs require three programming zones).

Transmitters can be learned as one of the following types:

Type Description

"RF" Sends periodic check-in signals, as well as fault,

(Supervised RF) restore, and low battery signals. The transmitter

must remain within the receiver's range.

"UR" Sends all the signals that the "RF" type does,

(Unsupervised RF) but the control does not supervise the check-in

signals. The transmitter may therefore be

carried off-premises.

"BR" These send only fault signals. They do not send

(Unsupervised Button low battery signals until they are activated. The

RF) transmitter may be carried off-premises.

5800 Series Transmitter Battery Life

• Batteries in the wireless transmitters may last from 4-7 years, depending on

the environment, usage, and the specific wireless device being used. External

factors such as humidity, high or low temperatures, as well as large swings in

temperature may all reduce the actual battery life in a given installation. The

wireless system can identify a true low battery situation, thus allowing the

dealer or user of the system time to arrange a change of battery and maintain

protection for that given point within the system.

• Some transmitters (e.g., 5802, 5802CP, and 5803) contain long-life but non-

replaceable batteries. At the end of their life, the complete unit must be

replaced (and a new serial number learned by the control).

–50–

• Button type transmitters (ex. 5801, 5802, 5802CP & 5803) should be

periodically tested by the user for battery life.

Do not install batteries in wireless transmitters until ready to learn, as will be

indicated under

Programming the Wireless Transmitters

later in this section.

Though it is not critical to remove batteries after learning, it is recommended in

order to avoid interference while learning additional transmitters.

Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters

Model Product Learn As Description

Input Type

5801 Wireless Panic UR or RF • Has four pushbuttons, each with a

Transmitter unique input (loop) code.

• Programmable responses (e.g.,

Panic, Arm–Stay, Arm–Away,

Disarm, etc.

• For arming/disarming functions,

button must be assigned to a user

code when "adding a user."

5802 Pendant BR Only • Has single pushbutton.

(Personal Emergency • Usually be programmed for

Transmitter) response type of 24Hr. Audible or

24 Hr. Silent (other zone responses

are possible.

5802CP Belt Clip • Contains a non-replaceable

(Personal Emergency battery. At the end of the battery's

Transmitter) life, the entire unit must be

replaced.

• If using for arming/disarming, the

button must be assigned to a user

code when "adding a user."

5802MN Miniature UR or RF • Has single pushbutton.

(Personal Emergency • Usually programmed for a

Transmitter) response type of 24 Hr. Audible or

24 Hr. Silent (other zone responses

are possible.

• If using for arming/disarming, the

button must be assigned to a user

code when "adding a user".

5803 Wireless Key BR Only • Has three pushbuttons, each with

Transmitter a unique input (loop) code.

• Programmable responses (e.g.,

Arm–Stay, Arm–Away, Disarm,

etc.).

• Contains a non-replaceable battery.

At the end of the battery's life, the

entire unit must be replaced.

• If using for arming/disarming, the

button must be assigned to a user

code when "adding a user."

5806 Wireless RF • One piece smoke detectors with

5807 Photoelectric built in transmitter.

Smoke Detectors

– 51 –

Model Product Learn As Description

Input Type

5816 Door/Window RF • Has two unique input (loop) codes:

Transmitter: one for a wired closed circuit

contact loop; the other for a built-in

reed switch (used in conjunction

with a magnet).

5816 Low Temperature RF • Transmits a fault condition when

TEMP Sensor temperature drops below 45

degrees.

• Learned into the system by the

internal reed switch using a

magnet.

5817 Multi-Point Universal RF • Has three unique input (loop)

Transmitter codes: one for a "Primary" contact

loop with programmable options;

the others for two "Auxiliary"

closed circuit contact loops.

5818 Recessed Transmitter RF • Reed switch magnetic contact

sensor that is easily concealed in

the frame and edge of a door or

window.

• Has a single unique input (loop)

code.

5827 Wireless Keypad House ID • Can be used to turn the burglary

protection on and off

• Features the same built-in panic

functions as wired keypads

• The keypad is identified as zone

"00" on wired keypads when it

transmits with a low battery .

5827BD Wireless House ID (used with 5800TM Module)

Bi-directional Keypad • Operates the system similarly to wired

keypads

• Can indicate system status via its

3 LEDs and sounder.

• Includes 3 panic keys.

• House ID must be set.

• Requires 5800TM Transmitter

Module (must be enabled in #93

Menu Mode –Device Programming

and assigned to a partition in 1*48

5849 Glass Break Detector RF • Requires both sound and shock of

breaking glass to cause alarm to be

transmitted.

• Has unique input code.

5890 PIR Detector RF • Dual element passive infrared

detector/transmitter with built-in

selectable pulse count.

• Has unique input code

Note

: There is a 3 minute lock-out be-

tween fault transmissions to conserve

battery life.

5899 Magnets Package of 4 magnets for use with

5816 and 5817 transmitters.

ULThe 5816 and 5817 do not supervise their loop wiring. Therefore, for UL

Household Burglary installations, the loop wiring may not exceed 3 feet.

–52–

Programming Wireless Transmitters

Zone number assignments can be from 01-63 for 5700 series transmitters, and

01-86 for 5800 series transmitters, except for zone 64, which is reserved for a

wireless keypad.

1. With at least one alpha keypad (5137AD/6139) wired and set to a proper

address, power up the system temporarily by plugging the AC transformer

into a 120VAC outlet (previously wired to the control).

2. Enter data field programming mode: Installer Code + 8 0 0 .

3. Press *94 to enter the second page of data fields and program the following

data fields:

1*28 RF TX LOW BATTERY ANNUN (1=immediate; 0=when

disarmed)--must be "1" for UL installations.

1*29 RF TX LOW BATTERY REPORT ENABLE (1=yes; 0=no)

--must be "1" for UL installations.

1*31 RF TRANSMITTER CHECK-IN INTERVAL (02-15 times 2 hrs)--

max. of "6" for UL installations

1*44 WIRELESS KEYPAD TAMPER DETECT (1=yes; 0=no)

1*48 WIRELESS KEYPAD ASSIGNMENT (

1*49 SUPPRESS TX SUPERVISION SOUNDING (1=yes; 0=no)

--must be "0" for UL installations.

If using a wireless button (5801, 5803, etc.), also program the following fields:

1*57 5800RF BUTTON GLOBAL ARM (1=yes; 0=no)

1*58 5800 RF BUTTON FORCE BYPASS (1=yes; 0=no)

4. Press *99 to return to the first page of data fields.

5. From data field programming mode, press #93 to display the "ZONE

PROG?" prompt.

ZONE PROG?

1=Yes 0=No Press 1 to enter ZONE PROGRAMMING mode.

While in this mode, press * to display the next

screen, or press # to display the previous screen.

Enter Zn No.

00=QUIT 10 Enter the zone number to be programmed (01-86).

Press * to accept entry.

10 ZT P RC In:L

00 1 00 RF:N A summary screen for that zone will appear. ZT =

zone type; P=partition to which zone is assigned; RC

= report code for that zone; In: = input type of zone;

L=learned RF input.

Press * to continue.

– 53 –

10 Zone Type

Zone disabled 00

Refer to the ZONE

TYPE DEFINITIONS

section for definitions of

each zone type.

Each zone in a system must be assigned a zone

type, which defines the way in which the system

responds to faults in that zone. Enter the zone

response type for each zone. The screen will

automatically display the zone type for the number

entered. Press * to accept entry. If a different zone

response type is desired, enter a different number

and press * .

Zone Types are as follows:

00 Assign For Unused Zones

01 Entry/Exit #1, Burglary

02 Entry/Exit #2, Burglary

03 Perimeter, Burglary

04 Interior Follower, Burglary

05 Trouble By Day/Alarm By Night

06 24 Hour Silent Alarm

07 24 Hour Audible Alarm

08 24 Hour Auxiliary

09 Fire

10 Interior Delay, Burglary

20 Arm-Stay (5800 RF only))

21 Arm-Away (5800 RF only)

22 Disarm (5800 RF only)

23 No Alarm Response (Used for

Relay Activation)

10 Partition Enter the partition number (1-8) you are assigning

this zone to. Press * to continue.

10 Report Code Enter the report code for this zone. (Enter the first

digit and press * . Enter the second digit and press

* again. A summary of both digits will be

displayed). Press * to continue.

10 Input Type

RF Trans. RF: Enter the Input Device Type as follows:

0 = not used;

3=RF (supervised RF transmitter)

4=UR (unsupervised RF transmitter)

5=BR (button type RF transmitter-unsupervised)

Press * to continue.

For 5700 series systems, always enter "RF" type. The Summary screen will then

be displayed. Press * to display the "ENTER ZN NO?" prompt for programming

the next zone.

For 5800 series transmitters, see the Compatible 5800 Series Wireless

Transmitter chart earlier in this section for the correct input type entry for each

transmitter model. Then continue on to the next prompt.

10 LOOP NUMBER If this is a previously "learned" sensor, the loop

number for this zone will appear. Press * to

continue.

10 LEARN S/N ?

1=YES 0=NO

If the sensor's serial number has not been "learned,"

the serial number can be learned now by entering 1

(or it can be learned later by using the SERIAL

NUMBER LEARN mode).

–54–

10 INPUT S/N :L

A000-0000:1 If learning the serial number now (entering 1 at the

last prompt), this prompt appears. Fault the and

restore the transmitter (faulting is accomplished by

pressing the appropriate button for button type

transmitters, or by opening and closing zone sensors

for other transmitters. The keypad will beep twice

after the first transmission is received.

Fault and restore the transmitter again. The keypad

will beep three times to confirm the second

transmission and acceptance into the system. The

serial number will then be displayed on the keypad.

Alternatively, if the serial number is printed on the

device, you may enter it through the keypad (see

each device's Installation Instructions for the desired

"Loop" input for this zone. Then press * . The next

screen will be displayed.

10 PROG AS RF:1

A001-3078:1 Press * to continue. The summary screen will then

appear as it did when first entering the zone number

to be programmed (see summary screen description

above).

Press * to display the "ENTER ZN NO?" prompt for

programming the next zone.

After all zones have been programmed, enter 00 at

this prompt and press * . The system will prompt

"Quit Menu Mode?" Press 1 to quit. This will return

you to normal (data field) programming mode.

Press *99 to exit program mode.

Enter the [Installer Code] + OFF to cancel the

system's settling delay.

– 55 –

Check-Out Procedure for Wireless Zones

Go/No Go Test Mode

Before mounting transmitters permanently, conduct Go/No Go tests to verify

adequate signal strength and reorient or relocate transmitters if necessary.

During this mode, wireless receiver gain is reduced by 50%. Testing in this mode

assists in determining good mounting locations for the transmitters and verifies

that the RF transmission has sufficient signal amplitude margin for the installed

system.

1. Enter the Installer Code and press 5 (TEST).

For multi-partition systems, all partitions must be disarmed in order for the RF

signal gain to be reduced.

The alpha keypad will display "Burg Walk Test, Reduced RF Sens."

2. Once transmitters are placed in their desired locations and the approximate

length of wire to be run to sensors is connected to the transmitter's screw

terminals, fault each transmitter.

Do not conduct this test with your hand

wrapped around the transmitter as this will cause inaccurate results.

• If a single receiver is used, the keypad will beep three times to indicate

signal reception. If two receivers are used, the keypad will beep once if the

first receiver received the signal, twice if the second receiver received the

signal and three times if both receivers heard the signal (which is desirable

for redundant configurations).

• If the keypad does not beep, reorient or move the transmitter to another

location. Usually a few inches in either direction is all that is required.

3. Mount the transmitter according to the instructions provided with the

transmitter.

4. Exit the mode by entering Installer Code + 1 (OFF).

Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode

When all transmitters have been installed, use the Transmitter Sniffer Mode to

test that they have all been properly programmed.

1. Enter Installer Code + # 3. The keypad will display all zone numbers of

wireless units programmed into the system.

2. Fault each wireless zone, causing each device to transmit. As the system

receives a signal from each of the transmitters, the zone number of that

transmitter will disappear from the display.

A transmitter not "learned" (5800 series) or dipswitched correctly (5700 series)

will not turn off its zone number.

3. To exit the Transmitter Sniffer mode, enter the Installer Code + 1 (OFF).

–56–

Section 9: RELAY OUTPUTS &

POWER LINE CARRIER (X-10) DEVICES

This section provides the following information:

• Output Device Basics

• Wiring the 4204 relay module

• Wiring the 4300 transformer

• Programming the 4204 relay module

• Programming output devices

• Programming relay voice descriptors

Output Device Basics

Relays and Powerline Carrier devices (i.e., X-10 brand devices) are

programmable switches that can be used to perform many different functions.

They can be used to turn lights on and off, control sounders, or for status

indications. In this system, each device must be programmed as to how to act

(ACTION), when to activate (START), and when to deactivate (STOP). Each of

these is described in

Programming Options Defined,

later in this section and in

the programming procedure (#93 Relay Programming mode) provided at the end

of this section.

The system supports a total of 16 relays (provided by 4204 Relay modules)

and/or Powerline Carrier devices. Each 4204 module provides 4 relays with

Form C (normally open and normally closed) contacts.

Powerline Carrier devices are controlled by signals sent through the electrical

wiring at the premises via a 4300 transformer. Therefore, if using Powerline

Carrier devices, a 4300 transformer

must

be used in place of the regular system

transformer.

This section is used to program output devices to activate in response to a

programmed condition. The system can also be programmed to activate these

devices at specific times by using the #80 Scheduling Menu Mode–

Time Driven

Events

function.

Wiring the 4204 Relay Module

1. Set the 4204 DIP switches for a device address between 01-15 that is not

being used by another device (keypads, RF receivers, etc.). If using more

than one module, each module must be set to a different address.

The relay module will not operate until the device address you have chosen is

enabled in the control's Device Programming mode.

2. Connect the 4204 module(s) to the control's keypad terminals (6, 7, 8, and

9). Use the flying lead cable supplied with the relay module when mounting it

in the control's cabinet. Use standard 4-conductor twisted cable when

mounting the 4204 outside the cabinet.

3. Home run each 4204 back to the panel. The maximum wire run length from

the panel to the 4204 must not exceed:

Wire Gauge Maximum Length

#22 125 feet

#20 200 feet

#18 300 feet

#16 500 feet

– 57 –

SWITCH 4 2 0 4 A D D R ESS SETTINGS

POSITION ("—" means "OFF")

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

2ON — ON — ON — ON — ON — ON — ON — ON —

3ON ON — — ON ON — — ON ON — — ON ON — —

4ON ON ON ON — — — — ON ON ON ON — — — —

5ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON — — — — — — — —

12345

➞

13 14 15 16

OFF ➞ON

➞

DIP SWITCH

FOR SETTING DEVICE ADDRESS

AND ENABLING/DISABLING TAMPER

➞

COVER TAMPER (REED) SWITCH

➞

TB1

4204

TB2

4-PIN CONSOLE PLUG

➞

121110987654321

▲

RELAY

TYPICAL

(SHOWN "OFF")

EITHER OR BOTH

CAN BE USED

➞

DATA IN

FROM CONTROL

(–) GROUND

DATA OUT

TO CONTROL

(+) 12V

YEL

BLK

GRN

RED

4204 RELAY MODULE

4-PIN KEYPAD PLUG

Figure 16: 4204 Relay Module

Wiring the 4300 Transformer

Powerline Carrier devices (such as X-10, ACT, Leviton) are either plugged into

standard AC outlets or wired into the AC electrical system by a licensed

electrician, depending on the type of device used. They respond to "on" and "off"

commands sent from the panel, through the 4300 transformer, to the receiving

devices. Connect the 4300 transformer as follows:

1. Run a 6-conductor cable between the 4300 interface and the panel. Splice

this cable to a 4142TR cable as shown in the diagram below. Note that the

white and yellow wires of the 4142TR must be spliced together.

2. Set the proper House and Unit Codes for each device following the

instructions provided with each device. Note each device's setup, as these

codes will be used to program the devices later.

123456789

GROUND

OUT 6

IN 2

GROUND

IN 3

GROUND

OUT 5

J8 CONNECTOR

BLACK

BLUE

BROWN

GREEN

RED

WHITE

YELLOW

GRAY

VIOLET

4142TR CABLE

123456

TB1

-1 TB1

-30 TB1

-2

AC Earth

Ground AC Sync Data Com

4300 TRANSFORMER/INTERFACE

Figure 17. 4300 Transformer Connections

–58–

Programming the Relay Module

1. With at least one alpha keypad (5137AD/6139 wired and set to a proper

address, temporarily power up the system by plugging the transformer into a

120VAC outlet.

2. Enter data field programming mode: (Installer Code + 8 0 0 ).

3. From data field programming mode, press #93 to display the "ZONE

PROG?" prompt.

4. Press 0 (NO) to each menu option until the "DEVICE PROG?" prompt

appears.

DEVICE PROG?

1=YES 0=NO Press 1 (YES) to enter DEVICE PROGRAMMING mode.

The following prompts will appear.

DEVICE ADDRESS

01-31, 00=QUIT

The device address identifies the module to the control.

Enter the 2-digit address number as set at the module's

DIP switches (01-15). Press * to continue.

DEVICE TYPE Select the (relay) output device as follows:

00 =device not used

04= output device

Press * to continue. The system will prompt for the

next Device Address to be programmed.

4. Repeat the procedure above for each relay module used in the system.

5. When all modules have been programmed, press 00 * at this prompt to exit

menu mode programming.

6. Do not exit out of programming at this time, but continue to the next section.

Output Programming Options Defined

The following will help you understand the programming of OUTPUT DEVICES

when using the #93 Relay Programming mode. The options used to start and

stop these devices are described below, followed by the actual screen prompts

and available entries.

The letter(s) in parentheses after each function described below, such as (A)

after ACTION, are those that appear in the various summary displays of

programmed data during programming.

ACTION (A) The "ACTION" of the device is how the device will respond

when it is activated by the "START" programming. You may

want the device to activate momentarily, to pulse on and off

continuously, or to remain activated until some other event

occurs to stop it. There are four different choices of actions:

• ACTIVATE for 2 SECONDS and then reset.

• ACTIVATE and REMAIN ACTIVATED until stopped by

some other event.

• PULSE ON and OFF until stopped by some other event.

• NO RESPONSE when the device is not used.

START

(STT)

The "START" programming determines when and under what

conditions the device will be activated. The following START

options are available:

– 59 –

1) a. EVENT (EV) is the condition (Alarm, Fault, Trouble) that must

occur to a zone or group of zones (zone list) in order to

activate the device. These conditions apply

only

when a zone

list is used. The different choices for "EVENT" are listed below

and in “Programming Relays & Powerline Carrier devices” in

the section that follows.

• ALARM Relay action begins upon any alarm in an

assigned zone in the zone list.

• FAULT Relay action begins upon any opening (or

short) of an assigned zone in the zone list.

• TROUBLE Relay action begins upon any trouble

condition on an assigned zone in the zone

list.

• NO RESPONSE Relay action is not dependent upon one of

the above events.

b. ZONE LIST (ZL) is a group of zones to which the “EVENT”

applies in order to activate a particular device. Note that

there are a total of 8 zone lists that can be programmed.

When the selected EVENT (Alarm, Fault or Trouble) occurs in

any zone in the selected “Start” ZONE LIST (1-8), activation

of the selected device will START.

2) a. ZONE TYPE/SYSTEM OPERATION (ZT). This option may

be used instead of using a "ZONE LIST" and "EVENT” to

activate the device.

If a specific "ZONE TYPE" is chosen, any zone of that re-

sponse type going into alarm, trouble, or fault will cause the

device to activate as selected in "ACTION.” If the same “ZONE

TYPE” is also chosen for the STOP programming, any zone of

that type that

restores

will de-activate the device.

If a System Operation, such as “DISARMING” or “ANY FIRE

ALARM,” is to activate the device, the appropriate choice

would also be entered under the “ZONE TYPE” option. The

selected operation will cause the device to activate as selected

in "ACTION.” The different choices for "ZONE TYPE" and

"SYSTEM OPERATION" are listed in “Programming Relays &

Powerline Carrier devices” later in this section, and in the

Programming Form.

The “ZONE TYPE” option functions independently of the “EVENT/ZONE LIST”

combination.

b. PARTITION No. (P). The device's "Start" ZONE

TYPE/SYSTEM OPERATION may be limited to an occurrence

on either one partition (1-8) or any partition (0).

–60–

STOP (STP):

The "STOP" programming determines when and under what

conditions the device will be de-activated. The following

options are available:

1) a. RESTORE ZONE LIST (ZL). If a "ZONE LIST" is used as the

“Stop” event, the device will de-activate when all the zones in

that list restore from a previous fault, trouble, or alarm

condition. This will occur regardless of what is programmed

to "START" the device; therefore, a "RESTORE ZONE LIST"

would normally only be used when a "ZONE LIST" is used to

start the device.

2). a. ZONE TYPE/SYSTEM OPERATION (ZT). Instead of using a

"RESTORE ZONE LIST", a specific zone (response) type or

system operation action can be selected to de-activate the

device.

If a specific "ZONE TYPE" is chosen, any zone of that

response type that restores from a previous alarm, trouble, or

fault condition will cause the device to de-activate.

If a "SYSTEM OPERATION" is chosen, that operation will

cause the device to de-activate. The different choices for

"ZONE TYPE" and "SYSTEM OPERATION" are listed in

“Programming Relays & Powerline Carrier devices” later in

this section, and in the Programming Form.

b. PARTITION No. (P). The device's "Stop" Zone Type/System

Operation may be limited to an occurrence on either one

partition (1-8) or any partition (0).

Programming Output Devices

1. From data field programming mode, press #93 to display the "ZONE

PROG?" prompt.

2. Press 0 (NO) to each menu option until the "RELAY PROG?" prompt

appears. Press 1 (YES).

While in this mode, press * to advance to next screen. Press # to backup to

the previous screen.

Enter Relay No.

(00=Quit) 01 Enter the relay (output device) identification number

01-16. This is a reference number only, used for

identification purposes. The actual module address

and relay number on the module is programmed in

the last two prompts. Press * to continue.

01 A EV ZL ZT P

STT 0 0 0 00 The keypad will display a summary START screen.

Press * to continue.

01 A EV ZL ZT P

STOP 0 0 0 00 The keypad will display a summary STOP screen.

Press * to continue.

01 Relay Action

No Response The Relay Action is the way in which the relay will

respond when activated by the "start" event. Enter

the desired action for this relay as follows:

0=not used; 1=closed for 2 secs.; 2=stay closed;

3=pulse on/off

– 61 –

01 Start Event

Not used A relay may be activated either by an Event used in

conjunction with a Zone List, or by a Zone

Type/System Operation. If using an Event/Zone List

combination, enter the event code as follows:

0=not used; 1=alarm; 2=fault; 3=trouble; 4=restore

If not using a Zone List to activate the relay, enter 0.

Press * to continue.

01 Start: Zn LIST

No list A Zone List is a set of zones that can be used to

initiate the start or stop relay action. If a zone list is

being used to start this relay action, enter the Zone

List number 1-8. If a zone list is not being used, enter

0. Press * to continue.

01 Start: Zn Typ A Zone Type/System Operation can be used instead

of an Event/Zone List combination to start the relay

action. If a Zone Type/System Operation is being

used, enter the 2-digit code as listed below. Press *

to continue.

Choices For Start/Stop Zone Types:

00 = No Response (Not Used)

01 = Entry/Exit #1

02 = Entry/exit #2

03 = Perimeter

04 = Interior Follower

05 = Trouble Day/Alarm Night

06 = 24 Hr Silent

07 = 24 Hr Audible

08 = 24 Hr Aux

09 = Fire Alarm or Trouble

10 = Interior w/Delay

23 = No alarm response

(for output relay activation, such

as for access control purposes)

Choices For Start/Stop System Operation:

20 = Arming-Stay

21 = Arming-Away

22 = Disarming (Code+Off)

31 = End of Exit Time

32 = Start of Entry Time

33 = Any Burglary Alarm

34 = Code + # + 71 Key Entry

35 = Code + # + 72 Key Entry

36 = At Bell Timeout **

37 = 2 Times Bell Timeout**

38 = Chime

39 = Fire Alarm

40 = Bypassing

41 = AC Power Fail

42 = System Battery Low

43 = Communication failure

44 = RF low battery

45 = polling loop failure

51 = RF receiver failure

52 = kissoff

54 = fire zone reset

55 = disarm + 1 minute

56 = XX minutes (enter XX in field 1*74;

stop condition only)

57 = YY seconds (enter YY in field 1*75;

stop condition only)

58 = Duress

60 = Audio Alarm Verification (must be

selected for both START and STOP

operation)

** Or at Disarming, whichever occurs earlier

If using options 56 and/or 57 (usually as the STOP Zone Type), data fields 1*74

and 1*75 for the respective relay timeouts for minutes and seconds must be

programmed.

01 Start Part If the starting event will be limited to occurring on a

specific partition, enter the partition number (1-8) in

which the start event will occur. Enter 0 for any

partition. Press * to continue.

01 Stop: Zn LIST

No list

If a zone list is being used to stop this relay action,

enter the zone list number 1-8. The restore of all

zone s on the Zone List will stop the relay. If a zone

list is not being used, enter 0. Press * to continue.

01 Stop: Zn Typ If a Zone Type/System Operation is being used to

stop the relay action, enter the 2-digit code as listed

in the start Zone Type/System Operation prompt

paragraph. Press * to continue.

01 Stop Part This is the partition to which the stop condition will

be limited. Enter 0 for any partition. Enter 1-8 for

specific partition number. Press * to continue.

–62–

Relay Group Relays may be grouped for common activation by

time driven events (commands 06-10--see Section

20:

SCHEDULING OPTIONS

for more information).

Enter 0 (no group) or 1-8 for a specific group

number. Press * to continue.

Restriction

1=yes 0=no The system may have some devices which are not

intended to be under end user control, such as

relays activating fire doors or machinery. Enter 1 if

the end user will be restricted from accessing this

relay. Press * to continue.

Relay Type Enter 1 for 4204 relay outputs. Enter 2 for Powerline

Carrier devices. Press * to continue.

ECP ADDRESS For relay module (4204) outputs, enter the actual

relay module's address (01-15) as set by its DIP

switches.

MODULE RELAY # For 4204 relay outputs, enter the specific relay

number on that module (1-4). Press * to continue.

House Code For Powerline Carrier devices, enter the numerical

equivalent of the House Code of the device as

follows:

A=00 E=04 I=08 M=12

B=01 F=05 J=09 N=13

C=02 G=06 K=10 O=14

D=03 H=07 L=11 P=15

Unit Code Enter the numberical unit code of the Powerline

Carrier device (00-15). Press * to continue.

The keypad will display the Start and Stop summary

screens again. Press * to continue.

5. When all relays have been programmed, enter 00 at the "ENTER RELAY NO."

prompt.

6. If defining a Zone List, continue to the next procedure in this section. If not,

enter 00 + * at the next two prompts. Then enter *99 to exit programming

completely. After exiting, enter the [Installer Code] + OFF to cancel the

system's settling delay.

– 63 –

Zone List Programming

After all relays have been programmed, upon entering 00 at the "ENTER RELAY

NO." prompt, you will be asked to enter a Zone List. If a Zone List number was

used to start or stop a relay, you must define the zones belonging to that list as

follows:

Enter Zone LIST

00=QUIT 00 Enter the zone list number 01-08. Enter 00 to quit.

01 Enter Zn Num.

00=QUIT 00 Using two-digit entries, enter each zone to be

included in this zone list. Press * after each zone

number is entered.

When all zones have been entered, enter 00, then

press * .

01 Del Zn LIST?

0=No 1=Yes Enter 0 to save the zone list entered. Enter 1 to

delete that zone list.

01 Delete Zone?

0=No 1=Yes Enter 1 to delete one or more zones in that zone list.

Enter 0 if no changes are necessary. If 1 is entered,

the next screen will appear, otherwise the "Enter

Zone List" prompt will reappear.

01 Zn to Delete?

00=QUIT 00 Enter each zone number to be deleted from the zone

list, pressing * after each number.

View Zn LIST

00=QUIT 00 This will appear if 00 is pressed at the ENTER ZONE

LIST prompt. Enter the zone list number that you

wish to view. Press * to continue.

XX ASSIGNED ZONE

00=QUIT 00 Press * to scroll through all zones in that list. Enter

00 +* to quit.

Press *99 to exit program mode or continue to the next procedure in this section to

program Relay Voice Descriptors. Upon exiting program mode, enter the [Installer

Code] + OFF to cancel the system's settling delay.

Relay Voice Descriptors

If using the 4285 VIP Module, voice descriptors can be programmed for each of

the 16 relays/Powerline Carrier devices used in the system. These descriptors

will be announced by the voice module when accessing the relays via the # 70

relay access mode via telephone.

Each voice descriptor can consist of up to 3 words selected from the relay voice

descriptor vocabulary list (found later in this section).

The index numbers from this vocabulary list are to be used for relay voice

descriptors only. For normal system voice annunciation (eg. alarms, troubles,

status), use the highlighted words in the alpha vocabulary list found in the alpha

programming section.

To enter relay voice descriptors, do the following:

1. From data field programming mode, press #93 to display the "ZONE

PROG?" prompt.

2. Press 0 (NO) to each menu option until the "RLY VOICE DESCR?" prompt is

displayed. Follow the instructions below. While in this mode, press * to

advance to next screen. Press # to backup to previous screen.

RLY VOICE DESCR?

0=no 1=yes Press 1 to program voice descriptors for relays.

–64–

ENTER RELAY NO.

00=QUIT 01 Enter the 2-digit relay/X-10 module number (01-16)

for the relay desired, or enter 00 to quit relay voice

descriptor programming mode. Press * .

01 ENTER DESC d1 From the relay voice descriptor vocabulary list, enter

the 3-digit index number for the first word of the relay

descriptor phrase. Press * to accept entry.

01 ENTER DESC d2 From the relay voice descriptor vocabulary list, enter

the 3-digit index number for the second word of the

relay descriptor phrase. If second word is not

desired, press 000. Press * to accept entry.

01 ENTER DESC d3 From the relay voice descriptor vocabulary list, enter

the 3-digit index number for the third word of the

relay descriptor phrase. If third word is not desired,

press 000. Press * to accept entry.

The ENTER RELAY NO. prompt will appear. Enter

the next relay number to be programmed. When all

output devices have been programmed, enter 00 to

quit.

Enter *99 to exit program mode.

Enter the [Installer Code] + OFF to cancel the

system's settling delay.

Relay Voice Descriptors and Custom Word Substitutes Vocabulary

Word Index

Air..................... 116

Alarm................ 255

And ................... 067

Apartment......... 117

Appliances ....... 161

Area.................. 118

Attic .................. 119

Baby ................. 120

Back ................. 121

Bar ................... 122

Basement ......... 021

Bathroom.......... 051

Battery .............. 053

Bed ................... 092

Bedroom .......... 015

Blower .............. 123

Boiler ................ 124

Bright................ 162

Building ............ 125

Burglary............ 039

Call ................... 009

Central.............. 089

Chime ............... 054

Closed .............. 126

Computer ......... 127

Console ............ 066

Word Index

Daughter's ........ 208

Den ................... 052

Detector ............ 128

Device .............. 060

Dim ................... 163

Dining ............... 031

Door ................. 016

Down ................ 008

Downstairs........ 184

Driveway........... 130

Duct .................. 131

East .................. 132

Eight ................. 077

Eighth ............... 221

Equipment ........ 133

Exit ................... 004

Factory ............. 134

Father's ............ 211

Fence ............... 135

Fifth................... 218

Fire ................... 040

First ................. 136

Five ................... 074

Floor ................. 029

Four .................. 073

Fourth ............... 217

Foyer ................ 137

Front ................. 087

Word Index

Garage............. 023

Gas .................. 138

Glass ............... 139

Hall................... 050

Heat ................. 010

Inside ............... 209

Kitchen............. 022

Laundry............ 140

Left ................... 027

Library.............. 141

Light ................. 019

Living ............... 030

Loading ............ 142

Lower ............... 094

Machine ........... 143

Master.............. 144

Medical ............ 014

Mother's ........... 212

Motion.............. 145

Nine ................. 078

Ninth ................ 222

No .................... 165

North ................ 146

Not 012

Word Index

Off .................... 011

Office................ 147

On .................... 058

One .................. 070

Open ................ 148

Outside............. 210

Panic ................ 013

Partition ............ 090

Patio ................. 149

Phone............... 061

Power............... 063

Pump................ 166

Rear ................ 088

Right................. 028

Room ............... 018

's ...................... 007

Second ............. 056

Service ............. 150

Seven............... 076

Seventh ............ 220

Shed................. 151

Shop................. 152

Side.................. 153

Six .................... 075

Sixth ................. 219

Smoke.............. 024

Son's ................ 223

Word Index

South................ 155

Stairs ................ 006

Station .............. 156

Storage............. 157

Sun ................... 154

System ............. 062

Temperature..... 158

Third ................. 159

Three................ 072

Tool .................. 213

Two .................. 071

Up ..................... 025

Upper................ 187

Upstairs ............ 183

Utility................. 185

West ................. 215

Window ............ 017

Wing ................. 216

Zero .................. 069

Zone ................. 002

– 65 –

Section 10: 4285 VISTA INTERACTIVE PHONE

(VIP) MODULE

This section provides the following information:

• General information about the 4285 VIP module

• Mounting and wiring the 4285 VIP module

• Programming the control for 4285 VIP module access

• Checkout procedure for the 4285 VIP module

ULThe 4285 VIP Module is not approved for UL installations..

General Information

The 4285 VIP Module is an add-on accessory that permits the user to access the

security system via a touchtone phone (either from on-premises or by calling the

premises from a remote location).

Only one VIP Module can be used in a security system and partition assignment

is done via #93 Menu Mode–Device Programming.

The 4285 VIP Module enables the user to do the following via a Touch-tone

telephone:

A. Receive synthesized voice messages over the phone regarding the status of

the security system.

B. Arm and disarm the security system and perform most other commands

using the telephone keypad. This usage provides voice annunciation over

the phone to confirm any command that is entered.

C. Control 4204 relays and/or Powerline Carrier devices using the #70 relay

access mode.

Facts You Need to Know

• The VIP Module can announce many of the same words that would normally

be displayed on an Alpha keypad under the same system conditions (see the

words in bold in the Alpha Vocabulary list found in Section 19: #93

MODE PROGRAMMING

). If the VIP module cannot annunciate a word in a

zone descriptor, it will not annunciate the descriptor at all, but will still

annunciate the zone number.

• Remote access to the VIP Module can be toggled on and off by using the

[Security Code] + # 91 command (see VIP Module instruction manual). You

must use the master or installer code only.

• The VIP Module reports trouble as zone 87 if data communication with the

control is lost.

• Detailed operating instructions for phone access to the security system are

provided with the VIP Module. In addition, a

Phone Access User's Guide

supplied with the VIP Module for the user of the system.

Mounting the 4285 VIP Module

The VIP Module may be mounted in the control cabinet if space is available or, if

this is not possible, on the side of the cabinet or adjacent to it. Pry off the VIP

Module's cover prior to wiring.

1. When the VIP Module is mounted inside the control cabinet, attach it to the

cabinet's interior surface with 2-faced adhesive tape.

–66–

Do not mount the VIP Module on the cabinet door or attempt to attach it to the

PC board.

2. When mounting the VIP Module outside the cabinet, use the screw holes at

the rear to mount horizontally or vertically (2-faced adhesive tape may be

used, if preferred). You can bring wires out from the side or back (a round

breakout is also available on the back).

3. Affix the 4285 connections

label (supplied separately) to the inside of the VIP

Module's cover if the cover is used. Otherwise, affix the label to the inside of

the

control cabinet's

door.

Wiring the 4285 VIP Module

The 4285 is wired between the control panel and the premises handset(s). It

listens for touch tones on the phone line and reports them to the control panel.

During on-premises phone access, it powers the premises phones; during off-

premises phone access, it seizes the line from the premises phones and any

answering machines. Wire as follows:

1. Make 12V (+) and (–) and data in and data out connections from the VIP

Module to the control*, using the connector cable supplied with the VIP

Module (see below).

RED 6 (AUX +)

BLACK 7 (AUX -)

GREEN 8 (DATA IN)

YELLOW 9 (DATA OUT)

* These are the same connections as for remote keypads.

2. Insert the keyed connector at the other end into the mating header on the

VIP Module.

3. Connect terminals 1 through 5 on the VIP Module as shown in

Figure 18

You must use an RJ31X jack with a direct-connect cord and make all

connections

exactly

as shown. If the leads on the direct-connect cord are too

short to reach their assigned terminals, splice additional wires to them, as

required.

Terminal Block Connections

4285 Terminal Connects to:

1. Phone In (Tip) Terminal (26) on control.

2. Phone In (Ring) Terminal (27) on control.

3. Phone Out (Tip) BROWN lead from direct-connect cord.

4. Phone Out (Ring) GRAY lead from direct-connect cord.

5. Ground Earth ground terminal (30) on control.

6. Audio Out 1 Future use

7. Audio Out 1 Future use

– 67 –

4285 WIRING NOTES:

1. Wire the 4285 VIP Module exactly as shown, using a direct-connect cord and RJ31X jack.

2. If Touch-tones are not present following phone access to the security system

via an on-premises phone

, try

reversing the pair of wires connected to terminals 3 & 4 on the 4285, and the pair of wires connected to

terminals 26 & 27 on the control.

3. Connection to the incoming Telco line via a RJ31X jack and direct-connect cord, as shown in this diagram, is

essential, even if the system is not connected to a central station. The 4285 will not function if this is not

done.

4. The house phone lines must be connected to the VIP Module terminals

only !

If they are connected directly to

the control panel or to the incoming line, an error tone will be heard when trying to access the VIP Module from

an on-premises phone.

5. If the telephone system on the premises includes a Caller ID unit, connect the unit directly to the "Handset"

terminals (26 and 27) on the control.

ANSWERING

MACHINE

TERMINALS

ON CONTROL

EARTH GROUND

➡

NOT INSTALLER

ADJUSTABLE

UNUSED

KEYED

HEADER

▲

4285

VOICE MODULE

123456 7

YELLOW: TO DATA OUT (term. 9)

NO CONNECTION

RED: TO AUX (+) (term. 6)

BLACK: TO AUX. GROUND (–) (term. 7)

GREEN: TO DATA IN (term. 8)

CONNECTOR

WITH FLYING

LEADS

TO CONTROL PANEL

TERMINALS USED

FOR KEYPAD

CONNECTIONS

➡

PREMISES

ANSWERING

MACHINE AND

PHONES

▲

Handset Incoming

Telco Line

TIP

RING

RJ31X

JACK

PLUG

DIRECT

CONNECT

CORD

➧

TIP

RING

GROUND

MUST CONNECT TO

ON 4285 (TIP)

MUST CONNECT TO

ON 4285 (RING)

GREEN (TIP)

RED (RING)

▲

▲▲

INCOMING TELCO LINE

TO GND TERMINAL

ON CONTROL

GRAY (R)

BROWN (T)

4285

TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS

1 - TIP

2 - RING PHONE INPUT

3 - TIP

4 - RING PHONE OUTPUT

5 - GROUND

6 -

7 - AUDIO OUT 1

(FOR FUTURE USE)

}

▲

{

IMPORTANT NOTE

FOR EXISTING

INSTALLATIONS:

EXISTING WIRES

CONNECTED TO THE

"HANDSET" TERMINALS

ON CONTROL MUST BE

MOVED FROM THERE

TO TERMINALS 3 AND 4

ON THE 4285.

26 28 29 30

CALLER ID

UNIT

VIP MODULE

Figure 18. 4285 VIP Module Connections

Programming 4285 VIP Module Options

1. With at least one alpha keypad (5137AD/6139) wired and set to a proper

address, temporarily power up the system by plugging the transformer into a

120VAC outlet (previously wired to the control).

2. Enter data field programming mode: [Installer Code] + 8 0 0 and program the

following fields:

*20 VIP MODULE PHONE CODE

*44 RING DETECTION COUNT (cannot be set to 0)

*74/*75 ALARM REPORT CODE for VIP module faults (zone 87)

1*09 ZONE RESPONSE TYPE for VIP module (zone 87, type 05)

–68–

3. From data field programming mode, press #93 to display the "ZONE

PROG?" prompt. Press 0 to each menu option until "DEVICE PROG?"

prompt is displayed.

DEVICE PROG?

1=yes 0=no Press 1 to enter DEVICE PROGRAMMING mode.

DEVICE ADDRESS

01-31, 00=QUIT The device address identifies the device to the

control. The VIP module is factory set to address 04.

Enter 04. Press * to continue.

DEVICE TYPE Enter device type 05 = voice module

Press * to continue.

MODULE PART. Enter the partition number 1-8 in which the voice

module is located. Press * to continue The screen

will prompt for the next device number to be

programmed.

4. Press 00 at this prompt to return to the main menu. Press 0 until ALPHA

DESCRIPTORS prompt appears. Press 1 (YES).

5. Program alpha zone descriptors according to the procedure explained in

Section 19:

#93 MENU MODE PROGRAMMING

. Alpha descriptors must be

programmed if you want the VIP Module to annunciate a description of the

zone(s) in alarm, trouble, etc. If not, the VIP Module will annunciate zone

numbers only.

If you are using output relays, you can program relay voice descriptors.

Refer to Section 9x

: RELAY OUTPUTS AND POWERLINE CARRIER

DEVICES

Custom Word Substitutes for VIP Module Annunciation

A substitute word can be programmed for each of the 20 custom words used in

your alpha zone descriptions. This substitute word will be announced by the VIP

module in place of the custom word that is displayed on the alpha keypad. For

example, an alarm display of "John's Bedroom" could be announced as "Son's

Bedroom," since there is no annunciation for the custom word "John." Note that

if a substitute word is not assigned, the VIP module will not annunciate the zone

descriptor at all, but will only annunciate the zone number.

To enter custom words substitutes, do the following:

1. From data field programming mode, press #93 to display the "ZONE

PROG?" prompt.

2. Press 0 (NO) to each menu option until the "CUSTOM INDEX ?" prompt is

displayed.

CUSTOM INDEX ?

0=no 1=yes Enter 1 at this prompt.

CUSTOM WORD NO.

00=QUIT Enter the custom word number (01--20) for which a

voice substitute is desired. Enter 00 to quit this

programming mode. Press * to accept entry.

01 ENTER INDEX # Enter the 3-digit substitute word index number from

the relay voice descriptor and custom word

substitutes vocabulary list found in the Relay Voice

Descriptors section. Press * to accept entry.

The "CUSTOM WORD NO." prompt will be

displayed. Enter the next custom word number to be

substituted or enter 00 to quit.

– 69 –

Section 11.

AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATION (AAV) UNIT

This section provides the following information:

• General information about the AAV option

• AAV operation

• Connecting an Eagle AAV Module

• AAV programming requirements

General Information

An Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) module (also known as two-way voice), such

as the Eagle 1241, is an add-on accessory that permits voice dialog between an

operator at a central station and a person at the alarm installation, for the

purpose of alarm verification. This feature is supported only if alarm reports are

programmed to be sent to the primary phone number.

The AAV module connects from module terminals 7 & 8 to the control's zone 5

terminals 16 & 17. The purpose of this connection is to silence and restore the

sounders at the premises. It is also used to postpone non-critical dialer reports

while the AAV session is in progress. Note that zone 5 is then no longer

available as a protection zone. When using the AAV, zone 5 must be assigned a

zone response type (e.g. response type 10), and option 1*60 must be selected as

1 to silence sounders on the premises. If 1*60 is not enabled, conversation with

the premises will be difficult (too much noise on the premises).

AAV Module Operation

After all messages have been sent during a reporting session to the primary

phone number, the control will trigger the AAV if at least one of the messages

was an alarm report. If Contact ID format is selected for the primary phone

number, and the cancel report field *81 is programmed as non-zero, the control

will send a "listen-in to follow" message (event code 606), which signals the

685(rev. 4.6 or higher) to hold the phone connection for 1 minute.

Once triggering occurs, the control will give-up the phone line to the AAV module,

without breaking connection with the central station. During the time the AAV is

active, all sirens and all continuous keypad sounds in all partitions will be shut off

if field 1*60 is enabled. When the AAV indicates that the audio alarm verification

session is completed, all keypad sounds will be restored. Sirens will be restored if

the alarm timeout period has not expired.

As part of its fail-safe software, the control will limit all audio alarm verification

sessions to 15 minutes (this is because once the session begins, the AAV

module controls the duration). If a new fire alarm should occur during a session,

the control will break phone connection and send the new fire alarm report, then

re-trigger AAV mode. All other dialer messages triggered during on-going

conversation will be held until either the AAV module signals that it is inactive, or

the 15 minute timeout occurs.

One way to trigger the AAV module is by selecting option 3 in field 1*46 and

make connections as shown in the

VOLTAGE TRIGGER

diagram. Field 1*46

can be used to set ground start, remote console sounding, or long range radio

open/close trigger. If any one of these functions are absolutely necessary in a

given installation, the alternative AAV trigger method is via the use of a 4204

relay as shown in the

RELAY TRIGGER

diagram. If this method is selected, the

start and stop conditions for that relay must be set to choice 60 = "Audio Alarm

Verification" during relay programming, via #93 menu mode.

– 70 –

Some AAV modules allow remote triggering by ring detection at the alarm

installation. Please be advised that if this option is selected, it may defeat

modem download and 4285 VIP module remote access capability. The DIP

switch settings shown on the triggering diagrams disable remote AAV module

trigger option. The control also requires that the AAV module trigger type is

falling edge, which is set in DIP switch settings shown.

1. 685 Receiver software must be rev. 4.6 or higher. Earlier versions will not hold

the phone line connection.

2. Contact ID code for "listen-in to follow" is "606." Contact ID is the only

reporting format that will send a "listen-in-to-follow."

Audio Alarm Verification Module Connections

Connect the Audio Alarm Verification module's falling edge trigger input (terminal

5 on Eagle model 1241) to J7 connector trigger output,

to a 4204 relay

module, as shown in the various diagrams in

Figure 19.

If also using a 4285 VIP Module, be sure to follow the corresponding diagram

when making connections.

Programming Audio Alarm Verification Module Options

1. With at least one two-line alpha keypad wired and set to a proper address,

temporarily power up the system by plugging the AC transformer into a

120VAC outlet (previously wired to the control).

2. Enter data field programming mode: [Installer Code] + 8 0 0.

Program the following data fields:

1*46 AUXILIARY OUTPUT ENABLE: Set for 3 (unless using 4204

relay module).

1*60 ZONE 5/AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATION: Set for 1.

*81 CANCEL REPORT: Set for non-zero digit.

*45 PRIMARY DIALER FORMAT: Set for 1 (Contact ID).

If you need more information about actual programming procedures, see Section

THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING.

3. Zone 5 must be programmed for response type 10 and the EOLR must be

removed. Zone 5 is no longer available as a protection zone.

4. If using a 4204 relay instead of the J7 trigger, program the relay to trip on

Zone Type/Sys. Op. 60--Audio Alarm Verification (see SECTION 7:

RELAY

OUTPUTS AND POWERLINE CARRIER DEVICES

5. Press *99 to exit program mode.

6. Enter [Installer Code] + OFF to cancel the system's settling delay.

– 71 –

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

▲

MODEL EAGLE SECURITY

1241

REFER TO

AAV MODULE

INSTRUCTIONS

FOR CONNECTIONS

TO AUDIO SPEAKERS

AND MICROPHONE

PREMISES

ANSWERING

MACHINE AND

PHONES

ANSWERING

MACHINE

▲▲

INCOMING TELCO LINE

V+

GND

1 2 3

RELAY 1, SHOWN

“OFF”

NO NC C

4204 RELAY

MODULE

VISTA-100

CONTROL

JACK

RED

GREEN

GRAY

BROWN

ZONE 5+

ZONE 5-

CONTROL

GND

Notes:

1.Remove any EOL

resistor from control

panel terminals 22 &

23, if any present.

8-CONDUCTOR

DOUBLE PLUG

CORD (SUPPLIED)

RJ31X

JACK

BROWN

GRAY

CALLER

ID UNIT

1 2 3 4 5 6

All switches should

be “off” except

switch 5, which

should be “on.”

on zone 5

Figure 19: Audio Alarm Verification Module Connections

– 72 –

Section 12: VOLTAGE TRIGGERS (Connector J7)

This section provides the following information:

• General information about the voltage triggers

• Ground Start trigger setup

• Open/Close trigger setup

• Keyswitch setup

• Remote keypad sounder setup

• Long Range Radio setup

General Information

Connector J7, located on the right hand side of the main PCB, provides 4 trigger

outputs. These outputs may be configured in a number of ways, depending upon

the requirements of the installation. They may be used for:

• Operating the 675 Ground Start Module

• Operating the 4146 Keyswitch LEDs

• Operating a remote piezo sounder that imitates the keypad sounder

• Triggering auxiliary alarm signaling equipment (such as the 7720 and 7920SE

LORRA Subscriber Radios)

• Operating an Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) module (see previous section on

AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATION

These output triggers can be enabled by partition via programming field 2*20.

The pin assignments of this connector are shown in

Figure 20

. Use only the

4142TR 9-wire cable (available as an option) for making connections to this

connector.

Output 1:

Operates, by default, as a trigger for the 675 ground start module. This output

may optionally be programmed to operate as an open/close trigger, a remote

keypad sounder output, or an AAV module output (programmed in data field

1*46). Only one of these options may be used at a time.

Output 1 Rating: When Activated: 10 - 13.8 VDC through 4K ohms

When De-activated: 100 ohms to ground

Outputs 2 & 4:

Operates, by default, as Fire and Silent Panic/Duress triggers, respectively.

These triggers may optionally be programmed to act as Arm and Ready status

indicators when it is desired to use the 4146 keyswitch (programmed in data

field *15).

Output 2 & 4 Rating: When Activated: 10 - 13.8 VDC through 5K ohms

When De-activated: 1k ohms to ground

Output 3:

Operates as a Burglary/Audible Panic trigger. There are no other options for

this output.

Output 3 Rating: When Activated: 10-13VDC through 5K ohms

When De-activated: 1k ohms to ground

– 73 –

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

GRAY

YELLOW

WHITE

RED

GREEN

BROWN

BLUE

BLACK

GROUND

OUT 1

GROUND

OUT 2

GROUND

OUT 3

GROUND

OUT 4

J7 CONNECTOR

OUT 1: GROUND START OR OPEN/CLOSE

OUT 2: FIRE OR KEYSWITCH ARMED LED

OUT 3: BURGLARY/AUDIBLE PANIC/AUXILIARY

OUT 4: SILENT PANIC/DURESS OR KEYSWITCH READY LED

N/U

4142TR CABLE

Figure 20: J7 Connector For Voltage Triggers

– 74 –

Ground Start Trigger Setup

ULNot intended for use in UL Listed applications..

Output 1 may be used to trigger an optional 675 Ground Start module for

installations having telephone lines which require ground start instead of loop

start operation to obtain dial tone from the telco central office.

When the panel has a message to transmit to the central station, it will seize the

line, go off hook, and then trigger the 675 module to connect the "RING" side of

the telephone line to earth ground. The panel will cause the module to break the

connection between "RING" and earth ground when it obtains a dial tone.

Ground Start Module Connections

1. Connect the 675 Ground Start Module to the panel's J7 connector trigger

output 1, to auxiliary power, and to the "RING" side of the telephone line as

shown in the diagram below.

2. Use the following procedure to determine which side of the telephone line is

the "RING" side:

a. Connect the "+" lead of a DC voltmeter to earth ground, and the "-" lead

to one side of the telephone line.

b. The wire which reads +50VDC is the "RING" side.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

GRAY

YELLOW

WHITE

RED

GREEN

BROWN

BLUE

BLACK

GROUND

OUT 1

GROUND

OUT 2

GROUND

OUT 3

GROUND

OUT 4

J7 CONNECTOR

IF USED.

1. OUT 1 IS NO LONGER

USABLE FOR OPEN/CLOSE

(SEE FIELD 1*46).

2. OUT 2, 3, 4 CAN STILL BE

USED TO PROVIDE ALARM

STATUS INDICATIONS OR TO

OPERATE A KEYSWITCH

(SEE FIELD *15).

3. THE 675 IS NOT UL LISTED.

N/U

4142TR CABLE

GROUND START

TRIGGER

BLUE

BLACK

VIOLET

BROWN GREEN

TO TELCO

RING TO EARTH

GROUND

675

GROUND

START

MODULE

(CUT ORANGE

JUMPER)

TO AUX. POWER

TERM. 7

TO AUX. POWER

TERM. 6

(50mA CURRENT DRAW

Figure 21. Ground Start Module Connections

Programming For The Ground Start Module

1. With at least one two-line alpha keypad (5137AD/6139) wired and set to a

proper address, power up the system temporarily by plugging the AC

transformer into a 120VAC outlet (previously wired to the control).

2. Enter data field programming mode: [Installer Code] + 8 0 0.

Program the following data field:

1*46 AUXILIARY OUTPUT ENABLE: Set to "0" (factory default)

3. Press *99 to exit program mode.

1. If you need more information about actual programming procedures, see

Section 4:

THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING.

2. You cannot use Output 1 for an Ground Start if using it for a Remote Keypad

Sounder, Open/Close trigger, or an AAV module.

– 75 –

Open/Close Trigger Setup

Output 1 may alternately be programmed to change states when the system is

armed in the away mode and then disarmed. If field 1*46 is set to 1, the output

will be set high when the system is in the "disarmed" state, and will switch to "0"

volts when the system is armed in the "away" mode. This trigger will not change

state unless

all

partitions are armed, and will change state again as soon as one

partition is disarmed.

Programming the Open/Close Trigger

1. With at least one two-line alpha keypad (5137AD/6139) wired and set to a

proper address, power up the system temporarily by plugging the AC

transformer into a 120VAC outlet (previously wired to the control).

2. Enter data field programming mode: [Installer Code] + 8 0 0.

Program the following data field:

1*46 AUXILIARY OUTPUT ENABLE: Set for 1.

1. If you need more information about actual programming procedures, see

Section 4:

THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING.

2. You cannot use Output 1 for an Open/Close trigger if using it for a Remote

Keypad Sounder, Ground Start module, or AAV module.

Remote Keypad Sounder

Output 1 may alternately be programmed for a remote keypad sounder. You

may use an Amseco PAL 328N for installations where you want the sounds

produced by the keypad's built-in piezo sounder to be duplicated in another

location for one partition. The panel will send all sounds remotely (i.e. alarm,

trouble, chime, entry/exit, etc.) except for the short clicks associated with keypad

key depression.

One application of this feature might be to produce chime sounds in a location

which is distant from the panel's keypads. You can also accomplish this by using

relay outputs (see SECTION 7:

RELAY OUTPUTS AND POWERLINE

CARRIER DEVICES

Remote Keypad Sounder Connections

• Connect the Amseco piezo between the panel's auxiliary power and the J7

connector trigger output as shown below.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

GRAY

YELLOW

WHITE

RED

GREEN

BROWN

BLUE

BLACK

GROUND

OUT 1

GROUND

OUT 2

GROUND

OUT 3

GROUND

OUT 4

J7 CONNECTOR

IF USED.

1. OUT 1 IS NO LONGER

USABLE FOR OPEN/CLOSE

OR GROUND START (SEE

FIELD 1*46).

2. OUT 2, 3, 4 CAN STILL BE

USED TO PROVIDE ALARM

STATUS INDICATIONS OR

TO OPERATE A KEYSWITCH

(SEE FIELD *15).

N/U

4142TR CABLE

BLACK

–

AMSECO PAL-328N

PIEZO SOUNDER

RED

O AUX POWER +

ERMINAL 6

10mA CURRENT DRAW)

Figure 22. Remote Keypad Sounding Connections

– 76 –

Programming Remote Keypad Sounding Options

1. With at least one two-line alpha keypad (5137AD/6139) wired and set to a

proper address, power up the system temporarily by plugging the AC

transformer into a 120VAC outlet (previously wired to the control).

2. Enter data field programming mode: [Installer Code] + 8 0 0.

Program the following data fields:

1*46 AUXILIARY OUTPUT ENABLE: Set for 2.

*15 KEYSWITCH ASSIGNMENT,: Enter the partition whose keypad

sounds are to be dupliocated at the remote sounder.

3. Press *99 to exit program mode.

The system automatically assigns Zone Type 10 to Zone 7, whether or not a

keyswitch is actually used. Therefore, Zone 7 is no longer available as a

protection zone, but is assigned as a keyswitch zone.

1. If you need more information about actual programming procedures, see

Section 4:

THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING.

2. You cannot use Output 1 for a Remote Keypad Sounder if using it for

an Open/Close trigger, Ground Start module, or AAV module.

Keyswitch Setup

If using an optional Remote Keyswitch for remote arming and disarming of the

system, its switch must be connected to Zone 7 and its Ready and Armed status

LEDs must be connected to the trigger outputs and programmed in order to

become operational.

Note that a keyswitch may be used in one partition only.

Keyswitch Operation

The keyswitch must be connected to Zone 7, which is then no longer available as

a protection zone. A momentary short across this zone will arm the partition in

the "AWAY" mode. If the short is held for more than 3 seconds, the partition will

arm in the "STAY" mode. After the partition has been armed, the next time Zone

7 is shorted, the partition will disarm.

Keyswitch Connections

1. Connect the 4146 keyswitch's normally open momentary switch to Zone 7

2. Connect a 2k EOL resistor across the switch regardless of whether or not

zones 2-8 are selected to use EOL resistors. See diagram below.

– 77 –

NOTE:

The tamper switch need not be

used for UL Household Fire or

Burglary installations. The

tamper switch must be

connected to an EOLR

supervised zone programmed

for trouble by day/alarm by

night (type 05) response as

shown for UL Commercial

Burglary installations.

When the keyswitch is

removed from the wall, the

tamper switch will open causing

a fault (trouble or alarm) on

zone 6 and causing the panel

to disable keyswitch operation

until the partition is disarmed

from a console.

RED

820ohms

YELLOW

RED

(ARMED)

BLACK

820ohms

WHITE

GREEN

(READY)

TAMPER SWITCH

(CONTACTS CLOSE WHEN

SWITCH DEPRESSED. SEE NOTE)

BROWN BROWN

BLUE BLUE

LOCK SWITCH

(NORMALLY OPEN)

2K EOLR

TO AUX POWER

(TERMINAL 6)

TO J7/OUT 2

TO ZONE 7(+)

(TERMINAL 20)

TO ZONE 6(–)/ZONE 7(– )

(TERMINAL 19)

TO ZONE 6(+)

(TERMINAL 18)

TO J7/OUT 4

BROKEN LINES REPRESENT

INSTALLER WIRING CONNECTIONS

Figure 23. Remote Keyswitch Wiring

3. Connect the keyswitch Armed and Ready LEDs to the trigger connector as

shown in

Figure 23

Programming The Remote Keyswitch

1. With at least one two-line alpha keypad (5137AD/6139) wired and set to a

proper address, power up the system temporarily by plugging the AC

transformer into a 120VAC outlet (previously wired to the control).

2. Enter data field programming mode: [Installer Code] + 8 0 0.

Program the following data fields:

*15 KEYSWITCH ASSIGNMENT for the partition in which the keyswitch is

used.

*40 OPEN/CLOSE REPORTING FOR KEYSWITCH as desired. The

keyswitch reports as user "0."

The system automatically assigns Zone Type 10 to Zone 7 if a keyswitch is

enabled.

3. Press *99 to exit program mode..

If you need more information about actual programming procedures, see Section

THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING.

LED indications are defined as follows:

Green Red Meaning

Off Off Disarmed & Not Ready

On Off Disarmed & Ready

Off On Steady Armed Away

Off Slow Flash Armed Stay

Off Rapid Flash Alarm Memory

– 78 –

Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment (Long Range Radio)

The J7 header provides triggers for fire alarm, burglary/audible panic alarm,

silent/duress alarm.. These triggers are programmed as the defaults for Outputs,

2, 3, and 4. These may be used to trip auxiliary alarm signaling equipment such

as Ademco's 7720 and 7920SE Long Range Radios.

The triggers for Fire (Output 2) and Silent Panic/Duress (Output 4) may be used

to operate keyswitch armed and ready LEDs

instead

when field *15 is enabled.

When used as alarm triggers, these outputs are normally low, and go high when

the corresponding alarm condition occurs. These triggers remain high until the

security code + OFF is entered at the keypad, with the exception of the Silent

Panic/Duress trigger, which is a 2-second pulse. The diagrams that follow show

how to make connections to the 7720 and 7920SE radios. Refer to the UL

Installation Requirements found in the REGULATORY AGENCY

REQUIREMENTS section for a description of the specific connections and

programming options required for each of the various UL Listings.

When a Long Range Radio is installed, configure the sense select for zones 1

and 2 in the Long Range Radio to activate on +5V (positive trigger). This is

necessary to prevent false alarms from occurring. Refer to the installation

instructions provided with your radio for instructions on setting the zone 1 and 2

levels.

GND (GRAY)

BURG/AUDIBLE PANIC (BROWN) REQUIRED

SILENT PANIC/DURESS (BLACK) OPTIONAL

FIRE (RED) OPTIONAL

7720 RADIO

FAULT

ZONE 1

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

GND

SEE 7720 INST. INSTR. FOR

INSTRUCTIONS ON POWERING UNIT

12345678910

12345678

▲

▲▲

}

28 29 30

4142TR CABLE

▲

659EN LINE FAULT MONITOR

FAULT

+12V GND

ORANGE

YELLOW

GREEN

PHONE LINE MONITOR

(+12V ON FAULT)

OPTIONAL

SEE

NOTE 4 INCOMING PHONE LINE

PHONE LINE MONITOR

(OPENS ON FAULT)

REQUIRED

7 BLACK

6 RED

TO C-COM

AUX PWR

(35mA DRAW)

EARTH GROUND

RING

TIP

VISTA-50P OR VISTA-50PUL

(USE VISTA-50PUL FOR UL LISTED

COMMERCIAL BURGLARY INSTALLATIONS)

7720 WIRING

NOTES:

FOR UL LISTED COMMERCIAL BURGLARY

INSTALLATIONS:

1. MOUNT THE 7720 WITHIN 3 FEET OF THE

C-COM. RUN WIRING FROM C-COM TO 7720

IN CONDUIT.

2. CONNECT RADIO FAULT OUTPUT TO C-COM

EOLR SUPERVISED ZONE (ZONE 2-8 ONLY).

USE 2K EOLR.

3. SEE UL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ON A

LATER PAGE TO DETERMINE WHEN 659EN

USAGE IS REQUIRED.

4. CONNECT TO C-COM EOLR SUPERVISED

ZONE (ZONE 2-8 ONLY) WHEN DESIRED TO

HAVE PANEL LOCALLY ANNUNCIATE PHONE

LINE FAULTS.

7920SE RADIO

FAULT

ZONE 6

ZONE 3

ZONE 2

ZONE 1

EARTH GROUND

CABINET GROUND

SEE 7920SE INST. INSTR. FOR

INSTRUCTIONS ON POWERING UNIT

12345678910

TB1

TB2

12345678

▲

▲▲

GND (GRAY)

FIRE (RED) OPTIONAL

SILENT PANIC/DURESS (BLACK) OPTIONAL

BURG/AUDIBLE PANIC (BROWN) REQUIRED

}

28 29 30

CONNECT

TO C-COM

EARTH GROUND

SCREW (TB30)

4142TR CABLE

▲

SEE NOTE 2

4.7K (NOT SUPPLIED)

RADIO OK OUTPUT

(LOW ON FAULT)

659EN LINE FAULT MONITOR

FAULT

+12V GND

ORANGE

YELLOW

GREEN

PHONE LINE MONITOR

(+12V ON FAULT)

OPTIONAL

SEE

NOTE 4 INCOMING PHONE LINE

PHONE LINE MONITOR

(OPENS ON FAULT)

REQUIRED

7 BLACK

6 RED

VISTA-50 OR VISTA-50UL

(USE VISTA-50UL FOR UL LISTED

COMMERCIAL BURGLARY INSTALLATIONS)

7920SE WIRING

NOTES:

FOR UL LISTED COMMERCIAL BURGLARY

INSTALLATIONS:

1. MOUNT THE 7920SE WITHIN 3 FEET OF THE

C-COM. RUN WIRING FROM C-COM TO

7920SE IN CONDUIT.

2. CONNECT RADIO OK OUTPUT TO C-COM

EOLR SUPERVISED ZONE (ZONE 2-7 ONLY).

USE 2K EOLR.

3. SEE UL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ON A

LATER PAGE TO DETERMINE WHEN 659EN

USAGE IS REQUIRED.

4. CONNECT TO C-COM EOLR SUPERVISED

ZONE (ZONE 2-8 ONLY) WHEN DESIRED TO

HAVE PANEL LOCALLY ANNUNCIATE PHONE

LINE FAULTS.

SEE NOTE 2 RADIO FAULT OUTPUT

(PROGRAM FOR SHORT ON FAULT)

▲

FAULT

▲

TO C-COM

AUX PWR

(35mA DRAW)

EARTH GROUND

RING

TIP

Figure 24: Auxiliary Alarm Signalling Equipment

– 79 –

Section 13. EXTERNAL SOUNDERS

This section provides the following information:

• General information about external sounders

• Connecting external sounders for UL and non-UL applications

• Programming options for external sounders

• Compatible sounders

General Information

The Control provides one bell relay output used to power external alarm

sounders. This output is rated at 10-13.8VDC, 2.8A maximum (including

auxiliary current draw).,

Exceeding the prescribed current limits will overload the power supply or may

possibly trip the bell output circuit protector.

Wiring 1. Make connections to terminals 4 (positive output) and 5 (negative return).

+–

BELL

SIREN

12345678

ALARM SOUNDER OUTPUT 10VDC - 13.8 VDC

2.8A maximum

+–

Figure 25. External Sounder Connections

UL985 Household Fire Installations

For installations which must provide UL Listed protection, the total current drawn

from this output and the auxiliary power output, combined, must not exceed

750mA in order to comply with the battery independence requirements in UL985.

If two System Sensor PA400 piezo alarm sounders, wired in parallel, are used

(24mA total), then (750mA – 24mA=) 726mA is available for auxiliary output use.

– 80 –

UL1023 Household & UL609 Commercial Burglary Installations

For installations which must provide only UL Listed burglary protection, the total

current drawn from this output must not exceed 2.8 amps. A battery must be

installed since current in excess of 750mA is supplied by the battery. Use any

UL Listed sounding device for UL Household Burglary installations. Use the

Ademco AB12 Grade A bell in box for UL Commercial Burglary installations. The

AB12 bell should be wired as shown in

Figure 26

AB12 WIRING NOTES:

• Program the zone which moni-

tors AB12 tamper for day trou-

ble/night alarm (type 05) or 24

hour audible alarm (type 07)

response. A 24 hr. alarm

response must be used in mul-

tiple partition systems.

• Wire the VISTA 50-UL door

tamper switch in series with

the AB12 tamper zone.

• Program bell output for 16 or

more minute timeout and for

confirmation of arming ding.

• All wiring from AB12 to panel

must be run in conduit.

AB12 BELL/BOX WIRING

TO PANEL'S BELL +

(EG: TERMINAL 4)

TO PANEL'S BELL –

(EG: TERMINAL 5)

TO ZONE 1-8 (+)

TO ZONE 1-8 (–)

BELL

TAMPER

SWITCHES

123456

2k EOLR

AB12 OUTER BOX

INNER LINER

Figure 26: AB12 Bell Box Wiring

Non-UL Installations

For non-UL installations, the total current drawn from this output can be up to 2.8

amps. A battery must be installed since current in excess of 750mA is supplied

by the battery. Up to two 702 sirens can be used, wired in series. Up to two 719

sirens can be used wired in parallel.

Programming External Sounders

1. With at least one two-line alpha keypad (5137AD/6139) wired and set to a

proper address, temporarily power up the system by plugging the AC

transformer into a 120VAC outlet..

2. Enter data field programming mode: [Installer Code] + 8 0 0.

Program the following data fields:

*13 ALARM SOUNDER DURATION (partition-specific; can vary from one

partition to another)

*18 UL AC LOSS SIREN (1=yes; 0=no)

*21 PREVENT FIRE TIMEOUT (1=no timeout; 0=fire timeout)

*23 MULTIPLE ALARMS (partition-specific)

1*47 CHIME ON EXTERNAL SIREN (partition-specific)

3. Press *99 to exit program mode. Then enter the [Installer Code] + OFF to

cancel the system's settling delay.

If you need more information about actual programming procedures, see Section

THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING.

– 81 –

Compatible Sounders

ULUse only UL Listed sounding devices for UL installations.

702 Outdoor Siren Self-contained siren (driver built-in) and

(not UL Listed) weatherproof for outdoor use. Can be wired

for either a steady or yelp sound and is

rated at 120 dB @ 10 feet. This siren can

also be tamper protected, or can be

mounted in a metal cabinet (716), which

can be tamper protected.

719 Compact Outdoor Compact, self-contained siren (driver

Siren (not UL Listed) built-in), and weatherproof for outdoor use.

Can be wired for either a steady or yelp

sound, and is rated at 90 dB @ 10 feet. A

708BE cabinet is available, which can be

tamper protected if necessary.

740 High Intensity Compact high intensity sounder rated at

Sounder 123 dB @ 10 feet. This sounder emits an

'ear piercing", high frequency sound. This

sounder can be mounted indoors (bracket

included) or outdoors (in 708BE cabinet).

747 Indoor Siren Attractive, self-contained indoor siren

(driver built-in), provides steady or warble

tones and is rated at 95dB @ 10 feet.

ABB1031 Motor Bell & Box AMSECO motor bell & box, rated at 81 dB

@ 10 feet.

PA400B Indoor Piezo Sounder System Sensor indoor piezo sounder.

(beige)

PA400R (red) (red or beige), rated at 90 dB @ 10 feet.

AB12 Grade A Bell For UL Commercial Burglary installations.

– 82 –

Section 14: EVENT LOG OPTIONS

This section provides the following information:

• General information about the Event Log

• Event Log printer connections

• Programming Event Log options

• Displaying/Printing the Event Log

General Information

This system has the ability to record up to 224 events of various types in a history

log (224 event capacity). Each event is recorded in one of five categories with

the time and date of its occurrence (if real-time clock is set). These categories

are:

• Alarm

• Supervisory/check

• Bypass

• Open/close

• System conditions

The log may be viewed (Display Mode) on an alpha keypad, or can be printed

(Print Mode) on a serial printer (connected to the system via a 4100SM serial

interface module.

Event Log Printer Connections

• Connector J8, located above connector J7 on the right side of the main PC

board, is intended to be connected to a local serial printer via the 4100SM

serial interface module, in applications where you want to print the event log

on a local printer.

ULA UL Listed EDP printer must be used for UL installations.

• Mount the 4100SM using its clip bracket to attach it to the side wall of the

control cabinet. Make connections between J8, the 4100SM module and the

serial printer as shown in

Figure 27

. Refer to the event logging commands

paragraph for a description of the commands which initiate event log printing.

123456789

J8 CONNECTOR

VIOLET

GRAY

YELLOW

RED

GREEN

BROWN

BLUE

BLACK

IN 2

GROUND

IN 3

GROUND

OUT 5

OUT6

GROUND

PRINTER DTR

4142TR CABLE (SUPPLIED WITH 4100SM)

4100SM SERIAL MODULE

+ PWR

- (GND)

RXD

not used

DTR

RED BLUE WHITE

To TB6 Aux. Power (+)

(25mA current draw)

To TB7 Aux. Power (-)

Cable

Supplied with

4100SM

USE GENDER CHANGER

SUPPLIED WITH 4100SM

IF PRINTER HAS DB25

MALE CONNECTOR

SERIAL PRINTER

SET FOR: 8 DATA BITS

NO PARITY 1

STOP BIT

300/1200 BAUD

HARDWARE HANDSHAKE

USING DTR SIGNAL

4100SM JUMPERS

(CUT TO SET RESPECTIVE SIGNAL FLOATING)

COLOR FUNCTION PIN#

RED CD 8

BLUE CTS 5

WHITE DSR 6

Figure 27. Event Log Printer Connections

NOTES

– 83 –

1. Printer must be configured as follows:

• 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit

• 300 or 1200 baud (1200 preferred)

• Hardware handshaking using DTR signal

2 The 4100SM module package includes a 10 foot RS232 cable. You can use a

longer cable or an extension cable if the Control and serial printer are

separated by more than 10 feet. The total cable length should be less than 50

feet.

3. Most printers either ignore the CTS, DSR and CD signals, or require them to be

high (i.e. 3-15VDC as measured on RS232 DB25 connector pins 5, 6 & 8

respectively with respect to ground pin 7). The 4100SM module sets these

pins high. If the printer being used will not operate with these pins high, then

clip the blue (CTS), white (DSR) or red (CD) jumpers on the 4100SM module to

set the corresponding signal floating. Important pins on the RS232C cable are

pin 3 (data out), pin 7 (ground) and pin 20 (DTR - ready).

4. The DTR signal, as measured at 4100SM TB1, should be high (9.5-14VDC)

when the printer is powered, properly connected, on-line and ready to print.

This signal will be low (0-1.5VDC) when the printer is not powered, not properly

connected, off-line or out of paper. The Control will not send data to the printer

unless the DTR signal is high.

Programming Event Log Options

1. With at least one alpha keypad (5137AD/6139) wired and set to a proper

address, power up the system temporarily by plugging the AC transformer

into a 120VAC outlet (previously wired to the control.

2. Enter data field programming mode: [Installer Code] + 8 0 0.

Program the following data fields:

1*70 EVENT LOG TYPES (1=enable; 0=disable for each type)

1*71 12/24 HOUR TIME STAMP FORMAT (0=12hr; 1=24hr)

1*72 EVENT LOG PRINTER ON-LINE (0=disable; 1=enable)

1*73 PRINTER BAUD RATE (1=300; 0=1200)

1*40 and 1*41 REPORT CODES FOR EVENT LOG

3. Exit program mode by pressing *99.

If you need more information about actual programming procedures, see Section

THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING.

Event Logging Procedures

In order for proper time and date stamping to occur, the system's real-time clock

must be set. Refer to the

SETTING THE REAL TIME CLOCK

section.

If you have selected the printer to be "on-line" (field 1*72), events will print

automatically, as they occur. To display or print on demand, the following

commands apply:

Commands

Display Mode: installer or master code + [#] + [6] + [0]

Print Mode: installer or master code + [#] + [6] + [1]

Clear Event Log: installer or master code+ [#] + [6] + [2]

To EXIT Event Log: Press * at any time.

– 84 –

Display/Printing: After entering either the Display or Print mode, the following

will be displayed:

ENTER 0 = RECENT

1 = COMPLETE

The Event Log holds up to 224 events, and can display

or print all events in a category (complete), or only

those events in a category occurring since the last

Clear Event Log command (recent). Note that once the

Event Log is full, the oldest event will be erased upon

the logging of any new event. Press the desired

display mode key, 0 or 1.

SCAN LOG BY PART

0=NO 1-8=PART #

The system allows viewing of any partition's event

log. Enter the partition number for the partition

whose events are to be displayed. Entering 0 (NO)

will display all events that occurred in the system

regardless of partition. Events are displayed in

chronological order, from most recent to oldest.

For display and printing purposes, events are stored

on a partition by partition basis (except system

events), and are grouped into five categories as

follows.

Use the [3] & [1] keys to scroll to the next and previous screens respectively:

ALARM EVENT LOG

TYPECCC UUU

Displays time/date for zones that have either caused

an alarm or have been restored in selected partition.

CHECK EVENT LOG

TYPECCC UUU

Displays time/date for zones that have caused a

trouble or supervisory condition in selected partition.

BYPASS EVENT LOG

TYPECCC UUU

Displays time/date for zones that have been

bypassed in selected partition.

OP/CL EVENT LOG

TYPECCC UUU

Displays time, date and user number for each

arming and disarming of the system for the partition

selected.

SYSTEM EVENT LOG

TYPE CCC UUU

Displays time/date for system problems, such as AC

Loss, communication failure, etc., regardless of

partition.

ALL EVENT LOG

TYPECCC UUU

Displays all categories of events in chronological

order, from most recent to oldest.

To display the events in a particular category, press [8] at the desired

category screen.

If in Display Mode, the most recent event is displayed. Press [1] to display older

events, press [3] to go forward in time.

If in Print Mode, the first press of [8] will cause the printer to print all events in that

category, with each event automatically scrolled on the display keypad. The

following is a typical display:

P8 01/01 12:02AM

BURGLARY C03

Shows burglary alarm occurred in zone 3 of partition

8, at 12:02AM on January 1.

After the last event in the selected category has been displayed (using either the

[1] or [3] keys), the following will appear for a few seconds:

END OF EVENT LOG

TYPECCC UUU

– 85 –

CLEAR EVENT LOG

0=NO 1=YES

Press [1] if Event Log is to be cleared from memory.

All events in the log will still be displayed if the

COMPLETE option is selected. Only those events

occurring from the time of the CLEAR command will

be displayed if RECENT display option is selected.

Press [0] if event log is not to be cleared at this

time.

If [1] is pressed, the following will appear:

ARE YOU SURE?

0=NO 1=YES

Press [1] if it is desired to clear the event log. Press

[0] if event log is not to be cleared.

SCREEN DEFINITIONS

RECENT Events since last CLEAR

COMPLETE Displays all events

TYPE Type of event (Burg., Fire, etc.)

CCC Zone (contact) number

UUU User number

– 86 –

Section 15: FINAL POWER-UP PROCEDURE

This section provides the following information:

• Earth ground considerations

• Connecting the AC transformer

• Connecting the backup battery

• Programming power and AC options

• Auxiliary and Polling Loop Current Draw Worksheets

General Information

• You can power the control from the supplied 1361 transformer (1361CN in

Canada), rated 16.5VAC, 40VA, which plugs directly into a 24 hour, 120VAC,

60 Hz outlet.

• If using power line carrier devices, you must use the 4300 transformer instead.

ULUse 1361CN Transformer in Canadian installations.

Earth Ground Considerations

In order for the lightning transient protective devices in this product to be

effective, the designated earth ground terminal (terminal 30), must be terminated

in a good earth ground. We recommend using #16 AWG copper wire run at a

maximum length of 25 ft. The following are examples of good earth grounds

available at most installations:

• Metal Cold Water Pipe: Use a non-corrosive metal strap (copper is

recommended) firmly secured to the pipe to which the ground lead is

electrically connected and secured.

• AC Power Outlet Ground: Available from 3-prong, 120VAC, power outlets

only. To test the integrity of the ground terminal, use a three-wire circuit tester

with neon lamp indicators, such as the UL-Listed Ideal Model 61-035, or

equivalent, available at most electrical supply stores.

Connecting the Transformer

1. Use the Polling Loop Current Draw and Auxiliary Device Current Draw

Worksheets found later in this section to make sure that the currents drawn

from the devices connected to the system do not exceed the system's

respective ratings.

Failure to observe the polling loop current rating will cause polling loop

malfunction. Failure to observe the auxiliary output current rating will result in a

battery which does not charge properly or possibly a tripped circuit breaker.

2. Connect all installed devices to the control.

3. Wire the 1361 transformer (1361CN in Canada) to the panel (before

connecting the battery) as shown in

Figure 28

, or wire the 4300 transformer

as shown in

Figure 29

(if using Powerline Carrier devices).

4. Plug the transformer into a 24 hour, uninterrupted, 120VAC, 60Hz outlet.

After a few seconds, the keypad display will appear.

– 87 –

!!!!

NO CONNECTION

TRANSFORMER

16.5VAC, 40VA

ADEMCO No.1361

(IN CANADA

USE No. 1361CN)

or 4300 IF

X-10 DEVICES

WILL BE USED

Connect to

24hr. 120VAC,

60 Hz Outlet

123

RED (+)BLK (–)

Connect to

12VDC, 4AH

or 12VDC, 7AH

GEL CELL

BATTERY

CHARGING

VOLTAGE

13.7 VDC

Replace

every

3 years

NOTE:

WHEN POWERING UP

THE PANEL, PLUG THE

TRANSFORMER IN BEFORE

CONNECTING THE BATTERY.

BATTERY

TABS

PRIMARY POWER

Supplied by 1361*

Plug-in

Transformer which

is rated at

16.5VAC, 40VA.

Caution must be

taken when wiring

this transformer to

the panel to guard

against blowing the

fuse inside the

transformer (non-

replaceable).

Figure 28. 1321 Transformer and Battery Connections

123456789

GROUND

OUT 6

IN 2

GROUND

IN 3

GROUND

OUT 5

J8 CONNECTOR

BLACK

BLUE

BROWN

GREEN

RED

WHITE

YELLOW

GRAY

VIOLET

4142TR CABLE

123456

TB1

-1 TB1

-30 TB1

-2

AC Earth

Ground AC Sync Data Com

4300 TRANSFORMER/INTERFACE

Figure 29: 4300 Transformer Connections

– 88 –

Programming Power and AC Options

1. With at least one alpha keypad (5137AD/6139) wired and properly

addressed, power up the system.

2. Enter data field programming mode: [Installer Code] + 8 0 0.

Program the following data fields:

*17 AC POWER LOSS KEYPAD SOUNDING (1=yes; 0=no)

*18 AC POWER LOSS EXTERNAL ALARM (1=yes; 0=no)

*19 AC RANDOMIZE (1=randomize; 0=no)

*28 POWER UP IN PREVIOUS STATE (1=yes; 0=no)

3. Exit program mode by entering *99.

If you need more information about actual programming procedures, see Section

THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING.

Polling Loop Current Draw Worksheet

DEVICE CURRENT # UNITS TOTAL CURRENT

STANDBY ALARM

4194 Contact 1 mA

4191SN 1mA

4193SN 1.5mA

4939SN 1mA

4959SN 1mA

4192SD Photo Smoke 0.4 mA

4192SDT Smoke w/Heat 0.4 mA

4192CP Ion Smoke 0.4 mA

4275 Dual PIR 1 mA

4278 Quad PIR 1 mA

4190 2-Zone RPM 1 mA (LOW)

2 mA (HIGH)

4208 8-Zone RPM 16 mA

TOTAL **

** If the total current draw exceeds 64 mA, a 4197 Loop Extender module must be used.

Auxiliary Device Current Draw Worksheet

DEVICE CURRENT # UNITS TOTAL CURRENT

STANDBY ALARM

4137AD Keypad 60mA

5137AD Keypad 90 mA

6128 Keypad 30 mA

6137 Keypad 85mA

6139 Keypad 100mA

675 Ground Start Module 50 mA

Built-in Polling Loop (total poll loop worksht)

4281 RF Receiver 35mA

5881 RF Receiver 50mA

4197 Poll Loop Extender 80 mA†

4204 Relay Module 15mA standby

40mA per active relay

TOTAL

* If using hard-wire devices such as PIRs, refer to the specifications for that particular unit's current draw.

Alarm Output Current Draw Worksheet

DEVICE CURRENT # UNITS TOTAL ALARM CURRENT

TOTAL **

– 89 –

Combined Auxiliary Power, Alarm Output and Polling Loop

Total Current

Standby Alarm

Auxiliary Power

Alarm Output

Polling Loop

TOTAL

Battery Calculation Worksheet

Capacity Formula Calculated Value

Standby Capacity total standby load X 24 or 60 hours X 1.1 contingency

factor (use total standby load from previous worksheet)

Alarm Capacity total alarm load X 0.067 hours (4 minutes)

(use total alarm load from previous worksheet)

Total Capacity Add standby and alarm capacities

BATTERY SELECTION TABLE

4 AH Yuasa NP4-12

7 AH Yuasa NP7-12

12 AH Yuasa NP12-12

BATTERY STANDBY TABLE

AUX. STANDBY CURRENT DRAW

AMP-HRS. 200mA 400mA 600mA 750mA

4.0 6 hrs. 4 hrs. 3 hrs. 2.5 hrs.

6.0-7.0 11 hrs. 7 hrs. 5.5 hrs. 4 hrs.

NOTE: These figures are approximate, and may vary depending upon the age, quality, and capacity of the battery at

the time of the AC loss.

Connecting The Battery

In the event of an AC power loss, the Control panel will still operate for a period

of time (time period varies depending on size of battery used) because the

control has a back-up, rechargeable gel type (sealed) lead acid battery. YUASA

NP4-12 (12V, 4AH) and NP7-12 (12V, 7AH) batteries are recommended.

DO NOT use Gates batteries (sealed lead-acid type). These batteries require a

different charging voltage than is supplied by the panel.

The standby battery is automatically tested every 24 hours, beginning 24 hours

after exiting programming mode. In addition, entry into the test mode will cause a

battery test to be initiated.

1. Use the Battery Standby Table to select the appropriate battery for the

installation.

ULThe VISTA-50UL must operate for at least 4 hours following an AC power loss in

certificated burglary installations. Select a battery size from the table below that

will support the auxiliary power output current draw for 4 or more hours.

2. Connect the battery as shown in

Figure 28.

Do not connect the battery

until all devices have been wired to the control.

– 90 –

Section 16: FALSE ALARM REDUCTION FEATURES

This section provides the following information:

• General information about false alarms

• Exit Error Logic and related reports

• Exit Delay Reset

• Cross-Zoning

• Call Waiting Defeat

General Information

This control supports features which help minimize false alarms from occurring.

Most false alarms occur either upon exiting the premises, or because of a zone

which tends to go into alarm either due to environmental factors, or because the

zone's resistance to the control may be on the edge of acceptability. We call this

condition a "swinger."

Features which prevent false alarms due to these circumstances are:

• Exit Error Logic and related reports

• Exit Delay Reset

• Cross-Zoning

Exit Error Logic

This feature is intended to reduce the incidence of false alarms due to exit doors

that are left open after the exit delay has expired. If this feature is enabled in

program field 1*20, the following will occur:

At the end of the exit delay, if the door is left open, the system will sound the

bell(s),siren(s) and the console sounder(s) for 10 seconds. It will then start the

entry delay period. This gives the user time to re-enter the premises and disarm

the system before an alarm occurs.

If the user does not re-enter the premises and disarm the system, the system will

bypass the faulted entry/exit zone(s). The rest of the system will be armed. In

addition, the following dialer reports will be sent to the central station if

programmed:

• Exit Error by User

• Exit Error by Zone

• Bypass reports

Another report, designed to notify the central station that an alarm has occurred

within five minutes of arming, is called the Recent Close report. This report, as

well as the Exit Error reports, are programmed in data fields 1*40 and 1*41.

Exit Delay Reset

This feature is designed to allow an operator to re-exit the premises to retrieve a

forgotten item without triggering an alarm. This feature is enabled in program

field 1*21, and works in the following way:

When the panel is armed, the normal exit delay begins. After the user exits, and

the door closes, the exit delay time is reset to 60 seconds. If, within this 60

second period, the entry door is re-opened, the panel will restart the exit delay

sequence again using the programmed exit delay time. This feature will only be

activated once after arming.

– 91 –

Cross-Zoning

The Cross-Zoning feature is designed so that a combination of two zones must

be faulted within a five minute period to cause an alarm on either zone. This

prevents momentary faults from causing an alarm condition. You can select four

"sets" of cross zones, keeping in mind the following:

• Both must protect the same area

• Both must be in the same partition

• A Fire zone must only be crossed to another fire zone protecting the same

physical area (see note below)

The four sets of cross-zones are programmed in data fields 1*22, 1*23, 1*24, and

1*25.

DO NOT cross-zone a fire zone with a burglary zone under any circumstance. A

fire zone must only be crossed to another fire zone and BOTH must be protecting

the same physical area (no walls or partitions separating them). Consult NFPA

72 standard for exact spacing requirements. As a guideline, we recommend that

spacing between fire cross-zones be no further than 30 ft.

Conditions That Affect Cross-Zone Operation

1. In the event of a continuous fault on one of the paired zones that lasts longer

than five minutes, a fault on the second zone will cause an alarm immediately.

2. If one of the zones in a pair is bypassed or has a zone response type set to 0,

the cross-zoning feature will not apply,

3. If an Entry/Exit zone is paired with an Interior Follower zone, be sure to enter

the Entry/Exit zone as the first zone of the pair. This will ensure that the entry

delay time is started before the follower zone is processed.

4 a. If a relay is programmed to activate on a fault of one of the zones, the

relay will activate without the other zone being faulted.

b. If a relay is programmed to activate on either an alarm or trouble,

both zones must trip before the relay will activate, and both zones

must restore for the relay to deactivate (if relay is programmed to

deactivate on a Zone List Restore).

Call Waiting Defeat Logic

Although this option does not directly prevent false alarms, it may prevent the

central station from taking action on a potential false alarm. After the panel's

initial call to report the alarm, if the panel attempts to make an additional call,

perhaps for a cancel or a zone restoral, an operator at the central station

attempting to contact the premises to verify whether or not the alarm is valid will

hear the phone ringing indefinitely and will have to dispatch on the call.

This option, enabled in program field 1*42, will attempt to defeat call waiting on

the first out-going call attempt to both the primary and secondary numbers. It

does this by dialing a special sequence preceding the phone number (but after

the PABX number). The panel will dial *70 if using touchtone and 1170 if using

rotary.

The panel does not attempt to defeat call waiting on each call attempt, since the

phone company may not complete the call if the sequence is dialed on a phone

line that does not have call waiting.

– 92 –

Section 17: ZONE TYPE DEFINITIONS

This section provides the following information:

•Zone number designations

•Zone Type Definitions

The VISTA 50 supports up to 86 zones of hard-wire, polling loop and/or wireless

protection, distributed among up to 8 partitions. The following table lists the zone

numbers and the types of sensors that can be used with each in this system:

Zone Sensors

1 2-wire smoke detectors (if used)

7 keyswitch (if used)

8 latching type glass break detectors (if used)

1-9 traditional hard-wired zones

1-63 5700 series wireless devices

1-86 5800 series wireless devices

10-86 polling loop devices

95 */1 panic

96 #/3 panic

99 */# panic

Each zone must be assigned a zone type, which defines the way in which the

system responds to faults in that zone. In addition, there are three keypad

activated zones (PANIC keys, see note) for each partition, a polling loop

supervision zone, and four RF supervisory zones, two for each RF Receiver

installed. Zone types are defined below.

Type 00: Zone Not Used

Program a zone with this zone type if the zone is not

used.

Type 01: Entry/Exit #1 Burglary.

This zone type provides entry delay whenever the

zone is faulted if the control is armed in the Away or

Stay modes. When the panel is armed in the Instant or

Maximum modes, no entry delay is provided. Exit delay

begins whenever the control is armed, regardless of

the arming mode selected. These delays are

programmable. This zone type is usually assigned to

sensors or contacts on doors through which primary

entry and exit will take place.

Type 02: Entry/Exit #2 Burglary.

This zone type provides a secondary entry delay

whenever the zone is faulted if the panel is armed in

the Away and Stay modes. When the panel is armed in

the Instant or Maximum modes, no entry delay is

provided. Secondary exit delay begins whenever the

control is armed, regardless of the arming mode

selected. These delays are programmable. This zone

type is usually assigned to sensors or contacts on

doors through which more time is needed to get to and

from the keypad. Delay times for this zone type must

be greater than Zone Type 01. (Ex.: a garage, loading

dock, or basement door)

Type 03: Perimeter Burglary.

This zone type gives an instant alarm if the zone is

faulted when the panel is armed in the Away, Stay,

Instant or Maximum modes. This zone type is usually

assigned to all sensors or contacts on exterior doors

and windows.

Type 04: Interior, Follower.

This zone type gives a delayed alarm (using the

programmed Entry /Exit time) if the Entry/Exit zone is

faulted first. Otherwise this zone type gives an instant

alarm. This zone type is active when the panel is

armed in the Away or Maximum modes. Maximum

mode eliminates the entry delay. This zone type is

bypassed automatically when the panel is armed in

the Stay or Instant modes. This zone type is usually

assigned to a zone covering an area such as a foyer,

lobby, or hallway through which one must pass upon

entry or exit(After faulting the entry/exit zone to reach

the keypad to disarm the system.) Since this zone

type is designed to provide an instant alarm if the

entry/exit zone is not violated first, it will protect an

area in the event an intruder hides on the premises

prior to the system being armed, or gains access to the

premises through an unprotected area.

– 93 –

Type 05: Trouble by Day/Alarm by Night.

This zone type will give an instant alarm if faulted when

armed in the Away, Stay, Instant or Maximum (night)

modes. During the disarmed state (day), the system will

provide a latched trouble sounding from the keypad

(and a central station report, if desired). This zone type

is usually assigned to a zone which contains a foil-

protected door or window (such as in a store), or to a

zone covering a "sensitive" area such as a stock room,

drug supply room, etc. This zone type can also be used

on a sensor or contact in an area where immediate

notification of an entry is desired.

Type 06: 24-hour Silent Alarm.

This zone type sends a report to the Central Station but

provides no keypad display or sounding. This zone type

is usually assigned to a zone containing an Emergency

button.

Type 07: 24-hour Audible Alarm.

This zone type sends a report to the Central Station,

and provides an alarm sound at the keypad, and an

audible external alarm. This zone type is usually

assigned to a zone that has an Emergency button.

Type 08: 24-hour Auxiliary Alarm.

This zone type sends a report to Central Station and

provides an alarm sound at the keypad. (No bell output

is provided). This zone type is usually assigned to a

zone containing a button for use in personal

emergencies, or to a zone containing monitoring

devices such as water sensors, temperature sensors,

etc.

Type 09: Supervised Fire. (No Verification)

This zone type provides a fire alarm on short circuit and

a trouble condition on open circuit. The bell output will

pulse when this zone type is shorted. This zone type is

always active and cannot be bypassed. This zone type

can be assigned to any wired zone except zone 9,

and can be assigned to certain wireless systems

zones.

Type 10 : Interior w/Delay.

This zone type gives entry and exit delays (using the

programmed entry/exit time), if tripped when the panel

is armed in the Away mode. This zone type is also

active during Maximum mode, but no entry delay is

provided (alarms occur immediately if zone is tripped).

This zone type is bypassed when the panel is armed

in the Stay or Instant modes. Delay begins whenever

sensors in this zone are violated, regardless of whether

or not an entry/exit delay zone was tripped first.

Type 20: Arm-Stay*

This is a special purpose zone type used with 5800

series wireless pushbutton or contact closure or

opening, and which will result in arming the system in

the STAY mode when the zone is activated.

Type 21: Arm-Away*

This is a special purpose zone type used with 5800

series wireless pushbutton or contact closure or

opening, and which will result in arming the system in

the AWAY mode when the zone is activated.

Type 22: Disarm*

This is a special purpose zone type used with 5800

series wireless pushbutton or contact closure or

opening, and which will result in disarming the system

when the zone is activated.

Type 23: No Alarm Response

This zone type can be used on a zone when an output

relay action is desired, but with no accompanying alarm

(ex. lobby door access).

* Note that these zone types are for use by 5800 series

devices

only!

NOTE FOR PANIC KEYS: Keypad panic zones share

the same zone response type for all 8 partitions, but

panics may be individually enabled for each partition.

IMPORTANT! FAULT ANNUNCIATION

Polling loop and RF troubles (zones 88-91 & 97) will

report as trouble conditions only, and as such, should

be assigned zone type 05 if annunciation is desired.

See SUPERVISION notes in POLLING LOOP and

WIRELESS EXPANSION sections for more

information.

– 94 –

Section 18: DATA FIELD DESCRIPTIONS

The following is a description of all data fields provided by this control. If you

have followed earlier instructions during the installation of the various devices,

many of these fields will already have been programmed.

If you need more information about actual programming procedures, see Section

THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING.

*00 INSTALLER CODE | | |

The Installer's Code is a 4-digit code reserved for installation company

use. This is the only code that can be used to enter the Program mode

from the keypad. This code cannot be used to disarm the system if not

used to arm the system. This code cannot reenter programming mode if

exited by the *98 command.

*02-05 ZONE RESPONSE TYPES FOR ZONES 1-27, 95-99

These fields are programmed using #93 Menu Mode–Zone

Programming.

*09 ENTRY DELAY #1 (partition-specific) |

Entry delay defines the delay time which allows users to reenter the

premises through a door that has been programmed as an entry delay

door and disarm the system without sounding an alarm. The system must

be disarmed within this period or an alarm will occur. Enter the entry

delay time (01-15 times 15 seconds or 00 for no delay), up to a maximum

delay of 225 seconds (entry 15 times 15 seconds), for zones assigned to

Zone Type 01.

*10 EXIT DELAY #1 (partition-specific) |

Exit delay defines the delay period that allows users to leave the

premises through a door that has been programmed as an entry/exit

delay door after arming the system without setting off the alarm. Enter

the exit delay time (01-15 times 15 seconds or 00 for no delay), up to a

maximum delay of 225 seconds, for zones assigned to Zone Type 01.

*11 ENTRY DELAY #2 (partition-specific) |

Entry Delay 2 is used for the zone assigned to Entry Delay #2 zone type.

Note that this delay must be longer than Entry Delay #1.

*12 EXIT DELAY #2 (partition-specific) |

Exit delay 2 is used for the zone assigned to Exit Delay #2. Note that

this delay must be longer than Exit Delay #1.

*13 ALARM SOUNDER DURATION (partition-specific) |

Defines the length of time an external sounder and the keypad's sounder

will sound for all audible alarms (multiply entry 01-15 by 2 minutes for

actual duration). This duration can be overridden by the Fire Timeout

Disable option (field *21) for fire alarms.

Minimum 4 minutes for UL installations.

*14 ZONE 9 RESPONSE TIME

Enter 1 to set fast response mode (10msec) for appropriate devices

wired to zone 9. Enter 0 for normal response, 350msec.

Must be 0 for UL.

– 95 –

*15 KEYSWITCH ASSIGNMENT

Enter the partition number 1-8 in which the keyswitch is being used;

otherwise, enter 0.

Requires the use of zone 7 wired loop (zone 7 no longer available as

protection zone when used for keyswitch operation). If the keyswitch is

used, the fire and panic alarm voltage triggers automatically become

ARMING and READY status outputs for support of the Keyswitch LEDs.

Note: Zone type 10 is automatically assigned to zone 7 if a keyswitch is

used. Reports openings/closing by user "0" if reporting is enabled in field

*40.

*16 CONFIRMATION OF ARMING DING (partition-specific)

Enter 1 to enable 1/2 second external alarm sounding ("ding") at the end

of exit delay (or after kisoff from the central station, if sending closing

reports.) Otherwise enter 0.

*17 AC LOSS KEYPAD SOUNDING

Enter 1 to enable sounding at the keypad (rapid beeping) when AC

power is lost (sounding occurs about 2 minutes after actual AC loss).

Enter 0 if no AC power loss keypad sounding is desired.

*18 AC LOSS SIREN

Enter 1 to enable the external alarm sound after AC power has been out

for 4 hours; Otherwise enter 0 (no alarm). (Must be "1" for UL)

*19 RANDOMIZE AC LOSS REPORT

Selecting this option helps prevent an overload of AC loss messages at

the central station during a community blackout.

Enter 1 to randomize AC loss reporting between 10-40 min. after an

actual AC loss. Enter 0 for normal AC loss reporting (about 2 minutes

after actual AC loss).

*20 VIP MODULE PHONE CODE

If a 4285 voice module is being used, enter the 2-digit phone code used

to access the system.

Enter 01-09 for first digit, and enter 11 (for *) or 12 (for #) for second digit.

To disable the voice module, enter 00 for the 1st digit and enter 11 for

the 2nd digit of the code (disable code = 00,11).

*21 PREVENT FIRE TIME-OUT

Enter 1 to disable (no timeout) the alarm sounder duration for any zone

designated as a fire zone, regardless of partition, so that fire sounding

continues until the system is reset.

Enter 0 if the normal burglary alarm sounder duration (programmed in

partition-specific field *13) should apply to fire alarms.

*22 KEYPAD PANIC ENABLES (partition-specific) | |

Enter 1 to enable the appropriate keypad panics used 95 96 99

in this partition. Otherwise enter 0.

– 96 –

*23 MULTIPLE ALARMS (partition-specific)

Determines whether or not more than one alarm can be sounded in a

given zone during an armed period. Note that multiple alarm soundings

will not occur more frequently than allowed by the programmed alarm

sounder duration. This selection applies to local sounding and has no

impact on the number of communication messages transmitted. Refer to

Swinger Suppression for limiting communication messages. Enter 1 if

this feature is desired. Enter 0 if not desired.

*24 IGNORE EXPANSION ZONE TAMPER

Only applicable to certain polling loop sensors with tamper switches or

5800 series transmitters. This option is used to disable tamper detection

on these devices.

Enter 1 to disable (ignore) tamper.

Enter 0 if tamper detection is desired.

*25 BURG. TRIGGER FOR RESPONSE TYPE 8

Enter 1 to allow optional triggering of the voltage output on pin 7 of the J7

header to include zone response type 8 (24hr. auxiliary).

Enter 0 if only burglary and audible panic alarms (zone type 7) will trigger

pin 7.

*26 INTELLIGENT TEST REPORTING

Enter 1 if it is desired that no test report be sent if any other type of report

was sent since the last test report.

Enter 0 if test reports are to be sent at the set intervals, regardless of

whether or not other reports have been sent. Must be 0 for UL

applications.

*27 TEST REPORT INTERVAL | |

Enter the test reporting interval in hours, 001-999.

Enter 000 if no test reporting is desired. If a test report is desired, enter a

test code in fields *81 & *82, location 7.

Set first test report time in field *83.

Max. 024 for UL.

*28 POWER UP IN PREVIOUS STATE

Enter 1 if upon power-up, after a prolonged power loss which caused the

system's battery to discharge, the system will assume the system status

prior to the power loss.

Enter 0 if it is desired that the system will always power up in a disarmed

state. When the system powers up armed, an alarm will occur 3 minutes

after arming if a zone is faulted. When so armed, reports closing as User

#0 if open/close reporting for installer was enabled in field *39. Note that

if the previous state was armed AWAY or STAY, the system may not

respond to sensor changes for a small period of time (1-3 min.), which

allows sensors such as PIRs to stabilize.

Must be 1 for UL applications. Note that authority levels 0 or 5 cannot be

used to disarm the system if control powers up armed.

– 97 –

*29 QUICK ARM (partition-specific)

Enter 1 to enable arming of the burglary system in AWAY, STAY,

INSTANT or MAXIMUM modes by using the # key instead of the security

code. When armed, reports closing as User 0 if open/close reporting for

User #2 (typically a master level user) was enabled for a given partition.

Enter 0 if Quick Arm is not desired. (The security code must always be

used to disarm the system.) Note that if quick arm is used, the installer

code and authority level 5 code cannot disarm the system.

*30 TOUCH-TONE OR ROTARY DIAL

Enter 1 if TouchTone service is being used.

Enter 0 if rotary phone service is used.

If selecting touch-tone, make sure the subscriber has requested and is paying for

touch-tone service. Note that whether or not touch-tone dialing for call placement

is permitted, communication by the use of DTMF signaling (Ademco High Speed)

will still take place. See field 1*33 for Touch-Tone w/Rotary backup.

*31 PABX ACCESS CODE | | | |

This field is used to enter up to four 2-digit numbers 00-09; B-F (11-15).

If not required, enter nothing and proceed to next address; otherwise,

enter prefix needed to obtain an outside Telco line.

*32 PRIMARY SUBSCRIBER ACCT # | | | |

(partition-specific) Enter 00-09; B-F (11-15)

Enter a 3 or 4 digit (depending on report format) primary subscriber

account number 00-09; B-F (11-15). Each number requires a 2-digit entry

so as to allow entry of hexadecimal digits (B-F). If a 3 digit account

number is to be used, only enter data in the first 3 locations, leaving the

last one unfilled, by entering a *.

This field is used to enter the primary central station phone number, up to

17 digits, 0-9; enter #11 for *, #12 for #, and #13 for a 2 sec. pause.

This is the phone number the control will use to transmit alarm and status

messages to the central station. Do not fill unused spaces. Note that

back-up reporting is automatic only if a secondary phone number is

entered (8 calls are made to the secondary phone number if no

acknowledgment is received after 8 attempts to the primary number).

This field is used to enter the secondary phone number, up to 17 digits,

0-9; enter #11 for *, #12 for #, and #13 for a 2 sec. pause. This

number. It is used if communication on the primary number is

unsuccessful, or if split/dual reporting is desired. Do not fill unused

spaces. If this field is programmed, a secondary subscriber account

number (field *90)

must

also be programmed (can be the same as the

primary account number).

– 98 –

This field is applicable only if downloading will be utilized.

Enter the downloading phone number, up to 12 digits, 0-9; enter #11 for

*, #12 for #, and #13 for a 2 sec. pause. Do not fill unused spaces.

Enter eight digits, 00-09; A-F (10-15). Only applicable if downloading will

be utilized. Make entries as 2-digit numbers as follows:

00=0 02=2 04=4 06=6 08=8 10=A 12=C 14=E

01=1 03=3 05=5 07=7 09=9 11=B 13=D 15=F

*37 DOWNLOAD COMMAND ENABLES

Dialer System Not Remote Remote Remote Upload Download

Shutdwn Shutdwn Used Bypass Disarm Arm Program Program

Each of the various remote functions can either be enabled or disabled

through VLink or Compass downloading software. Disabling a function

means that you will not be able to perform that function with respect to

this system. Enter 1 to enable a function, and 0 to disable a function.

See field 1*53 to disable the download callback option. For UL

installations, all entries must be 0.

*38 PREVENT ZONE XX BYPASS (partition-specific) |

Entering a zone number (01-86) prevents that zone from being bypassed

by the user. Enter 00 if this feature is not desired (all zones can be

bypassed). This selection does not affect fire zones, which the system

prevents from being bypassed.

*39 ENABLE OPEN/CLOSE REPORT FOR INSTALLER CODE

(partition-specific)

Enter 1 if open/close reporting for the installer is desired.

Otherwise enter 0.

*40 OPEN/CLOSE REPORTING FOR KEYSWITCH

Enter 1 to enable open/close reporting for the keyswitch.

Enter 0 if reporting is not desired.

*41 NORMALLY CLOSED OR EOLR (ZONES 2-8)

Enter 0 if end-of-line resistors are to be used.

Enter 1 if end-of-line resistors are not to be used, in which case only

normally closed devices must be used.

Must be 0 for UL.

*42 DIAL TONE PAUSE

This field sets the time the system will wait for dial tone before dialing.

Applies if true dial tone is not selected in field *43.

Enter the desired wait time for dial tone detection as follows: Enter

single digit, 0 = 5 seconds; 1 = 11 seconds; or 2 = 30 seconds. Must be

0 for UL.

– 99 –

*43 DIAL TONE DETECTION

Determines whether the control will wait for a true dial tone before

dialing, or if it will wait for a predetermined delay before dialing (delay is

programmed in Dial Tone Pause field *42). The latter may be necessary

in high-noise environment Telco networks where noise can be confused

with dial tone, resulting in premature dialing.

Enter 1 for true dial tone wait. If no dial tone is detected, will dial at end of

pause programmed in field *42.

Enter 0 to pause for seconds entered in field *42, then dial.

*44 RING DETECTION COUNT |

Only applicable if using a 4285 VIP Module and/or if station initiated

downloading will be used.

Enter 00 to disable ring detection.

Enter 01-14 for ring counts of 1-14.

Enter 15 to select answering machine defeat mode, which allows the

system to receive calls even when a telephone answering machine is

connected to the same phone line. In the answering machine mode, the

caller should let the phone ring once, then hang up, and call again within

30 seconds. The system, upon hearing one ring followed by nothing, will

not answer the first call, but will ready itself to pick up on the first ring of

the next incoming call that is received within 30 seconds (the downloader

calling again).

*45 PRIMARY FORMAT

This field selects the reporting format for use on the primary telephone

number.

Enter the appropriate number for the primary format as follows: 0=Low

Speed; 1=Contact ID; 2=Ademco High Speed; 3=Ademco Express

*46 LOW SPEED FORMAT (PRIMARY)

Enter the appropriate value: 0=Ademco Low Speed; 1=Sescoa/Radionics

*47 SECONDARY FORMAT

This field selects the reporting format for the secondary telephone

number

Enter the appropriate number for the secondary format as follows: 0=Low

Speed; 1=Contact ID; 2=Ademco High Speed; 3=Ademco Express

*48 LOW SPEED FORMAT (SECONDARY)

Enter the appropriate value: 0=Ademco Low Speed; 1=Sescoa/Radionics

*49 CHECKSUM VERIFICATION

Enter 1 for either or both primary/secondary formats to send a verification

digit to validate the message at the receiver without having to send two

message rounds. Selection is valid for 3+1, 4+1, and 4+2 reports.

Enter 0 if not desired.

– 100 –

*50 SESCOA/RADIONICS SELECT

Enter 0 if Radionics format is to be used with hexadecimal 0-9, B-F

reporting.

Enter 1 if SESCOA format is to be used with only numeric reporting (0-9).

Note that selection applies to both primary and secondary phone

numbers.

*51 DUAL REPORTING

This field allows all reports to be sent to both primary and secondary

phone numbers.

Enter 1 if all reports are to be sent to both primary and secondary phone

numbers. If used with Split Reporting option 1 (1*34), alarms go to both

primary & secondary numbers, while all other reports go to secondary

only. If used with Split Reporting option 2, alarms go to both lines,

open/close and test messages go to secondary only, while all other

reports go to primary.

*52 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT PRIMARY

Enter 0 for standard or 1 for expanded reporting for the primary phone

number

Note: Expanded overrides 4+2 format.

*53 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT SECONDARY

Enter 0 for standard or 1 for expanded reporting for the secondary phone

number.

Note: Expanded overrides 4+2 format.

*54- 78 REPORT CODES FOR ZONES 01-64, 81-91, 95-99)

Enter the report codes for each zone used in the system. Each digit is a

two-digit entry to allow for hex codes. Enter 01-09; A-F (10-15). Can

also be entered using the #93 Zone Programming mode.

*79 ZONE TYPE RESTORES FOR ZONE TYPES 1-8

12345678

Enter 1 to enable restore reporting for individual zone types.

Enter 0 if no restore report is desired for a zone type.

*80 ZONE TYPE RESTORES FOR TYPES 9/10

910

Enter 1 to enable restore reporting for individual zone types.

Enter 0 if no restore report is desired for a zone type.

*81- NON-ALARM REPORT CODES (FIRST DIGIT)

Enter the first digit of each report code for the conditions indicated on the

programming form.

*82 NON-ALARM REPORT CODES (SECOND DIGIT)

Enter the second digit of each report code for the conditions indicated on

the programming form.

– 101 –

*83 FIRST TEST REPORT TIME | | |

Enter the day (00-07) and time (00-23 hours/00-59 min.) that the first

test report shall be transmitted.

00 entry in all locations signifies immediately upon exiting.

00 entry in the day location will cause the report to be sent at the next

occurrence of the time that is set.

Note that day 01=Monday. See fields *81 & *82 for assigning the Test

Report code.

*84 SWINGER SUPPRESSION (partition-specific) |

This option limits the number of messages (Alarms or Troubles) sent for

a specific channel in an armed period (Swinger Suppression). Enter 01-

15. If 00 is selected, all Alarm or Trouble codes are reported.

Must be 00 (disabled) for UL installations.

*85 ENABLE DIALER REPORTS

FOR PANICS & DURESS (partition-specific) 95 96 99 Duress

Enter 1 for each panic/duress for which reporting is desired.

*87 ENTRY WARNING (partition-specific)

Enter 0 for 3 short beeps, or 1 for slow beeps that continue for the entire

entry delay period.

*88 BURG. ALARM COMM. DELAY (partition-specific) |

Enter 0 for no delay on burglary alarm communication. Enter 1 for 16-

second delay (no delay on 24-hour reports).

*89 RESTORE REPORT TIMING

Enter 0 for instant restore report as zone restores.

Enter 1 for reporting after bell timeout if zone restored. Enter 2 for

restore report when system is subsequently disarmed

*90 SECONDARY SUBSCRIBER ACCT # | | | |

(partition-specific) Enter 00-09; B-F (11-15)

Enter the 3 or 4 digit number (depending on report format) for the

secondary subscriber account, 00-09; B-F (11-15). Each number requires

a 2-digit entry so as to allow entry of hexadecimal digits (B-F). If a 3-digit

number is to be used, only enter data in the first 6 locations, leaving the

last two unfilled. Default=15 15 15 15. Erase the field by entering *90*.

NOTE: This field

must

be programmed if a secondary phone number is

used (field *34). This account number can be the same as the primary

account number.

1*01- RESPONSE TYPES FOR ZONES 28-91

1*09 These fields are programmed via #93 Menu Mode–Zone

Programming.

1*17 LOBBY PARTITION

Enter the common lobby partition (1-8).

Enter 0 if none.

1*18 AFFECTS LOBBY (partition-specific)

Enter 1 if this partition affects the common lobby. Will cause lobby to

disarm when this partition disarms.

Enter 0 if it does not.

– 102 –

1*19 ARMS LOBBY (partition-specific)

Enter 1 if arming this partition causes the system to attempt to arm the

common lobby partition automatically. Can only arm lobby if all other

affecting partitions are armed. To enable this field, field 1*18 must also

be enabled. (partition-specific)

Enter 0 if arming this partition will not attempt to arm the common lobby

partition.

1*20 EXIT ERROR LOGIC

Enter 1 to enable Exit Error Logic (entry/exit doors will be bypassed if left

open).

Enter 0 if Exit Error Logic is not desired.

1*21 EXIT DELAY RESET

Enter 1 to reset Exit Delay to 60 seconds after door is closed.

Enter 0 if Exit Delay not to be reset.

1*22 CROSS ZONING PAIR ONE | |

Enter the first pair of zones which must both be faulted within a five

minute period to cause an alarm.

Enter 00,00 to disable.

1*23 CROSS ZONING PAIR TWO | |

Enter the second pair of zones which must both be faulted within a five

minute period to cause an alarm.

Enter 00,00 to disable.

1*24 CROSS ZONING PAIR THREE | |

Enter the third pair of zones which must both be faulted within a five

minute period to cause an alarm.

Enter 00,00 to disable.

1*25 CROSS ZONING PAIR FOUR | |

Enter the fourth pair of zones which must both be faulted within a five

minute period to cause an alarm.

Enter 00,00 to disable.

1*28 RF TX LOW BATTERY SOUND

Enter 0 if audible beep and display annunciation upon RF transmitter low

battery condition is desired only in disarmed state.

Enter 1 if audible beep and display is desired in both armed and

disarmed states.

Must be 1 for UL.

1*29 RF TX LOW BATTERY REPORT ENABLE

Enter 1 if a trouble message for RF transmitter low battery conditions is

to be sent to the central station.

Enter 0 if no report for transmitter low battery is desired. Note that a

trouble message will be sent for a transmitter supervision failure

independent of this selection.

Must be 1 for UL.

– 103 –

1*30 RF RCVR SUPERVISION CHECK-IN INTERVAL

Enter the check-in monitoring interval in 2-hour increments.

Enter 02-15 times 2 hours (4-30 hours).

Failure of a receiver to receive any RF signal within the time entered will

result in activation of the response type programmed for zone 90 for the

first receiver and zone 88 for the second receiver and their related

communication reports.

Enter 00 to disable receiver supervision.

Max. "6" (12 hr) for UL.

1*31 RF TRANSMITTER CHECK-IN INTERVAL |

Enter the check-in monitoring interval in 2-hour increments;

Enter 02-15 times 2 hours (4-30 hours).

Failure of an individual transmitter to send a supervision signal within the

time entered will result in a trouble response and related communication

report. Entry 00 disables transmitter supervision.

Max. "6" (12 hr) for UL.

1*32 RECEIVER TYPE

Enter 1 if using 4281 series receivers.

Enter 2 if using 5881 series receivers.

Important: the 4281 microprocessor must have part number N5334Vx,

where x is any number.

1*33 TOUCH-TONE W/ROTARY BACKUP

Enter 1 to enable Rotary back-up dialing if communicator is not

successful on dialing using touch-tone DTMF on first attempt.

Enter 0 if this option is not desired.

1*34 COMM. SPLIT REPORT SELECTION

This field allows certain reports to be directed to either the primary or

secondary phone number.

Enter 0, 1, or 2, in accordance with the following: 0 = split reporting

disabled; 1 = alarm, alarm restore & cancel reports sent to primary Telco

number, all others to secondary Telco number; 2 = open/close & test

reports sent to secondary Telco number and all other reports to primary.

See *51 for split/dual reporting comments.

1*35- REPORT CODES FOR ZONES 65-80

1*39 Enter the report codes for each zone used in the system. Each digit is a

two-digit entry to allow for hex codes. Enter 01-09; A-F (10-15). Can

also be entered using the #93 Zone Programming mode.

1*40 EVENT LOGGING REPORT CODES

1*41 Enter the appropriate code as shown on the programming form.

1*42 CALL WAITING DEFEAT

Enter 1 for the panel to defeat call waiting on the first attempt (DO NOT

enable unless call waiting is being used.

Otherwise, enter 0.

– 104 –

1*43 PERMANENT KEYPAD DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING

(partition-specific)

Enter 1 if it is desired that backlighting for the keypad display remain on

at all times. Enter 0 if the display should remain unlit unless a key is

pressed. The backlighting then turns off again after a period of keypad

inactivity. Note that when a key is pressed, display backlighting turns on

for all keypads in that partition.

1*44 WIRELESS KEYPAD TAMPER DETECT

Enter 1 to enable tamper detection on wireless keypad.

Enter 0 if tamper detection is not desired. If this feature is enabled, any

attempt to tamper by means of many trial entries at a wireless keypad will

be blocked by the control panel. If more than 40 key depressions are

received without a valid sequence (arm, disarm, etc.), the Control panel

will disable the wireless keypad. The inhibit is removed once a valid key

sequence is received from a wired keypad.

1*45 EXIT DELAY SOUNDING (partition-specific)

Enter 1 if beeps from the keypads during exit delay is desired. Enter 0

for no keypad sound during exit delay.

1*46 AUXILIARY OUTPUT MODE

Enter 0 if ground start output is required (not for UL applications);

Enter 1 if the auxiliary output will be used to produce an open/close

trigger (produced only if all partitions are armed);

Enter 2 if the auxiliary output will be used to produce keypad-like

sounding at an auxiliary sounder (ex. 706-12) This option applies only to

the partition set in field *15. NOTE: Only one of the above options can

be active within a system.

Enter 3 if AAV module is being used.

1*47 CHIME ON EXTERNAL SIREN (partition-specific)

Enter 1 for chime annunciation using the external alarm sounder. If not

desired, enter 0.

1*48 WIRELESS KEYPAD ASSIGNMENT

Enter the partition in which RF keypad is used, 1-8.

Enter 0 if no RF keypad is used.

1*49 SUPPRESS TX SUPERVISION SOUND

Enter 1 to disable trouble sounding for transmitter check-in failure.

Enter 0 if audible trouble sounding is desired.

Must be "0" for UL.

1*52 SEND CANCEL IF ALARM + OFF (partition-specific)

Enter 1 if cancel reports to be sent when the system is disarmed after an

alarm, regardless of how much time has gone by. Enter 0 if cancel

reports are to be sent within Bell Timeout period only.

1*53 DISABLE DOWNLOAD CALLBACK

Enter 1 to disable the callback requirement for downloading.

Enter 0 to require a callback.

Must be 0 for UL installations.

– 105 –

1*57 ENABLE 5800 RF BUTTON GLOBAL ARM

Enter 1 to have the system arm/disarm in accordance with the button's

user's global arming settings.

Enter 0 if the button is not to be used to global arm the system (however,

home partition arming will still occur).

1*58 ENABLE 5800 RF BUTTON FORCE BYPASS

Enter 1 to allow the RF Button user to force bypass all faulted zones.

When attempting to arm the system, the keypad will beep once after

pressing the button if any faulted zones are present. If this feature is

enabled, the user should then press the button again within 4 seconds to

force bypass those zones and arm the system.

Enter 0 if RF button forced bypassing is not desired.

1*60 ZONE 5 AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATION

Enter 1 if 2-Way Audio (AAV) is being used.

Enter 0 if AAV is not being used.

1*70 EVENT LOG TYPES

Alm Chck Byps O/C Systm

Enter 1 for each type of event for which event logging is desired.

Otherwise enter 0.

1*71 12/24 HOUR TIME STAMP FORMAT

Select the type of time stamping desired:

0=standard 12 hour; 1= 24 hour format.

1*72 EVENT LOG PRINTER ON-LINE

Enter 1 to have the printer print events as they occur

Enter 0 to enable the printer such that the logs are only printed upon

request.

1*73 PRINTER BAUD RATE

Enter 0 if printer is set for 1200 baud (preferred).

Enter 1 if printer is set for 300 baud.

1*74 RELAY TIMEOUT XX MINUTES | |

Enter the relay timeout, 000-127 in multiples of 2 minutes, desired for

#80 Menu Mode time driven event relay command numbers "04/09" and

#93 Menu Mode Relay Programming output command "56" (refer to #93

and #80 Menu Mode sections in this manual).

1*75 RELAY TIMEOUT YY SECONDS | |

Enter the relay timeout, 000-127 seconds, desired for #80 Menu Mode

time driven event relay command numbers "05/10" and #93 Menu Mode

Relay Programming command "57" (refer to #93 and #80 Menu Mode

sections in this manual.

1*76 ACCESS CONTROL RELAY (partition-specific) |

The system can be programmed to provide user activated access

control. If enabled, the assigned relay will pulse for 2 seconds when the

user enters his code and presses "0". Enter the relay number (00-16) for

the relay that will be used for access control. Enter 00 if not used in this

partition.

– 106 –

2*00 NUMBER OF PARTITIONS

Enter the number of partitions (1-8) to be used in the system.

2*01 DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME | |

START/END MONTH

Enter the months 00-12 in which daylight savings time starts and ends.

Enter 00, 00 if daylight savings time does not apply to the user's region.

Standard setting for U.S. is 04,10.

2*02 DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME | |

START/END WEEKEND

Enter the start and end weekends for daylight savings time as follows:

01=first; 02=second; 03=third; 04=fourth; 05=last; 06=next to last;

07=third from last. Standard setting for U.S. is 01,05.

2*05 AUTO-ARM DELAY (partition-specific) |

Enter the time between the end of the arming window and the start of

auto arm warning time in values of 01-14 times 4 minutes. Enter 00 if no

delay is desired. Enter 15 if auto arming is not desired.

2*06 AUTO-ARM WARNING PERIOD (partition-specific) |

Enter the time 01-15 in one minute increments during which the user is

warned by a keypad sounding and display to exit the premises prior to

auto arming of the system.

2*07 AUTO-DISARM DELAY (partition-specific) |

Enter the time between the end of the disarming window and the start of

auto disarming of the system in values of 01-14 times 4 minutes. Enter

00 if no delay is desired. Enter 15 if auto disarming is not desired.

2*08 ENABLE FORCE ARM FOR AUTO-ARM

(partition-specific)

Enter 1 if the system should automatically bypass any faulted zones

when it attempts to auto arm. Otherwise enter 0.

2*09 OPEN/CLOSE REPORTS BY EXCEPTION

(partition-specific)

Enter 1 if it is desired that open/close reports be sent only if the

openings/closings occur outside the arm and disarm windows. Open

reports will also be suppressed during the closing window in order to

prevent false alarms if the user arms the system, then reenters the

premises to retrieve a forgotten item. Note that openings and closings

are still recorded in the event log. Enter 0 if exception reporting is not

desired. Note: This field must be set to 1 if late/early opening, late/early

closing, and no opening/closing reports are to be sent (2*13, 2*14).

2*10 ALLOW DISARMING ONLY DURING ARM/DISARM

WINDOWS (partition-specific)

Enter 1 if disarming of the system should be allowed only during the

arming/disarming windows, or if the system is in alarm (if 2*11 is set to

"1"). Note that this applies only to operator level users. Installer, Master

and manager level users can disarm the system at any time. Enter 0 if

disarming can occur at any time.

0=disable for displayed partition; 1=enable for displayed partition

– 107 –

2*11 ALLOW DISARM OUTSIDE WINDOW IF

ALARM OCCURS

Used only if field 2*10 (partition-specific field) is set to 1.

Enter 1 to allow the system to be disarmed outside the programmed

disarm (opening) window if an alarm has occurred. Enter 0 to allow

disarming only during the disarm window, regardless of system status. If

field 2*10 is set to 0 for a partition, this field (2*11) has no effect for that

partition.

2*13- SCHEDULING RELATED DIALER REPORTS

2*14 Enter the report codes for the scheduling related events as shown on the

programming form.

2*18 ENABLE GOTO FOR THIS PARTITION

(partition-specific)

Enter 1 if this partition is to be accessed from another partition's keypad

using the GOTO command. Otherwise enter 0.

2*19 USE PARTITION DESCRIPTORS

Enter 1 if partition descriptors will be programmed. If enabled, the normal

keypad display will include a partition number and four-digit descriptor).

Enter 0 to cause the keypads to display a non-partitioned system type of

display (no partition number will appear).

2*20 ENABLE J7 TRIGGERS BY PARTITION

(partition-specific)

2*21 SUPERVISION PULSES FOR LORRA | |

TRIGGER OUTPUTS F B S

Used for supervised connection to 7920SE.

Enter 1 to enable pulses for each type of LORRA trigger (burglary, fire,

silent panic). This option causes the control to send periodic short pulses

on he J7 radio triggers These pulses are used by the 7920SE to

determine that its connection to the control is still intact. Enter 0 if not

desired.

– 108 –

Section 19: #93 MENU MODE PROGRAMMING

This section provides the following information:

• #93 Menu Mode main menu options

• Zone Programming

• Serial Number Programming

• Alpha Programming

• Device Programming

• Relay Programming

• Relay Voice Descriptors

• Custom Index Programming (VIP Module substitute words)

#93 Main Menu Options

The following fields should be programmed before beginning: 2*00: Number of

Partitions; 1*32: RF receiver type.

After programming all system related programming fields in the usual way, press

#93 while still in programming mode to display the first choice of the menu driven

programming options, which are as follows:

ZONE PROG?

0=No 1=Yes For programming the following:

• Zone Number

• Zone Response Type

• Partition Number for Zone

• Dialer report code for zone

• Input Device Type for zone (whether RF,

polling loop, etc.)

• Learning serial numbers of 5800 series

transmitters & serial polling loop devices into

the system (all other zone characteristics must

be pre-programmed).

ALPHA PROG?

0=no 1=yes For entering alpha descriptors for the following:

• Zone Descriptors

• Installer's Message

• Custom Words

• Partition Descriptors

• Relay Descriptors

DEVICE PROG?

0=no 1=yes For defining the following device characteristics for

addressable devices, including keypads, RF

receivers (4281/5881), 4204 output relay modules,

and 4285 VIP Module:

•Device Address

•Device Type

•Keypad Options (incl. partition assignment)

•RF House ID

RELAY PROG?

0=no 1=yes For defining output relay functions. This prompt is

fully explained in the 4204 RELAY MODULE section.

RLY VOICE DESCR?

0=no 1=yes For entering voice descriptors for relays/Power Line

Carrier devices to be used with the 4285 VIP Module

This prompt is fully explained in the RELAY

OUTPUTS/POWER LINE CARRIER DEVICES

section.

CUSTOM INDEX #?

0=no 1=yes For creating custom word substitutes for VIP Module

annunciation. This prompt is fully explained in the

4285 VIP MODULE section.

– 109 –

Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES) in response to the displayed menu selection. Pressing

0 will display the next choice in sequence. Refer to the

ZONE PROGRAMMING

section for instructions on how to program zone characteristics, the

DEVICE

PROGRAMMING

section for instructions on how to program addressable

devices, and the

ALPHA PROGRAMMING

section for programming alpha

descriptors.

The following is a list of commands used while in the menu mode.

#93 Menu Mode Key Commands

#93 Enters Menu mode

[*] Serves as ENTER key. Press to have keypad accept entry.

[#] Backs up to previous screen.

0 Press to answer NO

1 Press to answer YES

00 Escapes from menu mode, back into data field programming

mode, if entered at the first prompt of each main menu option.

Zone Programming

Enter Programming mode [Installer Code] + 8 0 0. The following fields should be

programmed before beginning:

2*00: Number of Partitions;

1*32: RF Receiver Type.

Also, before programming wireless zones, the RF receiver must be enabled in

Device Programming Mode (later in Device Programming section).

Then press #93 to display "ZONE PROG?".

ZONE PROG?

1=Yes 0=No Press 1 to enter ZONE PROGRAMMING mode. The

following screens will appear. Press * to display

the next screen. Press # to display a previous

screen.

Enter Zn No.

00=QUIT 20 Enter the zone number to be programmed (01-86,

88-91, 92 (duress), 95, 96, 97 or 99). Press * to

accept entry.

20 ZT P RC In:L

00 1 00 RF:N A summary screen for that zone will appear.

ZT=Zone Type, P=Partition, RC=Report Code,

In:=the input type of device, and L=the device's loop

number to which the sensor is connected (some

devices can support more than one zone by means

of individual loops (ex. 5801, 5803, 5816, 5817, etc.)

20 Zone Type

Zone disabled 00 Each zone in a system must be assigned a zone

type, which defines the way in which the system

responds to faults in that zone. Refer to Section 17:

ZONE TYPE DEFINITIONS

for detailed definitions of

each zone type. Enter the zone response type for

this zone. The screen will automatically display the

zone type for the number entered. Press * to

accept entry.

– 110 –

Zone Types are as follows:

00 Assign for unused zones

01 Entry/Exit #1, burglary

02 Entry/exit #2,

03 Perimeter, burglary

04 Interior, follower, burglary

05 Trouble by day/Alarm by night, burglary

06 24 hour silent alarm

07 24 hour audible alarm

08 24 hour auxiliary

09 Fire

10 Interior, delay, burglary

20 Arm-stay (for 5800 RF only)

21 Arm-away (for 5800 RF only)

22 Disarm (for 5800 RF only)

23 No alarm response (ex. relay action)

For UL applications, use of 1 or 2 RF RCVRs

requires enabling their respective faults (88-91) as

applicable (zone type 5).

20 Partition Enter the partition number (1-8) that this zone is

located in.

20 Report Code Enter the report code for this zone.

20 Input Type

RF Trans. RF:

Note that input types 4

& 5 are valid for certain

5800 series transmitters

only (ex. 5801, 5802,

5802CP & 5803). When

using 5700 series

transmitters, always set

the input type to 3 (RF).

The zone number of the

transmitter identifies

whether or not

supervision is required

(ex. 5700 wireless zone

number 63 is not

supervised).

Enter the input device type as follows: 0 = not used;

1=hardwired; 3=supervised RF transmitter (RF type);

4=unsupervised RF transmitter (UR type); 5=RF

button type transmitter (BR type); 6=serial number

polling loop device (SL type); 7=DIP switch type

polling loop device; 8=right loop of DIP switch type

device.

Right loops refer to the use of the right loop on a

4190WH zone expander module and/or 4278 PIR,

which allow hard-wired devices to be monitored by

the polling loop.

If hardwired, dipswitch polling loop, or 5700 series

devices are being programmed, after completing this

entry, the summary display appears. Press * to

continue. The display will now return to the "Enter

Zone Number" prompt for programming the next

zone into the system. If all zones are programmed,

enter 00 and press (∗) to exit back to normal

programming mode.

If either 5800 series RF or polling loop serial number

devices are being programmed, continue to the next

prompt.

20 LOOP NUMBER

20 LEARN S/N ?

1=YES 0=NO

If this is a previously "learned" sensor, the loop

number for this zone will appear. Press * to

continue.

If the sensor's serial number has not been "learned,"

the serial number can be learned now by entering 1,

or it can be learned later by using the SERIAL

NUMBER LEARN mode (see next section).

– 111 –

20 INPUT S/N :L

A000-0000:1 If learning the serial number now (entering 1 at the

last prompt), this prompt appears. Fault and restore

the transmitter or polling loop device twice. The

keypad will beep twice when it hears the first

transmission, and three times when it hears the

second. If the serial number is printed on the

wireless device, it may be entered manually rather

than learned. The loop number you want to use for

this zone must also be entered.

20 PROG AS RF:1

A001-3078:1 A summary screen will appear if the serial number

was successfully learned. Press * to continue.

Press * to continue. The summary screen will then

appear (see summary screen description above).

Press * to return to the "Enter Zone Number"

prompt for programming the next zone into the

system. When all zones are programmed, enter 00

and press (*). The system will prompt "Quit?" Enter

1 to exit back to normal programming mode. Enter 0

to stay in menu mode.

Learning Serial Numbers

Usually, serial numbers are learned during zone programming. But if not, use

#93 menu mode to learn serial numbers (for example, if all other programming

was done via downloading).

1. Enter data field programming mode: installer code + 8 0 0.

2. From data field programming mode, press #93 to display the "ZONE

PROG?" prompt.

3. Press 0 (NO) repeatedly until the "SERIAL # PROG?" prompt appears.

SERIAL # PROG?

0=no 1=yes To learn or delete a device's serial number, enter 1

(yes). Enter 0 to move to the Alpha Programming

menu.

Enter Zone No.

00=QUIT Enter the zone number of the device to be learned or

deleted. Press * to move to the next prompt.

Enter 00 to quit Serial Number programming.

If that zone number was programmed as a non-

applicable input type (i.e., Hardwird) in the Zone

Programming mode, a prompt indicating such will

appear. Press * to return to the "Enter Zone No."

prompt.

10 PROG AS RF:2

A000-5372:2 If a serial number has already been learned for that

device, a summary prompt will appear displaying the

type of device and its serial number. Press * to

continue to the Delete S/N prompt.

DELETE S/N?

0=No, 1=Yes Enter 1 to delete the displayed serial numbered

device. Enter 0 if this device should not be deleted.

– 112 –

Input type

Input = 0 or 3-6 If a serial number for that device has not been

learned yet, and if the device assigned to that zone

number has been programmed as a serial number

input device in the Zone Programming menus, this

prompt will appear. Enter the device input type as

follows: 0=none, 3= supervised RF transmitter (RF

type), 4= unsupervised RF transmitter (UR), 5= RF

button type (BR type), 6= serial polling loop device

(SL type). Press * to con tinue.

Learn S/N?

0=No, 1=Yes If adding a new serial number device to the system,

this prompt will appear after entering the input type.

Enter 1 to learn the device's serial number into the

system. Press * to continue.

Input S/N:L

Axxx - xxxx:L If 1 was entered at the Learn S/N? prompt, this

screen will appear. The device's serial number can

be automatically learned by faulting the device at

least twice (two consecutive transmissions must be

received by the panel). The keypad will beep twice

after the first transmission, and three times after the

second.

If the serial number is printed on the wireless device,

it may be entered manually rather than learned. The

loop number you want to use for this zone must also

be entered.

10 PROG AS RF:2

A000-5372:2 A summary screen will appear if the serial number

was successfully learned. Press * to continue.

ZN ZT P RC IN:L

10 03 1 3 1 RF:2 A summary screen for the zone will appear showing

the zone number, zone type (ZT), partition

assignment (P), report code (RC), and input device

type (IN:L). Press * to continue. The "Enter Zone

No". prompt will appear again.

– 113 –

Programming Alpha Descriptors

General Information

• If using a 5137AD or 6139 alpha keypad in the system, you can program a

user friendly English language description/location for all protection zones,

relays, keypad panics, polling loop short, and RF receiver supervision

troubles.

• Each description can be composed of a combination of words (up to a

maximum of 3) that are selected from a vocabulary of 244 words stored in

memory, and any word can have an "s" or " 's " added to it.

• In addition, up to 20 installer-defined words can be added to those already in

memory. Thus, when an alarm or trouble occurs in a zone, an appropriate

description for the location of that zone will be displayed at the keypad.

• A custom installer's message can be programmed for each partition which will

be displayed when the system is "Ready" (ex. THE PETERSON's).

1. To program alpha descriptors, enter Programming mode, then press #93 to

display "ZONE PROG?"

2. Press 0 (NO) twice to display "ALPHA PROG?".

3. Press 1 to enter ALPHA PROGRAMMING mode.

There are 6 sub-menu selections that will be displayed one at a time.

Press 1 to select the mode desired.

Press 0 to display the next mode available. The alpha menu selections are:

ZONE DESCRIP.? for entering zone descriptors.

DEFAULT SCREEN? for creating custom message; displayed when

system ready.

CUSTOM WORD? for creating custom words for use in

descriptors.

PART DESCRIP? for creating 4-character partition names.

RELAY DESCRIP? for creating descriptors for relays.

EXIT EDIT MODE? Press 1 to exit back to #93 Menu Mode.

4. Refer to the sections that follow for procedures for adding alpha descriptors.

Zone Descriptors

1. Select ZONE DESCRIPTOR mode.

The keypad keys perform the following functions:

[3] Scrolls both alphabet and actual words in ascending alphabetical order.

[1] Scrolls both alphabet and actual words in descending alphabetical order.

[2] Adds or removes an "s" or " 's " to a vocabulary word.

[6] Switches between alphabet and actual word list; used to accept entries.

[8] Saves the zone description in the system's memory.

[#] # plus zone number displays the description for that zone.

2. Enter the zone number to which you want to assign a descriptor.

Ex.. Key *01 to begin entering the description for zone 1, (key *02 for zone 2,

*03 for zone 3 etc.). The following will be displayed: * ZN 01 A

Note that the first letter of the alphabet appears after the zone number, and

that the zone number is automatically included with the description.

3. Enter the descriptor for that zone.

Use one of two methods as follows:

(assume, for example that the desired description for zone 1 is BACK DOOR)

– 114 –

a) Press [#] followed by the 3 digit number of the first word from the fixed

dictionary shown later in this section (e.g., [0][1][3] for BACK).

Press [6] in order to accept the word and proceed, or press [8] to store

the complete descriptor and exit, or...

b) Select the first letter of the desired description (note that "A" is already

displayed). Use the [3] key to advance through the alphabet and the [1]

key to go backward.

Press the [3] key repeatedly until "B" appears (press [1] to go backwards

if you happen to pass it), then press key [6] to display the first available

word beginning with B.

Press the [3] key repeatedly to advance through the available words until

the word BACK is displayed.

To add an "s" or " 's," if you need to, press the [2] key. The first depression adds

an "s," the second depression adds an " 's, " the third depression displays no

character (to erase the character), the fourth depression adds an "s," etc.

4. Accept the word.

To accept the word, press the [6] key, which switches back to alphabet list for

the next word, or press [8] to store the complete descriptor and exit.

5. Select the next word.

For selection of the next word (DOOR), repeat step 3a (word #057) or 3b, but

selecting the word "DOOR".

To accept the word, press the [6] key, which again switches back to alphabet

list.

6. Store the descriptor.

When all desired words have been entered, press key [8] to store the

description in memory.

7. To review the zone descriptors, key [#] plus zone number (e.g., #01).

To edit zone descriptors, key [*] plus zone number (e.g., *01)

8. Exit zone description mode: enter 00.

Custom Words

• Up to 20 installer-defined words can be added to the built-in vocabulary. Each

of the 20 "words" can actually consist of several words, but bear in mind that a

maximum of 10 characters can be used for each word string.

1. Select CUSTOM WORD mode. The keys perform the following functions:

[3] Advances through alphabet in ascending order.

[1] Advances through alphabet in descending order.

[6] Selects desired letter; moves the cursor 1 space right.

[4] Moves the cursor one space to the left.

[7] Inserts a space at the cursor location, erasing any character at that

location.

[8] Saves the new word in the system's memory.

[*] Returns to description entry mode.

2. Enter the custom word number 01-20 you want to create.

For example, if you are creating the first word (or word string), enter 01; when

creating the second word, enter 02, and so on. A cursor will now appear at

the beginning of the second line.

3. Type the word using one of two methods as follows:

a) Press the [#] key, followed by the two digit entry for the first letter you

would like to display (e.g., [6][5] for "A"),

– 115 –

When the desired character appears, press the [6] key to select it. The

cursor will then move to the right, in position for the next character. Press

[#] plus the two digit entry for the next letter of the word.

OR...

b) Use the [3] key to advance through the list of symbols, numbers, and

letters. Use the [1] key to move back through the list.

When you have reached the desired character, press the [6] key to select

it. The cursor will then move to the right, in position for the next

character.

5. Repeat step 3 to create the desired custom word (or words).

Use the [4] key to move the cursor to the left if necessary,

Use the [7] key to enter a blank (or to erase an existing character).

Each word or word string cannot exceed 10 characters.

6. Save the word by pressing the [8] key.

This will return you to the CUSTOM WORD? display. The custom word (or

string of words) will be automatically added to the built-in vocabulary at the

end of the group of words beginning with the same letter.

Custom words are retrieved as word numbers 250 to 269 for words 1 to 20

respectively, when using method 3a to enter alpha descriptors.

When using method 3b to enter alpha descriptors, each word will be found at

the end of the group of words that begin with the same letter as it does.

7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to create up to 19 additional custom words (or word

strings).

8. Exit Custom Word Mode by entering 00 at the custom word prompt.

Partition Descriptors

1. Select "Part DESCRIPT." mode. The system will ask for the partition number

desired. Enter the number as a single key entry 1-8.

2. Follow the same procedure as for CUSTOM WORDS, except that partition

descriptors are limited to four (4) characters (ex. WHSE for warehouse).

Relay Descriptors

The descriptor for each relay is limited to a maximum of ten (10) characters. The

keys perform the same functions as in the CUSTOM WORD entry.

1. Select "RELAY DESCRIPT." mode. The system will ask for the relay number

desired. Enter the number as a double key entry 01-16. A cursor will now

appear at the beginning of the second line.

2. Type the word using the following method:

Use the [3] key to advance through the list of symbols, numbers, and letters.

Use the [1] key to move back through the list.

When you have reached the desired character, press the [6] key to select

it. The cursor will then move to the right, in position for the next character.

3. Repeat step 2 to create the desired word (or words).

4. Save the word by pressing the [8] key.

This will return you to the RELAY DESCRIPT ? display.

5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for each relay.

6. Exit Relay Descriptor Mode by entering 00 at the RELAY DESCRIPT ?

prompt.

NOTE: Relay descriptors will appear on an alpha keypad when turning a relay on

or off using the Code + # 70 Relay Menu mode.

– 116 –

Custom Message Display (Installer's Message)

Normally, when the system is in the disarmed state, the following display is

present on the keypad.

****DISARMED****

READY TO ARM

Part or all of the above message can be modified to create a custom installer

message for each partition. For example, ****DISARMED**** on the first line or

READY TO ARM on the second line could be replaced by the installation

company name or phone number for service. Note that there are only 16

character spaces on each of the two lines. To create a custom display message,

proceed as follows:

1. Select DEFAULT SCREEN mode. The keypad will ask for the partition

number for this message. Enter the partition number. Press [*] to accept

entry.

The following will appear:

****DISARMED****

READY TO ARM

A cursor will be present at the extreme left of the first line (over the first

"star"). The [6] key is used to move the cursor to the right and the [4] key to

move the cursor to the left. Key [7] may be used to insert spaces or erase

existing characters.

2. Create the message.

For example, to replace READY TO ARM with the message SERVICE: 424-

0177, proceed as follows:

Press the [6] key to move the cursor to the right, and continue until the cursor

is positioned over the first location on the second line.

Press the [3] key to advance through the alphabet to the first desired

character (in this case, "S"). Use the [1] key to go backward, when

necessary. When the desired character is reached, press [6].

The cursor will then move to the next position, ready for entry of the next

character (in this example, "E"). When the cursor reaches a position over an

existing character, pressing the [3] or [1] key will advance or back up from

that character in the alphabet.

Proceed in this manner until all characters in the message have been

entered.

3. Save the message.

Store the new display message in memory by pressing the [8] key.

4. The system will ask for a new partition number.

Enter 0 to quit or 1-8 for a new partition number.

– 117 –

ALPHA DESCRIPTOR VOCABULARY

(For Entering Alpha Descriptors. To select a word, press [#] followed by the word's 3-digit number.)

NOTE: This vocabulary is not to be used for relay voice descriptors. See the RELAY VOICE

DESCRIPTORS section when programming relay voice descriptors.

""" !"#$%&'()*+,

! ""# $%&

! ""' $($&)

""# $%&'()

""* $%%)+

"", $-./01

! ""* $&+$

! "", $-$&.)+/.

""2 $34

! ""0 $..%1

"5" $/67'

"55 $/87%7$3+

! "#' 2$23

! "#4 2$15

! "#6 2$&

"5, .$39

! "#* 2$7+)+/.

! "#, 2$.8&99)

! "#: 2+;

! "#0 2+;&99)

":" .)%%

! "'# 2(9<+&

! "'' 29%(+&

":# .'44'-

":* .'8

":, .3)$;

! "'* 2=%(;%/>

":< ./39)3

":2 &$.79)4

! "'0 1$((

"#" &$-)3$

"#5 &$3

"#: &$0)

"## &$01

"#* &&4(

"#, &)7%79=

"#> &)%%$3

! "4, 1+/.&$(

"#2 &73&/74

"#? &%7@

! "6" 1(97+;

"*5 &'79

"*: &'%6

"*# &'$43''-

"** &'%%)&47'9

"*, &'-./047'9

! "6* 19)-=.+&

"*< &'94$&4

! "6: ;$=>8.+&7

"*? 6)%$+)6

! "?" ;+/

",5 6)0;

! "?' ;+.+1.9&

! "?4 ;%/%/>

",* 670&37-79$4'3

",, 670@%$+

",> 6'&;

! "?, ;99&

",2 6'3-)3

! "?0 ;9</

! "*" ;9</7.$%&7

">5 63$A)3

! "*' ;&%@+<$3

"># 63/=

! "*6 ;=1.

! "*? +$7.

">> )%)&437&

">< )-)3=)9&+

">2 )943+

! "*0 +A=%-)+/.

"<" )8)&/47()

! ",# +B%.

"<: )84)37'3

! ",4 C$1.9&3

"<* B$7%/3)

"<, B$-7%+

! ",* C$.8+&7

! ",, C+/1+

"<2 B7%)

! ",0 C%&+

! ":" C(99&

"25 B%'A

"2: B'7%

! ":4 C93+&

"2* B3))C)3

! ":? C&9/.

"2> B/3

"2< B/39$&)

"22 =$%%)3+

! ":0 >$&$>+

! "0" >$7

"?5 =$4)

! "0' >($77

"?# =/)04

"?* =/9

! "0? 8$((

! "0* 8+$.

"?< 17=1

"?2 1'%6/@

"?? 1'/0)

5"" 79B3$3)6

! #"# %/7%;+

5": 794)37'3

5"# 7943/07'9

5"* D)A)%3+

! #"? 5%.18+/

! #"* ($=/;&3

! #", (+C.

5"2 %)()%

! #"0 (%2&$&3

! ##" (%>8.

555 %79)

55: %7E/'3

! ##4 (%@%/>

! ##6 (9$;%/>

55, %'&;

55> %''@

55< %'A

! ##: (9<+&

! ##0 )$18%/+

5:" -$=9)47&

5:5 -$760

5:: -$79

! #'4 )$7.+&

5:* -$4

! #'? )+;%1$(

5:> -)67&79)

5:< -7&3'A$()

5:2 -'9)+

5:? -'974'3

! #4" )9.8+&7

! #4# )9.%9/

5#: -'4'3

5## -/6

! #46 /9&.8

5#, 9/30)3+

! #4* 9CC%1+

5#< '7%

! #4: 9-+/

5#? '@)979=

! #6" 9=.7%;+

5*5 '()3B%'A

5*: '()31)$6

5*# @$79479=

! #66 -$/%1

5*, @$007()

! #6* -$.%9

5*< @)37-)4)3

! #6: -89/+

5*? @1'4'

5," @'794

5,5 @'%7&)

5,: @''%

! #?4 -9<+&

5,* E/$6

5,, 3$67'

! #?* &+$&

5,< 3)&3)$47'9

5,2 3)B37=

5,? 3)B37=)3$47'9

5>" 3B

! #*# &%>8.

! #*' &99)

5># 3''B

5>* 0$B)

5>, 0&3))9

5>> 0)90'3

! #*, 7+&@%1+

! #*: 78+;

5>? 01'&;

! #," 789-

5<5 01'34

5<: 01'A

! #,4 7%;+

5<* 0;+%7=14

5<, 0%7679=

! #,* 7)95+

5<< 0'97&

! #,: 79/7

! #,0 79=.8

52" 0@379;%)3

525 04$-@

! #:' 7.$.%9/

52# 04)3)'

52* 04'3)

! #:? 7.9&$>+

52> 04'3+

52< 043)00

522 0437;)

52? 0/-@

5?" 0/@)3(70)6

5?5 0/@)3(707'9

5?: 0A7--79=

5?# 0A74&1

5?* 4$-@)3

5?, 4$@)

5?> 4)%&'

5?< 4)%)@1'9)

5?2 4)%%)3

! #00 .+)-+&$.=&+

:"" 41)3-'04$4

! '"# .99(

:": 43$90-744)3

:"# 43$@

:"* /%43$

! '"? =-

! '"* =--+&

! '", =-7.$%&7

! '": =.%(%.3

:"? ($%()

:5" ($/%4

:55 (7.3$47'9

:5: ('%4$=)

:5# A$%%

:5* A$3)1'/0)

:5, A$01

! '#* <+7.

! '#, <%/;9<

:52 A79)

! '#0 <%/>

::" A73)%)00

::5 A'3;

::: 8-744)3

::# +$36

::* C'9)!!F9GHI

! ''? D9/+

::> "

::< 5

::2 504

::? :

:#" :96

:#5 #

:#: #36

:## *

:#* *41

:#, ,

:#> ,41

:#< >

:#2 >41

:#? <

:*" <41

:*5 2

:*: 241

:*# ?

:** ?41

:," &JKLGM!AGNO!5

!!LG!!

:>? &JKLGM!AGNO!:"

CHARACTER (ASCII) CHART

FBGN!$OOPQR!&JKLGM!AGNOKI

#: FKSTUVI

## W

#* X

#, Y

#> Z

#< [

#2 \

#? ]

*" F

*5 I

*: ^

*# _

** `

*, a

*> H

*< b

*2 "

*? 5

," :

,5 #

,: *

,# ,

,* >

,, <

,> 2

,< ?

,2 c

,? d

>" e

>5 f

>: g

># h

>* i

>, $

>> .

>< &

>2 6

>? )

<" B

<5 =

<: 1

<# 7

<* D

<, ;

<> %

<< -

<2 9

<? '

2" @

25 E

2: 3

2# 0

2* 4

2, /

2> (

2< A

22 8

2? +

?" C

*Notes: This factory-provided vocabulary of words is subject to change.

Bulleted words in bold face type are those that are also available for use by the 4285 VIP module. If

using a VIP module, and words other than these are selected for alpha descriptors, the voice module will

not provide annunciation of those words.

– 118 –

Device Programming

This menu is used to program keypads, receivers and relay modules.

From Data Field Programming mode, press #93 to display "ZONE PROG?".

Press 0 repeatedly to display "DEVICE PROG?".

DEVICE PROG?

1=YES 0=NO Press 1 to enter DEVICE PROGRAMMING mode.

DEVICE ADDRESS

01-31, 00=QUIT The device address identifies the device to the

control. Enter the 2-digit device address number to

match the device's physical address setting (01-30).

Press * to accept entry.

Note: Device Address 04 must be used for the 4285

Voice Module, if one is utilized. If not, it can be used

for another device type.

DEVICE TYPE Select the type of addressable device as follows:

00 = device not used

01 = alpha keypad (5137AD/6139)

02 = fixed word keypad (4137AD/6137/6128)

03 = RF receiver (4281/5881)

04 = output relay module (4204)

05 = voice (VIP) module (4285)

Press * to accept entry.

CONSOLE PART. If device type 01 or 02 was selected, this prompt will

appear. Enter the addressable device's default

partition number (01 to maximum number of

partitions programmed for system in field 2*00). This

is the primary partition for which the device is

intended to be used. Enter "9" to make this keypad a

"Master" keypad for the system. Press * to accept

entry.

RF EXPANDER

HOUSE ID XX If device type 03 is selected, this prompt will appear.

Enter the 2-digit House ID (00-31). This is required

for 5700 series systems only, or if using a wireless

keypad (5827/5827BD) with a 5800 series system.

MODULE PART. If device type 05, voice (VIP) module, was selected,

enter the partition number 1-8 in which the voice

module is located. Press * to accept entry.

– 119 –

SOUND OPTION Addressable keypads can be individually

programmed to suppress arm/disarm beeps,

entry/exit beeps and chime mode beeps. This helps

prevent unwanted sounds from disturbing users in

other areas of the premises.

Enter a number 00-03 for the keypad sounding

suppression options desired for the keypad as

follows:

00 = no suppression.

01 = suppress arm/disarm & entry/exit beeps.

02 =suppress chime mode beeps only.

03 = suppress arm/disarm, entry/exit and chime

mode beeps.

The screen will display the next device number to be

programmed.

Press 00 + * to exit Menu Mode.

Press *99 to exit program mode.

Enter the [Installer Code] + OFF to cancel the

system's settling delay.

Device Address 00 is always set as an alpha keypad assigned to Partition 1 with

no sounder suppression options.

Relay Voice Descriptors

If using the 4285 VIP Module, voice descriptors can be programmed for each of

the 16 relays/Powerline Carrier devices used in the system. These descriptors

will be announced by the voice module when accessing the relays via the # 70

relay access mode via telephone.

Each voice descriptor can consist of up to 3 words selected from the relay voice

descriptor vocabulary list (found later in this section).

The index numbers from this vocabulary list are to be used for relay voice

descriptors only. For normal system voice annunciation (eg. alarms, troubles,

status), use the highlighted words in the alpha vocabulary list found in the alpha

programming section.

To enter relay voice descriptors, do the following:

1. From data field programming mode, press #93 to display the "ZONE

PROG?" prompt.

2. Press 0 (NO) to each menu option until the "RLY VOICE DESCR?" prompt is

displayed. Follow the instructions below. While in this mode, press * to

advance to next screen. Press # to backup to previous screen.

RLY VOICE DESCR?

0=no 1=yes Press 1 to program voice descriptors for relays.

ENTER RELAY NO.

00=QUIT 01 Enter the 2-digit relay/X-10 module number (01-16) for

the relay desired, or enter 00 to quit relay voice

descriptor programming mode. Press!*H

– 120 –

01 ENTER DESC d1 From the relay voice descriptor vocabulary list, enter

the 3-digit index number for the first word of the relay

descriptor phrase. Press * to accept entry.

01 ENTER DESC d2 From the relay voice descriptor vocabulary list, enter

the 3-digit index number for the second word of the

relay descriptor phrase. If second word is not

desired, press 000. Press!*!to accept entry.

01 ENTER DESC d3 From the relay voice descriptor vocabulary list, enter

the 3-digit index number for the third word of the

relay descriptor phrase. If third word is not desired,

press 000. Press!*!to accept entry.

The ENTER RELAY NO. prompt will appear. Enter the

next relay number to be programmed. When all output

devices have been programmed, enter 00 to quit.

Enter *99 to exit program mode.

Enter the [Installer Code] + OFF to cancel the system's

settling delay.

Relay Voice Descriptors and Custom Word Substitutes Vocabulary

Word Index

Air..................... 116

Alarm................ 255

And ................... 067

Apartment......... 117

Appliances ....... 161

Area.................. 118

Attic .................. 119

Baby ................. 120

Back ................. 121

Bar ................... 122

Basement ......... 021

Bathroom.......... 051

Battery .............. 053

Bed ................... 092

Bedroom .......... 015

Blower .............. 123

Boiler ................ 124

Bright................ 162

Building ............ 125

Burglary............ 039

Call ................... 009

Central.............. 089

Chime ............... 054

Closed .............. 126

Computer ......... 127

Console ............ 066

Word Index

Daughter's ........ 208

Den ................... 052

Detector ............ 128

Device .............. 060

Dim ................... 163

Dining ............... 031

Door ................. 016

Down ................ 008

Downstairs........ 184

Driveway........... 130

Duct .................. 131

East .................. 132

Eight ................. 077

Eighth ............... 221

Equipment ........ 133

Exit ................... 004

Factory ............. 134

Father's ............ 211

Fence ............... 135

Fifth................... 218

Fire ................... 040

First ................. 136

Five ................... 074

Floor ................. 029

Four .................. 073

Fourth ............... 217

Foyer ................ 137

Front ................. 087

Word Index

Garage............. 023

Gas .................. 138

Glass ............... 139

Hall................... 050

Heat ................. 010

Inside ............... 209

Kitchen............. 022

Laundry............ 140

Left ................... 027

Library.............. 141

Light ................. 019

Living ............... 030

Loading ............ 142

Lower ............... 094

Machine ........... 143

Master.............. 144

Medical ............ 014

Mother's ........... 212

Motion.............. 145

Nine ................. 078

Ninth ................ 222

No .................... 165

North ................ 146

Not ................... 012

Word Index

Off .................... 011

Office................ 147

On .................... 058

One .................. 070

Open ................ 148

Outside............. 210

Panic ................ 013

Partition ............ 090

Patio ................. 149

Phone............... 061

Power............... 063

Pump................ 166

Rear ................ 088

Right................. 028

Room ............... 018

's ...................... 007

Second ............. 056

Service ............. 150

Seven............... 076

Seventh ............ 220

Shed................. 151

Shop................. 152

Side.................. 153

Six .................... 075

Sixth ................. 219

Smoke.............. 024

Son's ................ 223

Word Index

South................ 155

Stairs ................ 006

Station .............. 156

Storage............. 157

Sun ................... 154

System ............. 062

Temperature..... 158

Third ................. 159

Three................ 072

Tool .................. 213

Two .................. 071

Up ..................... 025

Upper................ 187

Upstairs ............ 183

Utility................. 185

West ................. 215

Window ............ 017

Wing ................. 216

Zero .................. 069

Zone ................. 002

—

121 —

Custom Word Substitutes for VIP Module Annunciation

A substitute word can be programmed for each of the 20 custom words used in

your alpha zone descriptions. This substitute word will be announced by the VIP

module in place of the custom word that is displayed on the alpha keypad. For

example, an alarm display of "John's Bedroom" could be announced as "Son's

Bedroom," since there is no annunciation for the custom word "John." Note that

if a substitute word is not assigned, the VIP module will not annunciate the zone

descriptor at all, but will only annunciate the zone number.

To enter custom words substitutes, do the following:

1. From data field programming mode, press #93 to display the "ZONE

PROG?" prompt.

2. Press 0 (NO) to each menu option until the "CUSTOM INDEX ?" prompt is

displayed.

CUSTOM INDEX ?

0=no 1=yes Enter 1 at this prompt.

CUSTOM WORD NO.

00=QUIT Enter the custom word number (01--20) for which a

voice substitute is desired. Enter 00 to quit this

programming mode. Press * to accept entry.

01 ENTER INDEX # Enter the 3-digit substitute word index number from

the relay voice descriptor and custom word

substitutes vocabulary list found in the Relay Voice

Descriptors section. Press * to accept entry.

The "CUSTOM WORD NO." prompt will be

displayed. Enter the next custom word number to be

substituted or enter 00 to quit.

– 122 –

Section 20: SCHEDULING OPTIONS

This section provides the following information:

• Main features of scheduling

• Time Window Definitions

• Open/Close Schedule Definitions

• Programming in the #80 Scheduling menu mode

• Programming:

Time Windows

Open/Close Schedules

Holiday Schedules

Time Driven Events

Access Schedules

Introduction To Scheduling

This section describes the scheduling features provided with this control panel.

UL1. You must program bypass and auto-arm fail reports (fields 2*13 & 2*14)

for UL installations.

.2. Auto-disarming is not for use in UL installations.

General • The scheduling features of this control allow certain operations

to be automated, such as auto-arming, auto-disarming, auto-

bypassing and un-bypassing of zones, and activating relay

outputs (using powerline carrier devices or 4204 modules).

• The system uses time windows for defining open/close

schedules, holiday schedules and user defined temporary

schedules. Scheduled events are programmed by user-friendly

menu modes of programming (#80, #81 & #83 modes),

explained in detail in this section. These menus take you step

by step through the options.

Auto Arming • The system can automatically arm (AWAY mode) itself at the

end of a pre-determined closing (arming) time window, if the

system has not been armed manually. Auto arming can be

delayed three ways: by use of the auto arm delay, the auto arm

warning, or by manually extending the closing (arming) time

window with a keypad command. The system can also

automatically bypass any open zones when auto arming.

Auto-Arm Delay • Auto-arm delay provides a delay (grace period) before auto

arming. It starts at the end of the closing window. The delay is

set in 4 minute increments, up to 56 minutes in partition-specific

program field 2*05. The expiration of this delay causes the

auto-arm warning to start.

Auto-Arm • The auto-arm warning causes the keypad sounder to warn

Warning the user of an impending auto-arm. The warning can be set to

start 01 to 15 minutes prior to arming in partition-specific

program field 2*06. During this period the keypad will beep

every 15 seconds and display "AUTO ARM ALERT" ("AA" on

non-alpha keypads). The beeps may be silenced by hitting any

key on a keypad. When the remaining time drops below 60

seconds, the keypads will begin to beep every 5 seconds. The

panel will arm at the conclusion of the auto-arm warning period.

– 123–

Extend Closing • A user can manually extend the arm (closing) time window

Window by 1 or 2 hours. This is done by entering a keypad command

(security code + #82), which then prompts the user to enter the

desired extension time of 1 or 2 hours (refer to the SYSTEM

OPERATION section of the Installation Instructions). This

feature is useful if a user must stay on the premises later than

usual.

Force Arm • The Enable Force Arm option causes the panel to attempt to

bypass any faulted zones prior to auto-arming (panel will

perform a force-arm). This option is set in partition-specific

program field 2*08.

Auto Disarming • The system can automatically disarm at the end of a pre-

determined time window, if the system has not been disarmed

manually. The disarming time can be delayed by using the auto

disarm delay feature. In addition, the system can restrict

disarming to a pre-determined time.

Disarm Delay • Auto-disarm delay provides a delay before Auto disarming. This

delay is added to the end of the disarm window. The delay is set

in 4 minute increments, up to 56 minutes, in partition-specific

program field 2*07.

Restrict • This option, set in partition-specific field 2*10, allows

Disarming disarming by operator level users only during the disarm time

window, the arming window (in case user needs to reenter

premises after arming), or when the system is in alarm.

Exception Reports • This option allows a means of reporting openings and closings

by exception (sent only if event occurs outside of the

predetermined opening/closing time windows).

• The system sends early opening/closing reports if done earlier

than the corresponding window

• The system sends late opening/closing reports if done later than

the corresponding window

• The system sends missed open/close reports if no

opening/closing occurs by the end of the corresponding window.

Time Driven • By using time windows, the system can automatically

Events activate and de-activate relays and/or power line carrier

(X-10) devices at pre-detemined times to turn lights or other

devices on and off.:

• The system can perform the same actions on a daily basis, or

can be made to perform an action only once (i.e., turn on the

porch light this Wednesday at 8:00pm).

• The system also provides up to 20 "timers" available to the end

user for the purpose of activating output devices at preset times

and on preset days.

Limitation of • A user's access can be limited to a certain time period, during

Access By Time which he can perform system functions. Outside this time, that

user's code will be inactive. The system provides up to 8 Access

Schedules, each consisting of two Time Windows (one for

opening, one for closing) for each day of the week and two time

windows for holidays. The access schedules are programmed

via #80 Menu Mode, and enabled for a given user when that

user is added to the system. If a user tries to operate the

system outside of the schedule, the alpha keypad will display

"Access Denied."

– 124 –

Time Windows Definitions

Time Windows •Scheduled events are based on time windows, which are simply

periods of time during which an event may take place. Time

windows are defined by a start time and stop time. The system

supports up to 20 Time Windows. The windows are shared by

the 8 partitions, and the windows are used for open/close

schedules as well as for time driven event control.

Example • To understand time windows and scheduling, take for example

a store that has the following hours:

Monday to Thursday: 9am to 6pm

Friday 9am to 9pm

Saturday 10am to 4pm

Sunday Closed

Holidays Closed

Assume the owner desires the following time windows to allow

time for employees to arm or disarm the system:

Monday to Thursday: Open (disarm) 8am to 9am

Close (arm) 6pm to 6:30pm

Friday Open (disarm) 8am to 9am

Close (arm) 9pm to 9:30pm

Saturday Open (disarm) 9am to 10am

Close (arm) 4pm to 4:30pm

Sunday & Holidays Closed

• To provide these schedules, the following five time windows

need to be programmed:

Window Start Stop Purpose

1 8am 9am Monday-Friday open window

2 9am 10am Saturday open window

3 4pm 4:30pm Saturday close window

4 6pm 6:30pm Monday-Thurs. close window

5 9pm 9:30pm Friday close window

• Using the #80 Menu Mode (described in a later section), the

installer can program open/close schedules by assigning each

time window to a day of the week (windows are entered as 2-

digit entries):

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Hol

Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl

01/04 01/04 01/04 01/04 01/05 02/03 00/00 00/00

Note: 00 is entered for those days on which the store is closed.

When programmed, employees can arm and disarm the system

within the open and close time windows respectively without

causing a report to be sent to the central station (reporting by

exception). At the end of these windows, the system can be

programmed to automatically arm/disarm if an employee fails to

arm/disarm manually (auto arm/auto disarm).

Time driven events can be activated at different times using a

window as follows:

• At the beginning of a time window

• At the end of a time window

• During a time window active period only (on at beginning of

window, off at end)

• At both the beginning and end of the time window (Ex: to sound

a buzzer at the beginning and end of a coffee break)

– 125–

Open/Close Schedule Definitions

General • The Open/Close scheduling is controlled by one of three

individual schedules. Each schedule consists of one time

window for openings and one time window for closings. There

are three types of schedules available: Daily, Holiday, and

Temporary.

Daily schedule • Each partition can have one daily schedule consisting of one

opening window and one closing window per day.

Holiday schedule • A holiday schedule will override the regular daily schedule on

selected holidays throughout the year.

Temporary • The temporary schedule provides a method for the end user

schedule to override the daily and holiday schedules. It consists of one

opening window and one closing window for each day of the

week. The schedule automatically takes effect for up to one

week, after which it is deactivated. This schedule is

programmed using the #81 Temporary Schedule Menu Mode.

Refer to that section for procedures.

Additional • Additional opening and closing schedules can be programmed

Schedules using the time-driven event programming options. For

example, a schedule for normal store opening/closing can be

programmed with open/close schedules, and another

open/close schedule for beginning and ending lunch hour can

be programmed using the time driven event schedule

programming. Refer to the Time Driven Events paragraph later

in this section for detailed information.

Open/Close • The system can help reduce communication traffic to the

Reports by central station by using the exception reporting feature, set

Exception in partition-specific program field 2*09. The Open/Close by

exception option suppresses these reports from being sent to

central station if an arm or disarm is done within the expected

time window. Reports are only sent if the open/close occurs

outside the assigned time window. The system keeps a record

of all openings/closings in its event log.

• In the event an opening occurs immediately following a closing

during the closing window (a person who arms the system

forgets something and has to reenter), the opening report

(although outside of the opening window) will not be sent. (as

long as the reentering occurs within the closing window);

otherwise a report will be sent). This feature is designed to

prevent false alarms to central station.

• The following diagram gives an example of how the open/close

by exception reporting works.

Example of Open/Close Exception Reporting & Scheduling

6:01PM 5:59AM 6AM 9AM 9:01AM 3:59PM 4PM 6PM 6:01PM 5:59AM

"Early opening" reports Opening Window Auto-disarm delay begins . Closing Window Auto-arm delay begins

will be sent if system No reports sent Auto-disarm occurs after delay. No reports sent Auto-arm warning begins.

is disarmed before if system disarmed (if auto-disarm is enabled) if system armed* Auto-arm occurs after

opening window begins. during this time during this time warning expires.

window. "Missed opening" reports will window. (if auto arm is enabled)

be sent if user disarming has not * or disarmed if

occurred at expiration of user reenters "Missed closing" reports

opening window. premises. will be sent if user

arming has not

"Late opening" reports will be occurred at expiration

sent if disarm occurs after of closing window.

the opening window expires "Late closing" reports

"Early closing" reports will be will be sent if system

sent if user arming occurs is armed after the

before the closing window closing window

begins. expires.

– 126 –

Programming with #80 Scheduling Menu Mode

The #80 Scheduling Menu Mode is used to program most of the scheduling and

timed event options.

To enter this mode, the system must first be in normal operating mode. Enter

[Installer Code] + # + 80.

The following can be programmed while in this mode:

• Define time windows

• Assign open/close schedules to each partition

• Assign holiday schedules

• Program time-driven events (for system functions and relay activation)

• Assign access control schedules

Some scheduling features are programmed in data field programming mode

(installer code +800). The general programming mode scheduling fields are listed

below.

System Wide Fields: 1*74 -1*75 Relay timeout values

2*01-2*02 Daylight savings time options

2*11 Allow Disarming outside window if alarm

occurs

2*13 -2*14 Scheduling related report codes

Partition specific fields: 1*76 Access control relay for this partition

2*05 Auto-arm delay value

2*06 Auto-arm warning time

2*07 Auto-disarm delay value

2*08 Force arm enable

2*09 Open/close reporting by exception

2*10 Restrict disarm only during windows

Event driven relay activation options are programmed using the #93 Menu Mode,

Relay Programming. These actions are in response to a programmed action.

However, relay activation can also be time driven, and thus be used to initiate a

desired action. Time driven relay activation options are programmed using the

#80 Scheduling Menu Mode. Refer to the Time Driven Event Programming

section for procedures.

Steps To Programming Scheduling Options

To use #80 Scheduling Menu Mode, do the following:

Using the worksheets:

Define time windows (up to 20)

Define the daily open/close schedules (one schedule per day, per partition)

Define the holidays to be used by the system (up to 16)

Define the holiday schedules (up to 8, one per partition)

Define temporary schedules

Define limitation of access times (up to 8 schedules)

Define the time driven events (up to 20)

Using #80 Scheduling Menu Mode:

Program the time windows

Program the open/close schedules

Program the time driven events

Program the access schedules

– 127 –

Basic Scheduling Menu Structure

To program schedules, enter Scheduling program mode:

[Installer Code] + # + 80.

There are 5 sets of scheduling menus as shown below. Entering "1" at a

displayed main menu prompt will select that menu set. Prompts for programming

that scheduling feature will then appear. Enter "0" to skip a menu screen and

display the next menu option.

Time Window ?

1 Yes 0 = No 0 Upon entering Schedule Menu Mode, this prompt will

appear. Enter 1 to program time windows. Refer to the

Programming Time Windows section for detailed

procedures. Enter 0 to move to the Open/Close

Schedules prompt.

O/C Schedules ?

1 Yes 0 = No 0 Enter 1 to program opening and closing schedules.

Refer to the Programming Open/Close Schedules

section for detailed procedures. Enter 0 to move to the

Holidays prompt.

Holidays ?

1 Yes 0 = No 0 Enter 1 to program holiday schedules. Refer to the

Holiday Programming section for detailed procedures.

Enter 0 to move to the Timed Events prompt.

Timed Events ?

1 Yes 0 = No 0 Enter 1 to program timed events for relay outputs, power

line carrier devices, additional schedules or other system

functions. Refer to the Programming Timed Events

section for detailed procedures. Enter 0 to move to the

Access Schedule prompt.

Access Sched. ?

1 Yes 0 = No 0 Enter 1 to program access schedules. Refer to the

Programming Access Schedules section for detailed

procedures. Enter 0 to move to the "Quit?" prompt.

Quit ?

1 Yes 0 = No 0 Enter 1 to quit #80 Scheduling Menu Mode and return to

normal operating mode. Enter 0 to make any changes or

review the scheduling programming options. If 0 is

pressed, the TIME WINDOW menus are displayed.

– 128 –

Time Windows Definitions Worksheet

The system provides 20 time windows that are defined with start and stop times.

These windows are used for various open/close and access schedules, as well

as for output controls, and are the basis of the scheduling system. These

windows are shared among all 8 partitions. The following worksheets will help

you define time windows and scheduling aspects of this system before

programming the time window definitions for this installation. Note that time

windows can span midnight.

Time Window Start Time Stop Time

Number (HH:MM) (HH:MM)

(Keep this worksheet handy, as you will be asked for a given time window

number later in this section)

Time windows are defined by a start and a stop time using the Time Windows

programming menu.

– 129 –

Programming Time Windows

Enter Scheduling Mode by entering the installer code + # + 80. The keypad will

display the Time Window programming prompt.

Time Window ?

1 Yes 0 = No 0 Enter 1 at this main menu prompt to program time

windows.

Time Window # ?

01-20, 00 = Quit 01 Enter the 2-digit time window number to be programmed.

Press * to accept the entry.

Enter 00 then * at the "TIME WINDOW #" prompt to quit

Time Window programming and display the Quit ?

prompt.

Enter 0 at the Quit ? prompt to

return to the main menu choices

and continue programming. Enter

1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.

Quit ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

01 TIME WINDOW

00:00AM 00:00AM If a time window number was entered, the cursor will be

positioned on the tens of hours digit of the start of

window entry. Enter the desired start of window hour and

press *. The cursor moves to the minutes. Enter the

desired minutes and press *. Toggle the AM/PM

indication by pressing any key 0-9 while the cursor is

under the letter A/P position. Repeat for the end of

window time entry .

When the entry is completed, the "TIME WINDOW #"

prompt is displayed again. Enter the next time window

number to be programmed and repeat the procedure.

When all time windows have been programmed, enter 00 at the TIME WINDOW

# prompt to quit Time Window menus.

Since the time windows are shared among all partitions, it is important to make

sure that changing a time window does not adversely affect desired actions in

other partitions.

Daily Open/Close Worksheet

Write in the open & close time window numbers for each partition.

Part Monday Tuesday WednesdayThursday Friday Saturday Sunday Holiday

Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl

– 130 –

Programming Open/Close Schedules

Each partition can be assigned one daily open/close schedule, plus a holiday

open/close schedule. Temporary schedules are programmed separately, using

the #81 Temporary Schedule Menu Mode. To program additional open/close

schedules, see the Time Driven Events section.

After entering Scheduling Menu Mode, press 0 until the O/C Schedules prompt

appears.

O/C Schedules ?

1 Yes 0 = No 0 Enter 1 to program opening and closing schedules.

Partition # ?

01-08, 00 = Quit 01 Enter the appropriate partition number to which the

following open/close schedules will apply.

Enter 00 then * at the "PARTITION #" prompt to quit O/C

Schedules programming and display the Quit ? prompt.

Enter 0 at the Quit ? prompt to

return to the main menu choices

and continue programming. Enter

1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.

Quit ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Mon P1 OP WIND.?

00:00 00:00 00 For each day in which an opening or closing schedule is

desired, beginning with Monday, enter a time window

number (01-20) for the displayed day's opening

schedule. Enter 00 if no schedule is desired for a

particular day. As the number is keyed in, the actual time

that has been stored for that window will be displayed as

a programming aid. Press the * key to accept the entry.

Mon P1 CL WIND.?

00:00 00:00 00 Enter the time window number for the displayed day's

closing schedule. As the number is keyed in, the actual

time that has been stored for the window will be

displayed. Press the * key to accept the entry.

Tue P1 OP WIND.?

00:00 00:00 00 The keypad will now prompt for Tuesday's open/close

schedule, etc. Follow the procedure for Mondays

prompts. When the last day of the week has been

programmed, the holiday opening and closing window

prompts are displayed.

Hol P1 OP WIND.?

00:00 00:00 00 Enter the holiday opening time window number. Press

the * key to accept the entry.

Hol P1 CL WIND.?

00:00 00:00 00 Enter the holiday closing time window number. Press the

* key to accept the entry.

When the entries are completed, the PARTITION #

prompt is displayed again. Repeat this procedure for

each partition in the system.

When all partitions have been programmed, enter 00 at the PARTITION # prompt

to quit open/close schedules.

– 131 –

Holiday Definitions & Schedule Worksheet

The system provides up to 16 holidays that can be assigned for the system. Each

holiday can be assigned to any combination of partitions. List the desired

holidays on the following worksheet. Check the partitions for which these

holidays apply.

Hol. Partition

Mon/Day 1 2345678

8 /

10 /

11 /

12 /

13 /

14 /

15 /

16 /

Programming Holiday Schedules

Up to 16 holidays can be defined for the system. After entering Scheduling Menu

Mode, press 0 until the Holidays ? prompt appears.

Holidays ?

1 Yes 0 = No 0 Enter 1 to program holiday schedules.

HOLIDAY NUMBER ?

01-16, 00=Quit 01 Enter the 2-digit holiday number to be programmed and

press * to accept entry.

Enter 00 then * at the Holiday Number prompt to quit the

Holiday menus and display the Quit ? prompt.

Enter 0 at the Quit ? prompt to

return to the main menu choices

and continue programming. Enter

1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.

Quit ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

01 ENTER DATE

00/00 The cursor will be positioned on the tens of months digit.

Enter the appropriate month, then press * to proceed to

the day field. Enter the appropriate day for the holiday

and press * to accept the entry.

Part ? 12345678

Hit 0-8 x x Holidays can be set for any partition as follows. Press 0

to turn all partitions on or off, or else use keys 1-8 to

toggle the letter x under the partition to which this holiday

will apply. Press the * key when all desired partitions

have been assigned.

The Holiday Number prompt will be displayed again.

Repeat the procedure for each holiday to be

programmed.

When all holidays have been programmed, enter 00 at the HOLIDAY NUMBER

prompt to quit the holiday menus.

– 132 –

Time-Driven Event Worksheet

These are the schedules used to activate outputs, bypass zones, etc. based on a

time schedule. There are 20 of these events that may be programmed for the

system, with each event governed by the previously defined time windows.

The actions that can be programmed to automatically activate at set times are

relay commands, arm/disarm and zone bypassing commands, and open/close

access conditions.

To fill out the worksheet:

1) First enter the schedule number (01-20) and time window number (01-

20), and note the day of the week the action is desired.

2) Enter the code for the desired action and action specifier. The action

codes are the events that are to take place when the scheduled time is

reached. Each action also requires an action specifier, which defines what

the action will affect (relay, relay group, partition, zone list, user group). The

action specifier varies, depending on the type of action selected.

The following is a list of the "Action" codes (desired actions) used when

programming time driven events. Note that these codes are independent of

the "relay codes" programmed during the #93 Menu Mode–Relay

Programming mode.

Relay commands

Action Code Action Specifier

01 Relay On Relay #

02 Relay Off Relay #

03 Relay Pulse Relay #

04 Relay Pulse XX minutes (set in field 1*74) Relay #

05 Relay Pulse YY seconds (set in field 1*75) Relay #

06 Relay Group On Relay Group #

07 Relay Group Off Relay Group #

08 Relay Group Pulse Relay Group #

09 Relay Group Pulse XX minutes (set in field 1*74) Relay Group #

10 Relay Group Pulse YY seconds (set in field 1*75) Relay Group #

Arm/Disarm commands

Activation times 1 (Beginning), 2 (End), 3 (During) are the only valid choices

for automatic arming and disarming functions.

"During" can be used to arm or disarm the control for specific time only. For

example, if "during" is selected with arm-stay, the system will arm-stay at the

beginning of the window and disarm at the end of the window.

Action Code Action Specifier

20 Arm-Stay Partition(s)

21 Arm Away Partition(s)

22 Disarm Partition(s)

23 Force Arm Stay (Auto-bypass faulted zns) Partition(s)

24 Force Arm Away (Auto-bypass faulted zns) Partition(s)

The auto-arm warning and auto-arm/disarm delay times (fields 2*05 - 2*07)

apply.

Bypass commands

Activation times 1 (Beginning), 2 (End), 3 (During) are the only valid choices

for bypass commands. If 3 (During) is selected for auto-bypassing, the

system will bypass the zone(s) specified on a particular Zone List at the

beginning of the window and unbypass the zone(s) at the end of the window.

If it is selected for auto unbypassing, the system will remove the bypass of

the zone(s) at the beginning of the window and will restore the bypass of the

zone(s) at the end of the window.

– 133 –

Action Code Action Specifier

30 Auto bypass - Zone list Zone list #

31 Auto unbypass - Zone list Zone list #

Open/Close Windows

Activation time 3 (During) is the only valid choice for these commands.

Action Code Action Specifier

40 Enable Opening Window by partition Partition(s)

41 Enable Closing Window by partition Partition(s)

42 Enable Access Window for Access group Access Group

3) Enter the desired Activation time, which refers to when the action is to take

place relative to the time window. Select from:

Activation

Time Description

1 Beginning of time window

2 End of time window

3 During time window active period only (On at beginning of

window, off at end). This can be used in conjunction with the

arm, disarm or bypass commands to control a part of the

system during the window. For example, if bypass is selected

to activate during the window, the zones in the zone list will be

bypassed at the beginning of the window and unbypassed at

the end of the window.

4 Beginning and end of time window (ex. -Coffee break buzzer).

In this example, if relay pulse was selected, the relay would

pulse for 2 seconds at the beginning of the window, signaling

the beginning of the coffee break. At the end of the window it

would pulse again, signaling the end of coffee break.

Time Driven Events Worksheet

Sched. Time Day(s) Action Action Activation

Num. Window M T W T F S S H Desired Specifier Time

– 134 –

Time-Driven Event Programming

The following schedules can be used to activate outputs, bypass zones,

arm/disarm the system, etc. based on a time schedule. Up to 20 events can be

programmed for the system. Time windows must first be defined in order to be

used to trigger events.

If using Time Driven Events to control relays and/or Powerline Carrier

devices, the following menu items must first be programmed using #93

Menu Mode - Relay Programming:

• Enter Relay No. (reference identification number)

• Relay Group (if applicable)

• Restriction

• Relay Type (4204 or X-10)

• House code and Unit code if X-10 devices

• ECP address and specific Relay No. if 4204 relays

After entering Scheduling Menu Mode, press 0 until the Timed Events ? prompt

appears.

Timed Events ?

1 Yes 0 = No 0 Enter 1 to program timed events using relay outputs or

X-10 devices.

TIMED EVENT # ?

01-20, 00=Quit 01 Enter the timed event number to be programmed (01-20)

and press the * key. The system will then prompt the

user to enter the desired action to be taken.

Enter 00 at the TIMED EVENT prompt to quit the timed

event menus and display the Quit ? prompt.

Enter 0 at the Quit ? prompt to

return to the main menu choices

and continue programming. Enter

1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.

Quit ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

01 ACTION ?

none 00 Enter the action code for the desired action for this event

number from the list at the left. This could be an output

command, an arming command, or any other time-driven

event. Press * to accept the entry and display the

appropriate action specifier prompt as follows on the

next page.

Action Codes:

01=relay on

02=Relay Off

03=Relay Pulse

04=Relay Pulse XX minutes

05=Relay Pulse YY seconds

Actions 01-05

Enter the relay number and press

T to accept entry. The Time

Window ? prompt appears.

01 RELAY # ?

06=Relay Group On

07=Relay Group Off

08=Relay Group Pulse

09=Relay Group Pulse XX minutes

10=Relay Group Pulse YY seconds

Actions 06-10

Enter the relay group number and

press * to accept entry. The

Time Window ? prompt appears.

01 RELAY GRP # ?

20=Arm-Stay

21=Arm Away

22=Disarm

23=Force Arm Stay

24=Force Arm Away

40=Enable Open Window by part

41=Enable Close Window by part

Actions 21-24 and 40-41

Enter the partition to which the

action applies. Enter 0 to select

all partitions. Enter a partition

number again to deselect it. Press

* to accept entry. The Time

Window ? prompt appears.

PART? 12345678

HIT 0-8 X X

– 135 –

30=Auto bypass - Zone list

31=Auto unbypass - Zone list Actions 30-31

Enter the zone list number which

contains the zones to be

bypassed or unbypassed. Press *

to accept entry. The Time Window

? prompt appears.

01 ZONE LIST ?

ENTER 1-8 1

42=Enable Access Window for Access

group(s)

Action 42

Enter the group number to which

the time window will apply. Press *

to accept entry. The Time Window

? prompt appears.

GROUP ? 12345678

HIT 0-8 X

01 Time Window ?

00:00 00:00 01 Enter the time window number (01-20) for which this

timed event is to occur. As the number is keyed in, the

actual time that has been stored for the window will be

displayed. Press the * to continue.

01 Active time ?

0 Enter the activation code number from 1-4 (listed below).

As the number is keyed in, the activation time will be

displayed. The choices are:

1: Trigger at the start of the window

2: Trigger at the end of the window

3: Take effect only for the duration of the window

4: Trigger at both the start and the end of the window.

Example - coffee break buzzer.

Press the * key when the desired choice is showing.

Days ? MTWTFSSH

Hit 0-8 x x The system will then ask for which days the event is

to be activated. Press 0 to toggle all days on or off or

else press keys 1-8 to toggle the letter x under the

day on or off (Monday = 1, Holiday = H = 8 ).

When all entries have been made, the TIMED

EVENT # prompt is displayed again. Repeat the

procedure for each timed event required by the

installation.

When all timed events have been programmed, enter 00 at the TIMED EVENT

prompt to quit this set of menus.

– 136 –

Limitation of Access by Time Worksheet

Limitation of Access is a means by which a user's access code is limited to

working during a certain period of time.. The system provides 8 Access

Schedules, each of which consists of two time windows for each day of the week

and two time windows for holidays (typically one for an opening time window and

the second for a closing time window). If an Access Schedule has been

programmed, a user required to follow that schedule would be assigned to an

Access Group of the same number (1-8) when that user is added to the system.

If no limitations apply, enter 0.

Enter the appropriate time window numbers for each partition.

Acc Monday Tuesday Wed. Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Holiday

Sch W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2

Access Control Schedules

To program Access Schedules, do the following:

Enter Scheduling Menu Mode [Installer Code] + # 80. After entering Scheduling

Menu Mode, press 0 until the Access Sched. ? prompt appears.

Access Sched. ?

1 Yes 0 = No 0 Enter 1 to program access schedules.

ACCESS SCHED # ?

01-08, 00 = Quit 01 Enter the access control schedule number between 01

and 08. Press * to accept entry.

Enter 00 at the Access Sched # prompt to quit the

Access control menus and display the Quit ? prompt.

Enter 0 at the Quit ? prompt to

return to the main menu choices

and continue programming. Enter

1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.

Quit ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

MON A1 Window 1?

00:00 00:00 00 Enter the first time window number from 01-20 for which

this access schedule applies for the displayed day. As

the number is keyed in, the actual time that has been

stored for the window will be displayed. Press * to

continue.

MON A1 Window 2 ?

00:00 00:00 00 Enter the second time window number from 01-20 for

which this access schedule applies for the displayed

day. As the number is keyed in, the actual time that has

been stored for the window will be displayed. Press * to

continue.

TUE A1 Window 1?

00:00 00:00 00 Repeat the procedure for the other days of the week.

When the last day of the week has been programmed,

the holiday opening and closing windows may be

entered.

– 137 –

Hol A1 Window 1 ?

00:00 00:00 00 Enter the first time window number for holidays for which

this access schedule applies. As the number is keyed in,

the actual time that has been stored for the window will

be displayed. Press * to continue.

Hol A1 Window 2 ?

00:00 00:00 00 Enter the second time window number for holidays for

which this access schedule applies. As the number is

keyed in, the actual time that has been stored for the

window will be displayed. Press * to continue.

When all access control schedules have been programmed, enter 00 at the

Access Sched # prompt to quit this set of menus.

#81 Temporary Schedule Menu Mode

Each partition can be assigned a Temporary Schedule which will override the

regular open/close schedule (and the holiday schedule). This schedule takes

effect as soon as it is programmed and remains active for up to one week.

Partition/Windows Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun

1Disarm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

Arm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

2 Disarm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

Arm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

3 Disarm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

Arm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

4 Disarm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

Arm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

5 Disarm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

Arm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

6 Disarm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

Arm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

7 Disarm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

– 138 –

Arm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

8 Disarm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

Arm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

Programming Temporary Schedules

Enter [Seecurity Code] + # + 81 to enter this mode. Note that only users with

authority level of manager or higher can program temporary schedules.

Temporary schedules only affect the partition from which it is entered.

Temporary schedules can also be reused at later dates simply by scrolling (by

pressing #) to the DAYS? prompt (described below) and activating the

appropriate days. This should be considered when defining daily time windows.

Mon DISARM WIND.

00:00AM 00:00AM This prompt asks for the start and end time of disarm

(opening) window. Upon entry of this mode, the

cursor will be positioned on the tens of hours digit of

the start time for Monday's disarm window. Enter the

desired hour. Press * to move to the minutes field.

The minutes are entered in the same manner. The

AM/PM indication is toggled by hitting any key in the

0-9 range while the cursor is under the letter A/P

position. Repeat for the stop time entry. Press the *

key to move to the arming window for Monday.

Press # if no changes are desired.

Mon ARM WINDOW

00:00AM 00:00AM This prompt asks for the start and end time of arm

(closing) window. The cursor will be positioned on

the tens of hours digit of the start time for the arm

window. Enter the desired hour. Press * to move to

the minutes field. The minutes are entered in the

same manner. The AM/PM indication is toggled by

hitting any key in the 0-9 range while the cursor is

under the letter A/P position. Repeat for the stop

time entry.

After the windows for that day have been completed,

the system will prompt for disarm and arm time

windows for the next day.

Press # if no changes are desired.

Tue DISARM WIND.

00:00AM 00:00AM Repeat the procedure described above for all days

of the week.

When all of the days have been completed, the

system will ask which days are to be activated.

– 139 –

Days ? MTWTFSS

Hit 0-7 x x This is the prompt that actually activates the

temporary schedule, and allows the temporary

schedule to be customized to a particular week's

needs. To select the days which are to be activated,

enter 1-7 (Monday = 1). An "X" will appear under

that day, indicating the schedule for that day is

active. Entering a day's number again will deactivate

that day. Pressing 0 will toggle all days on/off.

The temporary schedule will only be in effect for the

days which have the letter x underneath them. As

the week progresses, the selected days are reset to

the inactive state.

When completed, press * or # to exit the temporary

schedule entry mode.

#83 User Scheduling Menu Mode

The system provides up to 20 "timers" which will be available to the end user for

the purpose of controlling output devices (4204 relays or Powerline Carrier

devices (e.g., X-10). These timers are analogous to the individual appliance

timers that might be purchased at a department store. The output devices

themselves are programmed into the system by the installer during #93 Menu

Mode–Relay Programming. The end user needs only to know the output device

number and its alpha descriptor.

The installer may set certain relays to be "restricted" during # 93 Menu Mode-Relay

Programming. These relays may not be controlled by the end user (prevents end-

user from controlling doors, pumps, etc.)

To enter this mode, the user enters [Security Code] + # + 83.

Output Timer # ?

01-20, 00=Quit 01 Enter the output timer number to be programmed (01-20).

Press * to accept entry and move to the next prompt.

Enter 00 to quit and return to normal mode.

06 07:00P 11:45P

PORCH LITE 04 If that timer number has already been programmed, a

summary screen will appear. In this example:

06 = Timer #

04 = Output Device # affected by this timer

PORCH LITE = Descriptor for Output Device # 4

07:00PM = Start Time

11:45PM = Stop Time

Press * to continue.

06 ENTER OUTPUT#

PORCH LITE 04 Enter the desired output number (01-16)

As the number is entered, the descriptor changes to

indicate which output device is being affected.

Note: 00 entered as the output # deletes the timer (Timer

06 in this example) and displays an output descriptor of

"None". Devices are programmed via #93 Menu Mode.

06 ON TIME ?

07:00 PM Enter the ON time in 00:01 - 11:59 format.

When the display shows the desired time, press the *

key to move to the AM/PM field. In this field, any of the

keys 0-9 may be used to toggle the AM/PM indication.

Enter 00:00 to skip.

Note: May use two commands to perform an ON one

day and an OFF another day

– 140 –

06 OFF TIME ?

11:45 PM Enter the OFF time in 00:01 - 11:59 format.

When the display shows the desired time, press the *

key to move to the AM/PM field. In this field, any of the

keys 0-9 may be used to toggle the AM/PM indication.

Enter 00:00 to skip.

06 Days? MTWTFSS

Hit 0-7 x x To select the days which are to be activated, enter 1-7

(Monday = 1). An "X" will appear under that day,

indicating the output for that day is active. Entering a

day's number again will deactivate that day. Pressing 0

will toggle all days on/off.

The outputs will only be in effect for the days which have

the letter x underneath them. As the week progresses,

the selected days are reset to the inactive state, unless

the permanent option is selected (next screen prompt).

When completed, press * to continue.

06 Permanent ?

0 = NO,1 = YES 0 Selecting "Permanent" means that this schedule will be

in effect on a continuous basis. An answer of 0 means

means that this schedule will be in effect for one week

only. The letter "x" under the day will then be cleared.

Press * to accept entry. The system will quit User

Scheduling mode and return to normal mode.

– 141 –

Section 21: SYSTEM COMMUNICATION

This section provides the following information:

• The process of a successful transmission

• An explanation of reporting formats for this system

• Loading communication defaults

• Contact ID report codes

A Successful Transmission

When a control panel calls the central station receiver, it waits to hear a

“handshake” frequency from the receiver to confirm that the receiver is on-line

and ready to receive its message. Once the panel hears the handshake it is

programmed to listen for, it sends its message. The panel then waits for a

“kissoff” frequency from the receiver acknowledging that the message was

received and understood.

If the handshake frequency is not given or is not understood by the panel, the

panel will not send its message. Once the handshake frequency is received and

understood by the panel, the panel will send its message. If there is an error in

the transmission (the receiver does not receive a “valid” message), the kissoff

frequency will not be given by the central station receiver.

The panel will make a total of eight attempts to the primary telephone number

and eight attempts to the secondary telephone number (if programmed) to get a

valid message through. If the panel is not successful after its numerous

attempts, the keypad will display “Communication Failure” (Alpha keypad) or

“FC” (Fixed-word keypad).

Reporting Formats

The following chart defines the three sets of (handshake/kissoff) frequencies that

the panel supports and the different formats that can be sent for each.

FORMAT HANDSHAKE TRANSMITS DATA KISSOFF TRANSMIT TIME

Low Speed 1400Hz 1900Hz (10PPS) 1400Hz Under 15 secs.

3+1 (Standard report)

4+1

4+2

Sescoa/Rad 2300Hz 1800Hz (20PPS) 2300Hz Under 10 secs.

3+1 (Standard report)

4+1

4+2

Express 1400–2300Hz DTMF (10 cps) 1400Hz Under 3 secs.

4+2

High Speed 1400–2300Hz DTMF (10 cps) 1400Hz Under 5 secs.

Contact ID 1400–2300Hz DTMF (10 cps) 1400Hz Under 3 secs.

ADVISORY: Ademco's Contact ID reporting is capable of uniquely reporting all

86 zones of information, as well as openings and closings for all 75 users, to

central stations equipped with the Ademco 685 receiver using software level 4.4

or higher. Must be level 4.6 or higher to fully support all new VISTA 50 report

codes. 685 software levels below 4.4 cannot support Contact ID reporting. For

information regarding updating the 685 receiver, contact the Technical Support

group at 1-800-645-7492 (NY) or 1-800-458-9469 (CA).

– 142 –

The following describes each format in greater detail.

3+1 and 4+1 Standard Formats Comprised of a 3- (or 4-) digit subscriber number and a single digit

report code (e.g. Alarm, Trouble, Restore, Open, Close, etc).

3+1 and 4+1 Expanded Formats Comprised of a 3- (or 4-) digit subscriber number, and a two-digit re-

port code. The first digit is displayed on the first line, followed by a

second line where the first digit is repeated 3 (or 4) times and

followed by the second digit. This is the “expanded” digit.

4+2 Format Comprised of a 4-digit subscriber number and 2-digit report code.

Ademco Contact ID Comprised of a 4-digit subscriber number, 1-digit event qualifier

Reporting Format ("new" or "restore"), 3-digit event code, 2-digit Partition No., and 3-

digit zone number, user number, or system status number.

Ademco High Speed Comprised of 13 digits as follows: A 4-digit account number + eight

channels of zone information (1-8 or duress plus 9-15) + one status

channel, which identifies the type of events being reported in the

eight zone locations.

Report 3+1/4+1 3+1/4+1 4+2

Standard Expanded Low Spd or

Express

Alarm SSS(S) A SSS(S) A SSSS AZ

AAA(A) Z

Trouble SSS(S) T SSS(S) T SSSS Tt

TTT(T) t

Bypass SSS(S) B SSS(S) B SSSS Bb

BBB(B) b

AC Loss SSS(S) E SSS(S) E SSSS EAC

EEE(E) AC

Low Batt SSS(S) L SSS(S) L SSSS LLB

LLL(L) LB

Open SSS(S) O SSS(S) O SSSS OU

OOO(O) U

Close SSS(S) C SSS(S) C SSSS CU

CCC(C) U

Test SSS(S) G SSS(S) G SSSS Gg

GGG(G)g

Restore SSS(S) R SSS(S) R SSSS RZ

Alarm RRR(R) Z

AC Restore SSS(S) RASSS(S) RASSSSRA Ac

RARARA(RA)A c

LoBat Res. SSS(S) RLSSS(S) RL SSSS RLLB

RLRLRL(RL)L B

Trouble Res. SSS(S) RTSSS(S) RT SSSS RTt

RTRTRT (R T)t

Bypass Res. SSS(S) RBSSS(S) RBSSSS RBb

RBRBRB (RB)b

Where:

SSS or SSSS = Subscriber ID C = Close Code-1st Digit

A = Alarm Code-1st digit U = User Number (1st & 2nd digits)

Z = Typically Zone Number*-2nd digit Gg = Test Code (1st & 2nd digits)

Tt = Trouble Code (1st & 2nd digits) R = Restore Code (Alarm)1st & 2nd digits

Bb = Bypass Code (1st & 2nd digits) R Tt = Restore Code (Trbl)1st & 2nd digits

EAC = AC Loss Code (1st & 2nd digits) R Bb = Restore Code (Byps)1st & 2nd digits

LLB = Low Battery Code(1st & 2nd digits) R AAC = Restore Code (AC)1st & 2nd digits

O = Open Code-1st Digit R LLB = Restore Code (Bat)1st & 2nd digits

*Zone numbers for: [*] + [#], or [B] = 99; [3] + [#], or [C] = 96;

[1] + [*], or [A] = 95;Duress = 92

– 143 –

Ademco Contact ID Reporting takes the following format:

CCCC QEEE GG ZZZ

where: CCCC = Customer (subscriber) ID

Q = Event qualifier, where:

E = new event , and R = restore

EEE = Event code (3 hexadecimal digits)

GG = Partition Number (system messages show “00”)

ZZZ = Zone/contact ID number reporting the alarm, or user

number for open/close reports. System status messages

(AC Loss, Walk Test, etc.) contain zeroes in the ZZZ

location.

Ademco High Speed Reporting events by channel:

Channels 1 through 8 could have one of the following conditions:

1 = NEW EVENT

2 = OPENING (Status Channel Always = 2)*

3 = RESTORE

4 = CLOSING (Status Channel Always = 4)*

5 = NORMAL, NO EVENT TO REPORT

6 = PREVIOUSLY REPORTED, NOT YET RESTORED

* NOTE: Channel 1 will contain the user ID 1-9, A-F if Open/Close reporting is

enabled.

The status channel might have one of the following conditions:

1 = DURESS (For Duress Plus Channels 9-15 Only)

2 = OPENING

3 = BYPASS (For Channels 1-8 Only)

4 = CLOSING

5 = SUPERVISORY/TROUBLE (For Channels 1-8 Only)

6 = SYSTEM STATUS:

• AC LOSS in Channel 1

• LOW BATTERY in Channel 2

• TIME SET in Channel 3

• LOG CLEAR in Channel 3

• LOG 50% FULL in Channel 3

• LOG 90% FULL in Channel 3

• LOG OVERFLOW in Channel 3

• POWER ON RESET in Channel 4

• WALK TEST START, END in Channel 8

7 = NORMAL ALARM STATUS (Channels 1-8 Only)

9 = TEST REPORT

A typical high speed report may look as follows:

1234 5115 5555 7 (Acct #1234 with alarms on channels 2 and 3)

LIMITATIONS

1. When using Ademco high speed, remember there are only 15 channels

available, plus a duress channel. If more than 15 zones are being used, they

will have to share channels.

2. With Ademco High Speed reporting, channels 9-15 cannot report troubles or

bypasses. Use these channels for zones that will not report these conditions.

3. Only user numbers 1-15 can be uniquely reported with open/close reports in

Ademco High Speed.

– 144 –

Loading Communication Defaults

To help expedite the installation, the system provides 4 different communication

defaults (Low Speed, Ademco Express, Ademco High Speed & Ademco's

Contact ID). These defaults automatically program industry-standard code

assignments for zones, keypad panics, non-alarm and supervisory conditions,

and can be loaded at any time without affecting non-communication program

fields.

You may load communications defaults at any time. However, it is

recommended that the panel be defaulted first (*97) only if no other

programming has been done. If other programming has already been done,

there is no need to default the panel.

To load communication defaults, do the following:

Enter program mode [Installer Code] + 8 0 0. Once the Programming mode is

entered, first press *94 and then enter one of the following field numbers:

TABLE OF DEFAULT PROGRAMMING COMMANDS

PRESS TO LOAD THIS DEFAULT PROGRAM SET

*80 Low Speed communication defaults

*81 Ademco 4 + 2 Express communication defaults

*82 Ademco High Speed communication defaults

*83 Contact ID communication defaults

.$2(+E9CE19/.$1.E%;E+@+/.E19;+7

1FGH ;HIJKJLJFK

55" BPNV!$jTNM

5:5 6JNVKK

5:: 0PjVQL!@TQPU

5:# $JOPkjV!@TQPU

5#5 @VNPMVLVN!.JNRjTNl

5#: 7QLVNPGN!.JNRjTNl

5## :*!1GJN!.JNRjTNl!FmGQV!LlSV!55`!Pn!KJSSGNLVOI

5#* )QLNlb)oPL!.JNRjTNl

5#, 6Tlb9PRpL!.JNRjTNl

5," :*!1GJN!$JoPjPTNl

#"5 $&!%GKK

#": %Gq!0lKLVM!.TLLVNl

#", 0lKLVM!3VKVL

#"> @NGRNTM!4TMSVN

#"? .TLLVNl!4VKL!BTPj

##: @Gjj!%GGS!0pGNLa4NGJkjV

### 3B!3VUVPrVN!BTPjJNVa4NGJkjV

#<# BPNV!%GGS!4NGJkjV

#<* )oPL!)NNGN!kl!CGQV

#2" 4NGJkjV!FRjGkTjI

#25 %GKK!Gn!0JSVNrPKPGQ!a!3B

#2: %GKK!Gn!3@-!0JSVNrPKPGQ

#2# 3@-!0VQKGN!4TMSVN

#2* 3B!4NTQKMPLLVN!%Gq!.TLLVNl

1FGH ;HIJKJLJFK

*"5 'b&!.l!/KVN

*"# @GqVNa/S!$NMVO

*"> &TQUVj!kl!/KVN

*"< 3VMGLV!$NMb6PKTNM!F6GqQjGTOI

*"2 EJPUs!$NM

*"? ;VlKqPLUp!'b&

*55 &Tjj!kTUs!3VtJVKLVO

**5 $NMVO!04$+

*,5 )TNjl!GSVQbUjGKV

*,: jTLV!GSVQbUjGKV

*,# BTPj!LG!GSVQ

*,* BTPj!LG!UjGKV

*,, $JLGaTNM!nTPj

*,< )oPL!)NNGN!kl!/KVN

*,? 3VUVQL!&jGKV

,<" .lSTKK

>": @VNPGOPU!4VKL

>"< ATjs!4VKL!-GOV

>:5 )rVQL!%GR!3VKVL

>:: )rVQL!%GR!,"[!BJjj

>:# )rVQL!%GR!?"[!BJjj

>:* )rVQL!%GR!'rVNnjGq

>:, 4PMVb6TLV!3VKVL

>:> 4PMVbOTLV!PQTUUJNTLV

>#5 )oUVSLPGQ!KUpVOJjV!UpTQRV

>#: $UUVKK!KUpVOJjV!UpTQRV

– 145 –

COMMUNICATION PROGRAMMING GUIDE

Field # Low Speed Contact ID High Speed Express

*46, *48 Choose transmission No effect No effect No effect

speed and frequency

*52, *53 Send as either 4+2 No effect No effect No effect

or expanded

*79, *80 Enables alarm restores Enables alarm restores Enables alarm restores Enables alarm restores

*49 Add checksum digit No effect Add checksum digit No effect

*81, *82 Define codes and 1st digit enables report 1st digit enables report Define codes and

selects 4+1 or 4+2 if it is non-zero if it is non-zero selects 4+1 or 4+2

*54, *56, *59, Defines alarm event Enables reports Assigns reporting chnl Defines alarm event

*61, *64, *66, code for all reports from this code

*69, *71, *74, zone. Enables alarm

*76 reporting

*55, *57, *60 Defines code and No effect No effect Defines code and

*62, *65, *67, selects 4+1 or 4+2 selects 4+1 or 4+2

*70, *72, *75, *77

*58, *63, *68, Enables report and Enables report Enables report Enables report and

*73, *78 selects code. Note: Note: Alarm channel selects 1st digit of. the

No restores if must be programmed. 2-digit event code.

event not sent. (01-15) NOTE: No restores

if event not sent.

*50 Sescoa/Radionics; No effect No effect No effect

Selects fixed digit time

instead of fixed interdigit.

NOTES Note: Low Speed will

not send 3+2

messages. Zone ID

digit is suppressed.

Loading communication defaults results in the following:

Low Speed

(*94*80) • Selects low speed, standard format, with no checksum, for both phone

numbers.

• Assigns the following report codes:

03 for zones 2-47

01 for zones 1 & 48-55 (fire zones)

02 for zones 62,63 (panic trans), & 95, 96, 99 (keypad panics)

09 for all alarm restores

• Enables all zone type restores.

For 4+2 reporting, enter 2nd digits in the "ID" fields of each report code. For

"expanded" reporting, enable fields *52 and *53.

ADEMCO Express

(*94*81) • Selects Ademco express reporting format, with checksum, for both phone

numbers.

• Report codes for zones 1-86, RF receiver, and keypad panics are sent as their

respective zone ID numbers (01-86, 88-91, 95-99), Duress is sent as "DD".

Alarm restore is "E" + 2nd digit.

• Enables all zone type restores.

ADEMCO High Speed

(*94*82) • Selects Ademco High Speed format, with no checksum, for both phone

numbers.

• Reporting is assigned to the following channels:

Channel 1 for zones 1 & 48-55 (Fire zones)

Channel 2 for zones 2-8

Channel 3 for zones 9-16

Channel 4 for zones 17-31

Channel 5 for zones 32-47 (RF interior zones)

Channel 6 for zones 56-61 & 87

Channel 9 for zones 62 & 63 (panic transmitter)

Channel 7 for second RF receiver (88 & 89) & polling loop short (97)

Channel 8 for first RF receiver (90 & 91)

Channels 10, 11 & 12 for keypad panics 95, 96 & 99 respectively

• Enables all zone type restores.

• Enables Duress to be sent.

ADEMCO's Contact ID

(*94*83) • Selects Contact ID format for both phone numbers.

• Reporting is enabled for all zones.

• Enables all zone type restores.

• Refer to the SYSTEM COMMUNICATION section for event code definitions.

– 146 –

COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for LOW SPEED FORMAT (*94*80)

*45 PRIMARY FORMAT 0 Ademco Low Speed

*46 LOW SPEED FORMAT (Primary) 0 Ademco Low

Speed

*47 SECONDARY FORMAT 0 Ademco Low Speed

*48 LOW SPEED FORMAT (Sec.) 0 Ademco Low Speed

*49 CHECKSUM VERIFICATION 0 0

No checksum Primary Secondary

*50 SESCOA/RADIONICS SELECT 0 Radionics

*51 DUAL REPORTING 0 no

*52 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR PRIMARY

0 0 0 0 0 0 standard

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

*53 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR SECONDARY

0 0 0 0 0 0 standard

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

ALARM REPORT CODE & ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 1-32 & SUPERVISORY & RESTORE CODES

*54 CODE *55 ID *56 CODE *57 ID *58

1 0|1 0|0 9 0|3 0|0 0|9 Alarm Rst.

2 0|3 0|0 10 0|3 0|0 0|0 Trouble

3 0|3 0|0 11 0|3 0|0 0|0 Trble Rst.

4 0|3 0|0 12 0|3 0|0 0|0 Bypass

5 0|3 0|0 13 0|3 0|0 0|0 Bypss Rst.

6 0|3 0|0 14 0|3 0|0

7 0|3 0|0 15 0|3 0|0

8 0|3 0|0 16 0|3 0|0

*59 CODE *60 ID *61 CODE *62 ID *63

17 0|3 0|0 25 0|3 0|0 0|9 Alarm Rst.

18 0|3 0|0 26 0|3 0|0 0|0 Trouble

19 0|3 0|0 27 0|3 0|0 0|0 Trble Rst.

20 0|3 0|0 28 0|3 0|0 0|0 Bypass

21 0|3 0|0 29 0|3 0|0 0|0 Bypss Rst.

22 0|3 0|0 30 0|3 0|0

23 0|3 0|0 31 0|3 0|0

24 03 0|0 32 0|3 0|0

ALARM REPORT CODE & ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 33-64 & SUPERVISORY & RESTORE CODES

*64 CODE *65 ID *66 CODE *67 ID *68

33 0|5 0|0 41 0|5 0|0 0|9 Alarm Rst.

34 0|5 0|0 42 0|5 0|0 0|0 Trouble

35 0|5 0|0 43 0|5 0|0 0|0 Trble Rst.

36 0|5 0|0 44 0|5 0|0 0|0 Bypass

37 0|5 0|0 45 0|5 0|0 0|0 Bypss Rst.

38 0|5 0|0 46 0|5 0|0

39 0|5 0|0 47 0|5 0|0

40 0|5 0|0 48 0|1 0|0

*69 CODE *70 ID *71 CODE *72 ID *73

49 0|1 0|0 57 0|6 0|0 0|9 Alarm Rst.

50 0|1 0|0 58 0|6 0|0 0|0 Trouble

51 0|1 0|0 59 0|6 0|0 0|0 Trble Rst.

52 0|1 0|0 60 0|6 0|0 0|0 Bypass

53 0|1 0|0 61 0|6 0|0 0|0 Bypss Rst.

54 0|1 0|0 62 0|9 0|0

55 0|1 0|0 63 0|9 0|0

56 0|6 0|0 64 0|6 0|0

ALARM REPORT CODE & ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 81-87, 65-80, RF RCVRs & PANICS, & THEIR SUPV. & RESTORE

CODES

*74 CODE *75 ID *76 CODE *77 ID *78

81 0|3 0|0 89 0|7 0|0 0|9 Alarm Rst.

82 0|3 0|0 90 0|7 0|0 0|0 Trouble

83 0|3 0|0 91 0|7 0|0 0|0 Trble Rst.

84 0|3 0|0 Dures 0|2 0|0 0|0 Bypass

85 0|3 0|0 97 0|7 0|0 0|0 Bypss Rst.

86 0|3 0|0 95 0|2 0|0 (1 + ∗)

87 0|7 0|0 96 0|7 0|0 (3 + #)

1*35 CODE 1*36 ID 1*37 CODE 1*38 ID 1*39

65 0|3 0|0 73 0|3 0|0 0|9 Alarm Rst.

66 0|3 0|0 74 0|3 0|0 0|0 Trouble

67 0|3 0|0 75 0|3 0|0 0|0 Trble Rst.

68 0|3 0|0 76 0|3 0|0 0|0 Bypass

69 0|3 0|0 77 0|3 0|0 0|0 Byps Rst

70 0|3 0|0 78 0|3 0|0

71 0|3 0|0 79 0|3 0|0

72 0|3 0|0 80 0|3 0|0

88 0|7 0|0 99 0|7 0|0 (∗ + #)

NOTES: 97= Poll Loop Short; 88 & 90 = RCVR not receiving

transmitter signals. 89 & 91 = RCVR not responding, bad conn. to

panel.

ZONE TYPE RESTORE ENABLES

*79 ZONE TYPES 1-8 All enabled

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

12345678

*80 ZONE TYPES 9 & 10 1 1

All enabled 910

SYSTEM NON ALARM CODES

*81 First Digit *82 Second Digit

Close 0|0 0|0 Second digit of each

Open 0|0 0|0 code applies only to 4+2

Low Battery 0|0 0|0 or expanded formats

Low Bat Res. 0|0 0|0 (fields *52 & *53)

AC Loss 0|0 0|0

AC Restore 0|0 0|0

Test 0|0 0|0

Power 0|0 0|0

Cancel 0|0 0|0

Prog. Tamper 0|0 0|0

– 147 –

COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for ADEMCO EXPRESS FORMAT (*94*81)

*45 PRIMARY FORMAT 3 Ademco Express

*46 LOW SPEED FORMAT (Primary) 0

*47 SECONDARY FORMAT 3 Ademco Express

*48 LOW SPEED FORMAT (Sec.) 0

*49 CHECKSUM VERIFICATION 0 0

No checksum Primary Secondary

*50 SESCOA/RADIONICS SELECT 0 Radionics

*51 DUAL REPORTING 0 no

*52 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR PRIMARY

0 0 0 0 0 0 standard

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

*53 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR SECONDARY

0 0 0 0 0 0 standard

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

ALARM REPORT CODE & ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 1-32 & SUPERVISORY & RESTORE CODES

*54 CODE *55 ID *56 CODE *57 ID *58

1 1|0 0|1 9 1|0 0|9 1|4 Alarm Rst.

2 1|0 0|2 10 0|1 1|0 0|0 Trouble

3 1|0 0|3 11 0|1 0|1 0|0 Trble Rst.

4 1|0 0|4 12 0|1 0|2 0|0 Bypass

5 1|0 0|5 13 0|1 0|3 0|0 Bypss Rst.

6 1|0 0|6 14 0|1 0|4

7 1|0 0|7 15 0|1 0|5

8 1|0 0|8 16 0|1 0|6

*59 CODE *60 ID *61 CODE *62 ID *63

17 0|1 0|7 25 0|2 0|5 1|4 Alarm Rst.

18 0|1 0|8 26 0|2 0|6 0|0 Trouble

19 0|1 0|9 27 0|2 0|7 0|0 Trble Rst.

20 0|2 1|0 28 0|2 0|8 0|0 Bypass

21 0|2 0|1 29 0|2 0|9 0|0 Bypss Rst.

22 0|2 0|2 30 0|3 1|0

23 0|2 0|3 31 0|3 0|1

24 0|2 0|4 32 0|3 0|2

ALARM REPORT CODE & ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 33-64 & SUPERVISORY & RESTORE CODES

*64 CODE *65 ID *66 CODE *67 ID *68

33 0|3 0|3 41 0|4 0|1 1|4 Alarm Rst.

34 0|3 0|4 42 0|4 0|2 0|0 Trouble

35 0|3 0|5 43 0|4 0|3 0|0 Trble Rst.

36 0|3 0|6 44 0|4 0|4 0|0 Bypass

37 0|3 0|7 45 0|4 0|5 0|0 Bypss Rst.

38 0|3 0|8 46 0|4 0|6

39 0|3 0|9 47 0|4 0|7

40 0|3 1|0 48 0|4 0|8

*69 CODE *70 ID *71 CODE *72 ID *73

49 0|4 0|0 57 0|5 0|0 1|4 Alarm Rst.

50 0|5 0|0 58 0|5 0|0 0|0 Trouble

51 0|5 0|0 59 0|5 0|0 0|0 Trble Rst.

52 0|5 0|0 60 0|6 0|0 0|0 Bypass

53 0|5 0|0 61 0|6 0|0 0|0 Bypss Rst.

54 0|5 0|0 62 0|6 0|0

55 0|5 0|0 63 0|6 0|0

56 0|5 0|0 64 0|6 0|0

ALARM REPORT CODE & ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 81-87, 65-80, RF RCVRs & PANICS, & THEIR SUPV. & RESTORE

CODES

*74 CODE *75 ID *76 CODE *77 ID *78

81 0|8 0|1 89 0|8 0|9 1|4 Alarm Rst.

82 0|8 0|2 90 0|9 1|0 0|0 Trouble

83 0|8 0|3 91 0|9 0|1 0|0 Trble Rst.

84 0|8 0|4 Dures 1|3 1|3 0|0 Bypass

85 0|8 0|5 97 0|9 0|7 0|0 Bypss Rst.

86 0|8 0|6 95 0|9 0|5 (1 + ∗)

87 0|8 0|7 96 0|9 0|6 (3 + #)

1*35 CODE 1*36 ID 1*37 CODE 1*38 ID 1*39

65 0|6 0|5 73 0|7 0|3 1| 4 Alarm Rst.

66 0|6 0|6 74 0|7 0|4 0|0 Trouble

67 0|6 0|7 75 0|7 0|5 0|0 Trble Rst.

68 0|6 0|8 76 0|7 0|6 0|0 Bypass

69 0|6 0|9 77 0|7 0|7 0|0 Byps Rst

70 0|7 1|0 78 0|7 0|8

71 0|7 0|1 79 0|7 0|9

72 0|7 0|2 80 0|8 1|0

88 0|8 0|8 99 0|9 0|9 (∗ + #)

NOTES: 97= Poll Loop Short; 88 & 90 = RCVR not receiving

transmitter signals. 89 & 91 = RCVR not responding, bad conn. to

panel.

ZONE TYPE RESTORE ENABLES

*79 ZONE TYPES 1-8 All enabled

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

12345678

*80 ZONE TYPES 9 & 10 1 1

All enabled 910

SYSTEM NON ALARM CODES

*81 First Digit *82 Second Digit

Close 0|0 0|0 Second digit of each

Open 0|0 0|0 code applies only to 4+2

Low Battery 0|0 0|0 or expanded formats

Low Bat Res. 0|0 0|0 (fields *52 & *53)

AC Loss 0|0 0|0

AC Restore 0|0 0|0

Test 0|0 0|0

Power 0|0 0|0

Cancel 0|0 0|0

Prog. Tamper 0|0 0|0

– 148 –

COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for ADEMCO HIGH SPEED FORMAT (*94*82)

*45 PRIMARY FORMAT 2 Ademco High Speed

*46 LOW SPEED FORMAT (Primary) 0

*47 SECONDARY FORMAT 2 Ademco High Speed

*48 LOW SPEED FORMAT (Sec.) 0

*49 CHECKSUM VERIFICATION 0 0

No checksum Primary Secondary

*50 SESCOA/RADIONICS SELECT 0 Radionics

*51 DUAL REPORTING 0 no

*52 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR PRIMARY

0 0 0 0 0 0 standard

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

*53 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR SECONDARY

0 0 0 0 0 0 standard

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

ALARM REPORT CODE & ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 1-32 & SUPERVISORY & RESTORE CODES

*54 CODE *55 ID *56 CODE *57 ID *58

1 0|1 0|0 9 0|3 0|0 0|1 Alarm Rst.

2 0|2 0|0 10 0|3 0|0 0|0 Trouble

3 0|2 0|0 11 0|3 0|0 0|0 Trble Rst.

4 0|2 0|0 12 0|3 0|0 0|0 Bypass

5 0|2 0|0 13 0|3 0|0 0|0 Bypss Rst.

6 0|2 0|0 14 0|3 0|0

7 0|2 0|0 15 0|3 0|0

8 0|2 0|0 16 0|3 0|0

*59 CODE *60 ID *61 CODE *62 ID *63

17 0|4 0|0 25 0|4 0|0 0|1 Alarm Rst.

18 0|4 0|0 26 0|4 0|0 0|0 Trouble

19 0|4 0|0 27 0|4 0|0 0|0 Trble Rst.

20 0|4 0|0 28 0|4 0|0 0|0 Bypass

21 0|4 0|0 29 0|4 0|0 0|0 Bypss Rst.

22 0|4 0|0 30 0|4 0|0

23 0|4 0|0 31 0|4 0|0

24 0|4 0|0 32 0|5 0|0

ALARM REPORT CODE & ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 33-64 & SUPERVISORY & RESTORE CODES

*64 CODE *65 ID *66 CODE *67 ID *68

33 0|5 0|0 41 0|5 0|0 0|1 Alarm Rst.

34 0|5 0|0 42 0|5 0|0 0|0 Trouble

35 0|5 0|0 43 0|5 0|0 0|0 Trble Rst.

36 0|5 0|0 44 0|5 0|0 0|0 Bypass

37 0|5 0|0 45 0|5 0|0 0|0 Bypss Rst.

38 0|5 0|0 46 0|5 0|0

39 0|5 0|0 47 0|5 0|0

40 0|5 0|0 48 0|1 0|0

*69 CODE *70 ID *71 CODE *72 ID *73

49 0|1 0|0 57 0|6 0|0 0|1 Alarm Rst.

50 0|1 0|0 58 0|6 0|0 0|0 Trouble

51 0|1 0|0 59 0|6 0|0 0|0 Trble Rst.

52 0|1 0|0 60 0|6 0|0 0|0 Bypass

53 0|1 0|0 61 0|6 0|0 0|0 Bypss Rst.

54 0|1 0|0 62 0|9 0|0

55 0|1 0|0 63 0|9 0|0

56 0|6 0|0 64 0|6 0|0

ALARM REPORT CODE & ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 81-87, 65-80, RF RCVRs & PANICS, & THEIR SUPV. & RESTORE

CODES

*74 CODE *75 ID *76 CODE *77 ID *78

81 1|3 0|0 89 0|7 0|0 0|1 Alarm Rst.

82 1|3 0|0 90 0|8 0|0 0|0 Trouble

83 1|3 0|0 91 0|8 0|0 0|0 Trble Rst.

84 1|3 0|0 Dures 0|1 0|0 0|0 Bypass

85 1|3 0|0 97 0|7 0|0 0|0 Bypss Rst.

86 1|3 0|0 95 1|0 0|0 (1 + ∗)

87 0|7 0|0 96 1|1 0|0 (3 + #)

1*35 CODE 1*36 ID 1*37 CODE 1*38 ID 1*39

65 1|4 0|0 73 1|5 0|0 0|1 Alarm Rst.

66 1|4 0|0 74 1|5 0|0 0|0 Trouble

67 1|4 0|0 75 1|5 0|0 0|0 Trble Rst.

68 1|4 0|0 76 1|5 0|0 0|0 Bypass

69 1|4 0|0 77 1|5 0|0 0|0 Byps Rst

70 1|4 0|0 78 1|5 0|0

71 1|4 0|0 79 1|5 0|0

72 1|4 0|0 80 1|5 0|0

88 0|7 0|0 99 1|2 0|0 (∗ + #)

NOTES: 97= Poll Loop Short; 88 & 90 = RCVR not receiving

transmitter signals. 89 & 91 = RCVR not responding, bad conn. to

panel.

ZONE TYPE RESTORE ENABLES

*79 ZONE TYPES 1-8 All enabled

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

12345678

*80 ZONE TYPES 9 & 10 1 1

All enabled 910

SYSTEM NON ALARM CODES

*81 First Digit *82 Second Digit

Close 0|0 0|0 Second digit of each

Open 0|0 0|0 code applies only to 4+2

Low Battery 0|0 0|0 or expanded formats

Low Bat Res. 0|0 0|0 (fields *52 & *53)

AC Loss 0|0 0|0

AC Restore 0|0 0|0

Test 0|0 0|0

Power 0|0 0|0

Cancel 0|0 0|0

Prog. Tamper 0|0 0|0

– 149–

COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for ADEMCO's CONTACT ID FORMAT (*94*83)

*45 PRIMARY FORMAT 1 Ademco Contact ID

*46 LOW SPEED FORMAT (Primary) 0

*47 SECONDARY FORMAT 1 Ademco Contact ID

*48 LOW SPEED FORMAT (Sec.) 0

*49 CHECKSUM VERIFICATION 0 0 No checksum

Primary Secondary

*50 SESCOA/RADIONICS SELECT 0 Radionics

*51 DUAL REPORTING 0 no

*52 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR PRIMARY

0 0 0 0 0 0 standard

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

*53 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR SECONDARY

0 0 0 0 0 0 standard

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

ALARM REPORT CODE & ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 1-32 & SUPERVISORY & RESTORE CODES

*54 CODE *55 ID *56 CODE *57 ID *58

1 0|1 0|0 9 0|9 0|0 0|1 Alarm Rst.

2 0|2 0|0 10 1|0 0|0 0|0 Trouble

3 0|3 0|0 11 1|1 0|0 0|0 Trble Rst.

4 0|4 0|0 12 1|2 0|0 0|0 Bypass

5 0|5 0|0 13 1|3 0|0 0|0 Bypss Rst.

6 0|6 0|0 14 1|4 0|0

7 0|7 0|0 15 1|5 0|0

8 0|8 0|0 16 0|1 0|0

*59 CODE *60 ID *61 CODE *62 ID *63

17 0|2 0|0 25 1|0 0|0 0|1 Alarm Rst.

18 0|3 0|0 26 1|1 0|0 0|0 Trouble

19 0|4 0|0 27 1|2 0|0 0|0 Trble Rst.

20 0|5 0|0 28 1|3 0|0 0|0 Bypass

21 0|6 0|0 29 1|4 0|0 0|0 Bypss Rst.

22 0|7 0|0 30 1|5 0|0

23 0|8 0|0 31 0|1 0|0

24 0|9 0|0 32 0|2 0|0

ALARM REPORT CODE & ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 33-64 & SUPERVISORY & RESTORE CODES

*64 CODE *65 ID *66 CODE *67 ID *68

33 0| 0|0 41 1|1 0|0 0|1 Alarm Rst.

34 0| 0|0 42 1|2 0|0 0|0 Trouble

35 0| 0|0 43 1|3 0|0 0|0 Trble Rst.

36 0| 0|0 44 1|4 0|0 0|0 Bypass

37 0| 0|0 45 1|5 0|0 0|0 Bypss Rst.

38 0| 0|0 46 0|1 0|0

39 0| 0|0 47 0|2 0|0

40 |0 0|0 48 0|3 0|0

*69 CODE *70 ID *71 CODE *72 ID *73

49 0|4 0|0 57 1|2 0|0 0|1 Alarm Rst.

50 0|5 0|0 58 1|3 0|0 0|0 Trouble

51 0|6 0|0 59 1|4 0|0 0|0 Trble Rst.

52 0|7 0|0 60 1|5 0|0 0|0 Bypass

53 0|8 0|0 61 0|1 0|0 0|0 Bypss Rst.

54 0|9 0|0 62 0|2 0|0

55 1|0 0|0 63 0|3 0|0

56 1|1 0|0 64 0|4 0|0

ALARM REPORT CODE & ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 81-87, 65-80, RF RCVRs & PANICS, & THEIR SUPV. & RESTORE

CODES

*74 CODE *75 ID *76 CODE *77 ID *78

81 0|6 0|0 89 1|4 0|0 0|1 Alarm Rst.

82 0|7 0|0 90 1|5 0|0 0|0 Trouble

83 0|8 0|0 91 0|1 0|0 0|0 Trble Rst.

84 0|9 0|0 Dures 0|2 0|0 0|0 Bypass

85 1|0 0|0 97 0|3 0|0 0|0 Bypss Rst.

86 1|1 0|0 95 0|4 0|0 (1 + ∗)

87 1|2 0|0 96 0|5 0|0 (3 + #)

1*35 CODE 1*36 ID 1*37 CODE 1*38 ID 1*39

65 0|5 0|0 73 1|3 0|0 0|1 Alarm Rst.

66 0|6 0|0 74 1|4 0|0 0|0 Trouble

67 0|7 0|0 75 1|5 0|0 0|0 Trble Rst.

68 0|8 0|0 76 0|1 0|0 0|0 Bypass

69 0|9 0|0 77 0|2 0|0 0|0 Byps Rst

70 1|0 0|0 78 0| 3 0|0

71 1|1 0|0 79 0|4 0|0

72 1|2 0|0 80 0|5 0|0

88 1|3 0|0 99 0|6 0|0 (∗ + #)

NOTES: 97= Poll Loop Short; 88 & 90 = RCVR not receiving

transmitter signals. 89 & 91 = RCVR not responding, bad conn. to

panel.

ZONE TYPE RESTORE ENABLES

*79 ZONE TYPES 1-8 All enabled

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

12345678

*80 ZONE TYPES 9 & 10 1 1

All enabled 910

SYSTEM NON ALARM CODES

*81 First Digit *82 Second Digit

Close 0|0 0|0 Second digit of each

Open 0|0 0|0 code applies only to 4+2

Low Battery 0|0 0|0 or expanded formats

Low Bat Res. 0|0 0|0 (fields *52 & *53)

AC Loss 0|0 0|0

AC Restore 0|0 0|0

Test 0|0 0|0

Power 0|0 0|0

Cancel 0|0 0|0

Prog. Tamper 0|0 0|0

– 150 –

Section 22: DOWNLOADING PRIMER

(Remote Downloading is not a UL Listed feature)

This section provides the following information:

• General information about downloading

• Getting on-line with a control panel

• Advisories

• Access security

• Connecting the 4100SM module for direct wire downloading

General Information

Downloading allows the operator to remotely access, program, and control the

security system over normal telephone lines. Anything that can be done directly

from the keypad can be done remotely, using ADEMCO's VLINK® downloading

software. To communicate with the control panel, the following is required:

1. An IBM PC compatible 286, 386, or 486 computer with at least 1MB RAM, a

hard disk with 12MB available disk space, running MS DOS 3.1 or higher

operating system.

2. A HAYES 1200 SMARTMODEM (external: level 1.2 or higher; internal: level

1.1 or higher), or a Hayes Optima 24 + Fax 96.

Other brands are not

compatible, even if claimed to be 100% compatible.

Internal modems must have 4 position DIP switch. Modems with 6 position DIP

switch will not work.

3. Alternately, you may use a 4100SM interface module to "direct wire" the

control panel to your computer at the site (see Figure .

4. V-LINK® DOWNLOADING software, from ADEMCO. This software is

available on both 3-1/2" and 5-1/4" diskettes, and includes a complete User's

Manual.

Getting On-Line with a Control Panel

At the protected premises, the Control panel must be connected to the existing

telephone line (refer to the PHONE LINE CONNECTIONS section). No

programming of the panel is required before downloading to an initial installation.

To download, do the following:

1. Enter the installer code + [#] + [5]. The panel temporarily enables a ring count

of 5 and sets the Download Callback option to "1" (callback not required).

2. Call the panel using the downloader software set to "FIRST

COMMUNICATION" mode.

3. The downloader will establish a session with no callback. The panel

information can then be downloaded.

In order to remotely access, control, or program the alarm panel, a "link"

must be established between the computer and the control panel, as follows:

– 151 –

1. The computer calls up the Control panel. (The phone number for each

customer is entered into the customer's account file on the computer).

2. The Control panel "answers" at the pre-programmed ring count and executes

a handshake with the computer.

3. The computer sends a request for call-back to the Control, unless call-back is

not required.

4. The panel acknowledges the request and hangs up. During the next few

seconds, the Control will process the request making sure certain encrypted

information, received from the computer, matches its own memory.

5. Upon a successful match, the Control panel will seize the phone line and call

the computer back, unless call-back is not required.

6. The computer answers, usually by the second ring, and executes a

handshake with the panel.

7. The panel then sends other default information to the computer. If this

information matches the computer's information, a successful link is

established. This is known as being "ON-LINE".

1. Alarm and trouble responses and reports are disabled during on-line time.

Should an event occur during this time, the response will take place and the

report will go through as soon as the remote access sequence is completed.

Alarm and trouble conditions are not ignored, they are simply delayed.

2. The keypads are inactive during downloading communication, and resume

normal functions after hang up. All keypad entries are ignored during on-line

time.

On-Line Control Functions

The following functions can be performed while on-line with a control panel:

• Arm the System in the Away Mode; Disarm the System

• Bypass a Zone

• Force the System to Accept a New Program Download

• Shut Down Communication (dialer) Functions (non-payment of monitoring

fees in an owned system)

• Shut Down all Security System Functions (non-payment for a leased system)

• Inhibit Local Keypad Programming (prevents takeover of your accounts)

• Leave a message for customer

• Command the System to Upload a Copy of its Resident Program to the office

• Read: Arming Status, AC Power Status, List of Faulted Zones, List of

Bypassed Zones, 224 Event Log, List of Zones Currently in Alarm, List of

Zones Currently in Trouble

• Set the Real-Time clock.

– 152 –

Access Security

Accessing the Control from a remote location is protected against compromise by

the use of 4 levels of protection:

1. Security Code Handshake: The subscriber's account number as well as an 8-

digit ID number (known only to the office) must be matched between the

Control and computer.

2. Hang-Up and Call-Back: The Control panel will "hang-up" and call the

computer back at the pre-programmed number only if the security codes

match.

3. Data Encryption: All data that is exchanged between the computer and Control

is encrypted to reduce the possibility of anyone "tapping" the line and

corrupting data. Additionally, all account files are encryped to prevent them

from being opened on another installer's VLink® downloading software

package.

4. Operator Access Levels: Up to 15 operators can have access to the

DOWNLOADER, each having their own log-on code. However, each

operator can be assigned one of three levels of access in both FILE and

COMMAND functions, as follows:

FILE ACCESS:

Read Only:

able only to look at the database; cannot change any information,

and cannot see the customer's access codes.

Part Read/Write:

able to look at and change all information. except the

customer's access codes.

Full Read/Write:

able to look at and change any and all information in the

database.

CONTROL/COMM ACCESS:

Read Only:

able only to Upload and arm the system. Not able to DISARM,

BYPASS, or change any information.

Part Read/Write:

able to ARM, BYPASS, UPLOAD, DOWNLOAD but cannot

shutdown the system.

Full Read/Write:

able to perform all control and status commands, as well as

shutdown all or part of the system.

NOTES:

1. Each time the Control panel is accessed successfully, a PROGRAM

TAMPER report (*81) is sent to central station, if programmed.

2. When downloading, the keypad displays "MODEM COMM."

3. Whenever a download or a save is done, an automatic time stamp is done,

indicating the date and time of the last download (or save) and the operator

ID number.

4. The average time for a complete download, including initial call-up, hang-up

and call-back is under 4 minutes.

5. A complete hard copy of each individual account can be obtained by

connecting a printer to the computer. Refer to your computer owner's manual

or contact your dealer for printer recommendations.

– 153 –

Connecting a 4100SM Module for Direct Wire Downloading

The Control can be downloaded without using a modem or telephone line by

using VLink® Software and a 4100SM Serial Module. The direct wire

downloading connection is to be temporary, and is not part of the permanent

installation. Direct wire downloading is meant as a tool for the installer during the

installation process.

The connections between the Control and the 4100SM are different than

those shown in the 4100SM Installation Instructions. See the diagram below

for correct connections. In addition, when the "green" wire is referred to in step 2

of the IN CASE OF DIFFICULTY section of the 4100SM Instructions, use the

"violet" wire.

Connector J8, located above connector J7 on the right hand side of the main PC

board (see the

Summary of Connections

diagram on the inside back cover of this

manual), is intended to be interfaced to either a local serial printer (see

EVENT

LOG PRINTER CONNECTIONS

) or a computer. Make connections to a

computer as shown below. Note that the violet wire connection for a

computer differs from that used when connecting a serial printer.

123456789

J8 CONNECTOR

VIOLET

GRAY

YELLOW

RED

GREEN

BROWN

BLUE

BLACK

IN 2

GROUND

IN 3

GROUND

OUT 5

OUT 6

GROUND

PRINTER DTR

4142TR CABLE (SUPPLIED WITH 4100SM)

4100SM SERIAL MODULE

+ PWR

- (GND)

RXD

not used

TXD

not used

RED BLUE WHITE

To TB6 Aux. Power (+)

(25mA current draw)

To TB7 Aux. Power (-)

Figure 30: Direct Wire Downloading Connections

– 154 –

Section 23: SETTING THE REAL-TIME CLOCK

This section provides the following information:

• General information about the real-time clock

• Setting the time and date

General Information

This system provides a real-time clock, which must be set in order for the

system's event log to keep track of events by time and date. It must also be set

in order to execute scheduling programs (time-driven events).

Use a 5137AD or 6139 alpha keypad to set the real-time clock, or set the clock

via the Downloader software. Only users with installer or master authority level

can set the real-time clock.

Setting the Time and Date

1. Enter installer or master code + # 63. Typical display shows

TIME/DATE –– THU

12:01 AM 01/01/90

2. The day of the week is automatically calculated based on the date entered.

Time and date entries are made by simply entering the appropriate hour,

minute, month, day and year.

Press the * key to accept the entered value. The cursor then moves to the

right.

Press the * key to move the cursor to the left of the display, to the previous

position.

Enter the correct hour then press * to move to the minutes and make the

correct entry.

Press * again, then press any key 0-9 to set AM/PM. Press any key again

to change AM to PM, or PM to AM.

Press * to move cursor to the month position and enter the correct month

using a 2-digit entry.

Press * and enter the correct date.

Press * and enter the correct year.

3. Exit clock mode by pressing the * key after the cursor is in the year

position.

– 155 –

Section 24: SECURITY ACCESS CODES

This section provides the following information:

• General information about security access codes

• Definition of user authority levels

• How to add a user access code

• How to change a user access code

• How to delete a user access code

General Information

This system allows a total of 75 security access codes to be allocated, each

identified by a user ID number.

Note that regardless of the number of partitions each code has access to, it

occupies only one user slot in the system. If a particular code is not used

in all partitions, that user ID number cannot be used again.

The Quick Arm feature can also be programmed (partition-specific program field

*29), which allows the [#] key to be pressed instead of entering the security code

when arming the system. The security code must always be entered to disarm the

system.

User #2 must be programmed for the Quick Arm feature to function.

User Codes & Levels Of Authority

Each user of the system can be assigned a level of authority (tells system what

system functions that user is authorized to do), and can have different levels of

authority within different partitions. In general, users can perform most system

functions, including Test and Chime modes, but certain authority levels restrict

disarming, bypassing or the assigning of other user codes. These restrictions are

noted in the descriptions below.

Use the "View Capabilities" keypad function to view the partitions and authority

levels for which a particular user is authorized. In highest to lowest ranking,

these levels are described below.

$MLN .JLOH

" 7QKLTjjVN

5 -TKLVN

: -TQTRVN

# 'SVNTLGN!jVrVj!$

* 'SVNTLGN!jVrVj!.

, 'SVNTLGN!jVrVj!&

> 6JNVKK

Level 0: Installer (User 1)

• Programmed in field *00 (default=4-1-4-0). Installer open/close reporting is

selected in field *39.

• Can perform all system functions (arm, disarm, bypass, etc.), but cannot

disarm if armed by another code (or by Quick Arm).

• Can add, delete, or change all other authority level codes, and can select

open/close reports for any user.

• Is the only code that can enter program mode, but even this can be prevented

by exiting program mode using *98. (The only way to access Programming

mode if this done is by powering down the system, powering up again, and

then pressing both the * and # keys at the same time within 30 seconds of

power up.)

• Must program at least one master code during initial installation. Master

codes are codes intended for use by the primary user(s ) of the system.

– 156 –

Open/Close Reporting Note: When adding a user, the system will only prompt

for Open/Close reporting capability if the user is being added by the Installer.

When a Master or Manager adds a new user, the new user's Open/Close

reporting enable will be the same as that of the Master or Manager adding the

user. If Open/Close reports are required to be selectable by the Master or

Manager, the Installer should assign two Master or Manager user codes: one

with Open/Close reporting enabled, and one without.

Note that Open/Close reporting of Quick Arm is enabled if User 2 is enabled for

Open/Close reporting, and that Quick Arm reports as User 0. In order for Quick

Arm reports to be sent for all partitions, User #02 must have authority and

Open/Close enabled for all partitions. If a code with access to all partitions is not

desired, it is suggested that user #02 be assigned authority level 5 in all

partitions, and that the code be kept secret. Authority level 5 cannot disarm the

system unless armed by that user.

Level 1: Master Codes

• Can perform all normal system functions

• Can be used to assign up to 73 lower level codes, which can be used by other

users of the system.

• Cannot assign anybody a level of 0 or 1.

• May change his own code.

• Can add, delete, change manager or operator codes. Each user's code can be

individually eliminated or changed at any time.

• Open/close reporting of added users are same as that of the master or

manager adding the new user.

Level 2: Manager Codes

• Can perform all system functions (Arm, Disarm, Bypass, etc.) programmed by

Master.

• May add, delete or change other users of the system below this level

(Manager cannot assign anybody a level of 0, 1, or 2).

• May change his own code.

• Open/close reporting of added users will be same as his own (enabled or

disabled as assigned by installer or master).

Levels 3-5: Operator Codes

• Can arm and disarm the system to the authority assigned, but cannot add or

modify any user code.

• May operate a partition with one of the three OPERATOR authority levels A

through C listed below.

Level Title Functions Permitted

3 Operator A Arm, Disarm, Bypass

4 Operator B Arm, Disarm

5 Operator C Arm, Disarm only if armed with same code

• Operator C (sometimes known as Baby-sitter code), cannot disarm the system

unless the system was armed with that code. This code is usually assigned to

persons who may have the need to arm and disarm the system at specific

times only (ex. a baby-sitter needs to control the system only when baby-

sitting).

– 157 –

Level 6: Duress

• Sends a silent alarm to a central monitoring station if the user is being forced

to disarm (or arm) the system under threat (only useful if the system is

connected to a central station).

• When the system's Auxiliary Voltage Triggers are connected to another

communication's media (Derived Channel/Long Range Radio), note that

duress is signaled on the same trigger that signals silent panic (whereas

duress has its own unique report when digitally communicated).

• Assigned on a partition by partition basis and can be any code or codes

desired.

• Will disarm (or arm) the system, but will also send a silent alarm to the central

station (if service is connected). There will be no indication at the keypad that

an alarm was sent..

Duress Reporting Note: The Duress report triggering logic activates on the 5th

key depression (such as OFF), not the 4th key depression (last digit of code).

Duress reports will not be triggered if the 5th key is a [*], such as when

performing a GOTO or viewing the capabilities of a user.

General Rules on Authority Levels and changes

The following rules apply to users when making modifications within the system

based on the user code authority levels:

• Master Codes and all lower level codes can be used interchangeably when

performing system functions within a partition (a system armed with a user's

temporary code can be disarmed with the Master Code or another user's

temporary code), except the Operator Level C Code described above.

• A user may not delete or change the user code of the SAME or HIGHER

authority than which he is assigned.

• A user (levels 0, 1 & 2 only) may only ADD users to a LOWER authority level.

• A user may assign other users access to only those partitions to which he

himself has access.

• A user can only be DELETED or CHANGED from within the partition he is

assigned.

• User numbers must be entered as 2-digit entries. Single digit user numbers

must, therefore, always be preceded by a "0" (example, 03, 04, 05, etc.).

Make sure the end user understands this requirement. Temporary codes are

entered as 4-digit numbers.

Ademco Contact ID format is capable of reporting Users 01-75 uniquely. If any

other report format is used, only user numbers #1 - #15 can uniquely report to the

central station. Users #16 - #75 will report as User #15.

Multiple Partition Access Examples

Each user is programmed for a primary (home) partition. A user can also be

given access to operate one or more partitions. In addition, within each partition,

each user may be programmed to have different levels of authority. For

example, User #3, the V.P. of Engineering, could be assigned to work within the

Engineering Department (Partition 1) of ABC Manufacturing. Since he needs the

full capabilities in his area, he is assigned as a MASTER with Level 1 authority.

This means he may Arm, Disarm, Bypass, Add or Modify users in partition 1.

It is also a requirement that he be able to gain access to the manufacturing area

(partition 2) on an emergency basis. You can set this up easily with the

partitioned system by now requesting that he also be assigned to partition 2, with

a level of authority set lower, such as Level 4 (OPERATOR Level B) which allows

him to Arm and Disarm, but nothing else. The control will automatically assign

him the same user number within partition 2 and does not require reprogramming

of his already existing 4 digit security code.

– 158 –

+B$)-(+E9CE)=(.%-(+E-$&.%.%9/E$11+77

@TNL!5 @TNL!: @TNL!# @TNL!* @TNL!, @TNL!> @TNL!< @TNL!2

/KVN!# /KVN!#

%VrVj!5 %VrVj!*

-TKLVN 'SVN!.

In the above example, User 3 has MASTER authority in partition 1 and

OPERATOR B authority in partition 2. His user number is the same for both

partitions. Note that if a user number is already being used in a partition, the

system will automatically assign an unused User number. Also notice that no

access is allowed for this user into partitions 3 - 8. Attempts to access these

partitions would be denied automatically.

To ADD a Master, Manager or Operator Code

During user code entry, normal key depressions at other keypads in a partition

will be ignored. However, panic key depression will cause an alarm and terminate

user entry.

Enter Installer Code†+ [8] + new user # (02-75) + new user's code

†Or Master or Manager code, but must be code with higher level of authority than

the code being changed (i.e. Master code can add a Manager or Operator level

code, but cannot add another Master code; a Manager code can add an Operator

level code, but cannot add a Master or another Manager code).

Keypad will prompt for the Authority Level for this user.

User Number = 03

Enter Auth. Level Enter the level number as follows:

1 = Master (Arm, Disarm, Bypass, add or modify lower level

users)

2 = Manager (Arm, Disarm, Bypass, add or modify lower

level users)

3 = Operator Level A (Arm, Disarm, Bypass)

4 = Operator Level B ( Arm, Disarm)

5 = Operator Level C ( Arm, Disarm only if system armed

with this code)

6 = Duress (Arm, Disarm, triggers silent panic alarm)

Keypad will then prompt for Open/Close reporting option

for this user.

Open/Close Rep.?

0 = NO , 1 = YES Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether or not

arming/disarming by this user will trigger opening &

closing reports. This prompt appears only if the installer

code is used to add a user.

Access Group?

Enter 0-8 If access schedules have been programmed, this prompt

appears. Enter the user's access group number (1-8) if

this user should have limited access to the system. Enter

0 if no access group should be assigned.

RF Button ?

0=NO , 1=YES If a 5800 series button transmitter has been enabled for

arming/disarming functions, and is not assigned to a

user, this prompt will appear. Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES).

Enter Button ZN #

(01-86) If yes was given as the answer to the RF button question,

the zone number for the button will be requested. Enter

any one of the zone numbers assigned to the button

transmitter as AWAY, STAY or DISARM. The system will

then assign all buttons of the transmitter to this user

number.

– 159 –

Multi-Access ?

0 = NO , 1 = YES Press 0 (NO) if the user is to have access to this partition

only. Press 1 (YES) if the user is to have access to

more than one partition. If NO, the program exits this

mode. If yes, the Keypad prompts for the Global Arm

option for this user.

Global Arm ?

0 = NO , 1 = YES Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether or not

this user will be allowed to arm more than one partition

via Global Arm prompts (described in the KEYPAD

FUNCTIONS section) .

The keypad now prompts for the user’s access to the

next partition.

Part. 2 – SHOP ?

0 = NO , 1 = YES Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether or not

this user will have access to the displayed partition

number. If NO, the keypad displays this prompt for the

next partition number in sequence.

If YES, the keypad prompts for the following:

• User’s authority level in the displayed partition (see

Authority Level prompt above).

• Open/Close option for this user in the displayed

partition (see Open/Close prompt above).

• Global Arm option for this user in the displayed

partition.

When all partitions have been displayed, the keypad will

scroll through all partitions to which access has been

assigned, and will display the user number, authority level,

open/close and global arm options that were programmed

for each partition the user was granted access. For

example:

Part. 1 A0 * WHSE

User 03 Auth=3G. Note that the “G” following the authority level indicates

that the global arm feature is enabled for this user in the

displayed partition, and that the period at the end of the

second line indicates open/close reporting is enabled for

this user in the displayed partition. The "*" indicates the

partition from which the user may be changed or deleted.

To CHANGE a Master, Manager or Operator code

Enter Installer code* + [8] + User number (02-75) + new user's code.

* Or Master or Manager code, but must be code with higher level of authority

than the code being changed. (i.e. Master code can change a Manager or

Operator level code, but cannot change another Master code; a Manager code

can change an Operator level code, but cannot change a Master or another

Manager code).

User Number = 03

NEW USER? The system detects that the user number is already

assigned and will prompt if this is a new user. Press 0

(NO).

The system will then confirm that the change is allowed

based on authorization level.

– 160 –

Adding An RF Key To An Existing User

To add an RF key to an existing user, or to change a user's global arm option,

first delete that user's code, then re-add the user code as described in the "Add A

User" paragraph.

To Delete a Master, Manager or Operator code

Enter your code* + [8] + User number (02-75) + your code again

* Installer, Master or Manager code, but must be code with higher level of

authority than the code being deleted. (i.e. Master code can delete a Manager or

Operator level code, but cannot delete another Master code; a Manager code

can delete an Operator level code, but cannot delete a Master or another

Manager code).

OK TO DELETE 03?

0=NO 1=YES The system will prompt to confirm that you want to delete

this user. Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES).

If yes, that user's code will be removed from all partitions

to which it had been assigned, and all authorization

levels and other information about that user will be

deleted. Note that a user can only be deleted by a user

with a higher authority level. A user cannot delete

himself.

A user code can only be deleted from the partition through which it was entered.

If trying to delete from another partition, the message "User [XX] Not Deleted" will

be displayed.

To EXIT The User Edit Mode

Press either [*] or [#], or don't press any key for 10 seconds.

– 161 –

Section 25: KEYPAD FUNCTIONS

This section provides the following information:

• General information about keypad usage

• Basic keypad functions

• Global arming

• Access control

• Delaying closing time

• Executing the "Go To" command

• Viewing:

A user's capabilities

Zone descriptors

Downloaded messages

Built-in user's guide

• Speed key macro commands

• Executing #70 Manual Relay Activation mode

General Information

The keypad allows the user to arm and disarm the system, and perform other

system functions, such as bypassing zones, viewing messages from the central

station, and displaying zone descriptors. Zone and system conditions (alarm,

trouble, bypass) are shown in the display window.

When an alarm occurs, keypad sounding and external sounding will occur, and

the zone(s) in alarm will be displayed on the keypad. Pressing any key will

silence the keypad sounder for 10 seconds. Disarming the system will silence

both keypad and external sounders. When the system is disarmed, any zones

that were in an alarm condition during the armed period will be displayed

(memory of alarm). To clear this display, simply repeat the disarm sequence

(enter the security code and press the OFF key).

The keypads also feature chime annunciation, and 3 panic keys (for silent,

audible, fire or personal emergency alarms) which can notify the central station of

an alarm condition, if that service is connected.

Arming Functions

The following is a brief list of system commands. For detailed information

concerning system functions, refer to the User's Manual.

Display Faulted Before arming, the system must be in the READY

Zones condition (all zones must be intact). If the "NOT

READY" message appears, press the READY * key

to display faulted zones.

Arming Away Enter code + 2 (AWAY).

Arming Stay Enter code + 3 (STAY). (all zones designated as

zone types 4 and 10 will be automatically bypassed)

Arming Instant Enter code + 7 (INSTANT) (same as STAY without

entry delay).

Arming Maximum Enter code + 4 (MAXIMUM) (same as AWAY without

entry delay).

Disarming Enter code + 1 (OFF).

Bypassing Zones Enter code + 6 (BYPASS) + zone number. To

automatically bypass all faulted zones, use "Quick

Bypass" method: Enter code + BYPASS + # .

Chime Mode Enter code + 9 (CHIME). To turn chime mode off,

enter code + CHIME again.

– 162 –

Quick Arming: Note that if QUICK ARM is enabled (field *29), the #

key can be pressed instead of entering the security

code, for any of the arming procedures (Away, Stay,

Instant, Maximum, etc.).

User #02 must be programmed into the system in order for the Quick Arm feature

to work.

SUMMARY OF ARMING MODES

Mode Features For Each Arming Mode

Exit Entry Perimeter Interior

Delay Delay Armed Armed

AWAY Yes Yes Yes Yes

STAY Yes Yes Yes No

INSTANT Yes No Yes No

MAXIMUM Yes No Yes Yes

Global Arming

If enabled for the user, the keypad will display the following:

ARM ALL ?

0 = NO , 1 = YES

If NO, the keypad prompts for arming each partition

individually. If YES, the system attempts to arm all

partitions allowed by this user. If there are any faults (open

doors, windows, etc.) the keypad will display them. See

notes below. These faults must be corrected or the zone

bypassed before arming will occur. When faults are

corrected, repeat the arming procedure.

1. When using the Global Arm feature, if there are faults

in any of the selected partitions, the system will enter a

summary mode in which the faulted zones of all of the

selected partitions will be displayed. These faults must

be corrected or bypassed (code + BYPASS + [#] will

attempt to bypass the faults in all of the selected

partitions). This summary mode will end in approx. 120

seconds if no keys are pressed.

2. If, when disarming the system using a Global Disarm,

any of the selected partitions has a condition which

would cause the keypad to beep (such as alarm

memory or a trouble condition), the system will cause

the keypad to beep and will enter a summary mode in

which the alarm memory or trouble conditions of all of

the selected partitions will be displayed. This mode will

continue until either approx. 120 seconds elapses or a

second disarm occurs which clears the beeping

Global arming cannot be performed from a wireless keypad or a non-alpha display

keypad.

– 163 –

Access Control

If programmed, one relay may be used for access control in each partition. The

relay is programmed in data field 1*76. To activate this relay, the user enters his

user code + 0 . The relay will pulse for 2 seconds.

Delaying Closing Time

If Open/Close schedules are used, end users can manually delay closing time by

extending the closing window by 1 or 2 hours. This is useful if a user must stay

on the premises later than usual. The user must have authority level of manager

or higher.

To extend the closing window, enter user code + # + 82.

Closing Delay ?

Hit 0-2 Hours

Enter the number hours, 1 or 2, by which the end of the

closing window should be extended. Note that the delay

is from the scheduled closing time, not from the current

time. Press * to accept entry and exit this mode.

Press # to exit this mode without changes.

The system will send an "Access Schedule Change"

message to the central station when the closing window

is extended (if programmed in fields 2*13 and 2*14.

An extension of the closing window cannot be reduced once it is set. However, a

1 hour delay can be increased to 2 hours. This is to prevent the user from

deleting the delay after the normal window expires, thereby missing the end of

the window.

Partition "GOTO" Commands

Each keypad is assigned a default partition for display purposes, and will show

only that partition's information. To see information for another partition, or

perform system functions in another partition, use the GOTO command (code +

[*] +partition number 0-8). The keypad will remain in the new partition until

directed to go to another partition, or until 120 seconds has elapsed with no

keypad activity. To return to your home partition, enter * + partition number 0.

You must program data field 2*18 to enable the GOTO function. This is a

partition-specific field that must be set for each partition the user wants to access

from another partition's keypad

Viewing Capabilities Of A User

The keypad will display the partitions that a user is authorized for, the user

number, and the authority level for all partitions authorized. Enter code + [*] + [*].

The user's capabilities in each authorized partition will typically be displayed as

follows:

Part. 1 A0 * WHSE

User 01 Auth.=1G.

The user's Open/Close report capability is shown by the

dot following the authority level. If Open/Close is not

enabled for a user, the dot will not appear.

Viewing Zone Descriptors

The Alpha Keypads can display all programmed descriptors, which is useful to

the installer when checking entries, and can be helpful to the user when there is

a need to identify zones.

To display descriptors, the system must be

disarmed and ready to arm.

Press and hold the READY key until the built-in

instructions for that key appear, then release the key. The zone descriptors will

appear one at a time, for about 2-3 seconds each. For faster viewing, press the

READY key to display the next descriptor in numerical order and so on. When all

descriptors have been displayed, the control will exit display mode. To exit

display mode before all descriptors have been displayed, enter the security code

and press the OFF key.

– 164 –

Viewing Downloaded Messages

Users may occasionally receive a message from their installation company

displayed on an alpha keypad. When this occurs, the keypad will display

"Message. Press 0 for 5 secs.". Instruct the user to press and hold the 0 key to

display the central station's message. Note that the system must be in the

READY state to view these messages.

Using The Built-In User's Manual

An abbreviated User's Manual is stored in the system's memory, and can be

particularly useful to the end user if the printed User's Manual is not conveniently

accessible when the user needs to perform a seldom used and unfamiliar system

procedure. The Built-in User's Guide is displayed only on an alpha keypad by

simply pressing any of the function keys (e.g., OFF, AWAY, STAY, MAXIMUM,

BYPASS, INSTANT, CODE, TEST, READY, #, and CHIME) for approximately 5

seconds and then releasing it. Abbreviated instructions relative to the key that

has been pressed will then be displayed (2 lines of text are displayed at a time).

This function operates in either the armed or the disarmed state.

Panic Keys

There are three panic key pairs (shown below) that, if programmed, can be used

to manually initiate alarms and send a report to the central station. Each key pair

can be individually programmed for 24 Hour Silent, Audible or Auxiliary

(Emergency) responses, as well as Fire. The panic function is activated when the

appropriate key pair is pressed at the same time.

The panic functions are identified by the system as follows:

PANIC Displayed as Zone

* 1 95

# 3 96

* # 99

For alpha keypads, these panic keys can

also be programmed with an alpha

descriptor.

For the Panic functions to be of practical value, the system must be connected to

a central station.

Speed Key [D] (Macros)

The "D" key can be used to activate a string of up to 16 keystrokes. These

keystrokes are known as a macro and are stored in the system's memory . Each

partition may have its own macro. Typical Speed Key functions include:

• Arming sequences that involve first bypassing certain zones before arming.

• Seldom used but repeatable sequences.

• Relay activation sequences.

To program a macro, enter your user code + [#] + [D]. The following appears:

ENTER SPEEDKEY "D"

existing sequence displayed

Enter up to 16 keystrokes. A speed key sequence can include different

commands. Press the "D" key to separate different commands. For example,

you may want to perform the following sequence.

Desired function Keystrokes

GOTO partition 2 Enter *2

Bypass zones 10 & 11 Press bypass [6], then the zone numbers 10 & 11

Arm in maximum mode Press maximum [4] key

Return to partition 1 Enter *1

– 165 –

To program that speed key sequence, type the following :

*2 D 61011 D 4D*1 D D

Note that the "D" key is pressed after the "2," the last "1" and the "4," separating

the different commands. Press "D" twice to complete the entry and exit.

To execute a speed key sequence, press the "D" key. The following appears:

ENTER USER CODE

****

Enter your user code. The programmed speedkey sequence will begin

automatically.

When defining speedkey sequences, do not use the [#] key to represent Quick

Arming. The system uses the code entered in response to the prompt to initiate

commands in a speedkey sequence, so the quick arm key is unnecessary. The

system interprets the use of the [#] key in a speedkey sequence as its designated

function only (e.g. #2 is not interpreted as arm in away mode, but rather as enter

house ID sniffer mode).

Manual Relay Activation Mode (#70 Mode)

The system allows users to manually activate relays/X-10 modules by keypad

command using either the keypad or a telephone keypad (if VIP module is used).

The user will be prompted (either by keypad alpha display or telephone voice

module).

To activate relays from a keypad, enter 4-digit security code + [#] +70.

To activate relays using a telephone and VIP module, first dial the 2-digit phone

access code. When the system acknowledges the access, enter 4-digit security

code + [#] + 70. The following prompts/voice responses will begin.

ENTER DEVICE NO.

00=QUIT 01 Voice: "ENTER DEVICE CODE NOW"

Enter the 2-digit number of the relay/X-10 module to be

activated.

nn DEVICE IS OFF

HIT 0=OFF , 1=ON Voice: "

voice descriptor

DEVICE nn ON/OFF. FOR

voice descriptor

ON ENTER 1, FOR

voice descriptor

OFF ENTER 0"

Press 0 or 1 to turn the device off or on respectively.

"nn" represents the 2-digit relay/X-10 module number

and

voice descriptor

is the relay voice descriptor

programmed by the installer (see relay descriptor

programming section).

nn DEVICE IS OFF

HIT THE "*" KEY Voice: "

voice descriptor

DEVICE nn ON/OFF. TO EXIT

ENTER 00 NOW"

From a keypad, press * to continue. The ENTER

DEVICE NO. prompt will appear.

From a telephone keypad, enter 00 to exit, or enter the

next relay number to be programmed. The current on/off

state of that relay will be annunciated as described

above. Alternatively, if 6 seconds elapses with no key

depression, the voice module will annunciate the

"ENTER DEVICE CODE NOW" message.

– 166 –

Section 26: TESTING THE SYSTEM

This section provides the following information:

• Using Test Mode

• Turning the system over to the user

• Trouble conditions

Using Test Mode

General Information

After the installation is completed, thoroughly test the Security System on a

partition by partition basis as follows:

1. With the System in the disarmed state, check that all zones are intact. If

DISARMED - Press T to show faults is displayed, press the * key to display

the descriptors of the faulted zone(s). Restore faulted zone(s) if necessary, so

that ****DISARMED*** READY TO ARM is displayed.

2. Enter the security code and press the TEST key. The external sounder (if

used) should sound for 3 seconds and then turn off (the system is operating

on the back-up battery only at this time).

NOTE 1. If the sounder does not sound, this may be an indication that the

backup battery is discharged or missing.

NOTE 2. As a reminder that the system is in the Test mode, the keypad will

sound a single beep at 15-second intervals.

NOTE 3. In the Test mode, no alarm reports will be sent to the central station

for the partition being tested. Also, the external sounder (if used) will not be

activated.

NOTE 4: Test mode is active only for the partition at which Test mode is

entered. Other partitions are still operative and will cause the external

sounder and communicator to activate if an alarm condition occurs.

Doors and Windows

• Open and close each protected door and window in turn. Each action should

produce three beeps from the keypad. The descriptor for each protection zone

will appear on the keypad display.

Motion Detectors

• Walk in front of any interior motion detectors. Listen for three beeps when the

detector senses movement. While it is activated, its descriptor will remain

displayed on the keypad. Note that wireless PIRs will have a 3 minute lockout

between transmissions to conserve battery life (remove cover for walk test to

override the 3-minute lock-out on 5700 series units, move jumper inside 5800

series units to "Test" position (put back to "Normal" position when test is

complete)).

Smoke Detectors

• Follow the test procedure provided by the manufacturer of each smoke

detector to ensure that all detectors are operational and are functioning

properly.

NOTE: A 2-wire smoke detector display will not clear until the Test mode is

exited.

Turning Off TEST mode

• Enter the security code and press the 1 (OFF) key.

– 167 –

Armed System Test

1. A message will be sent to the central station during the following tests. Notify

the central station that a test will be in progress.

2. A display of "COMM. FAILURE" (FC on fixed work keypads) indicates a failure

to communicate (no Kissoff by the receiver at the central station after the

maximum number of transmission attempts is tried). If this occurs, verify that

the phone line is connected, the correct report format is programmed, etc.

1. Arm the system and fault one or more zones. Silence alarm sounder(s) each

time by entering the code and pressing OFF. Check that Entry/Exit delay

zones provide the assigned delay times.

2. Check the keypad-initiated alarms, if programmed in field *05, by pressing the

Panic key pairs ([*] + [1], [#] + [3], [*] + [#]). If the system has been

programmed for audible emergency, the keypad will emit a loud, steady alarm

sound. The word ALARM and a descriptor "99" will be displayed for [*] + [#]. (if

[*] + [1] is pressed, a "95" will be displayed; if [#] + [3] is pressed, a "96" will be

displayed). Silence the alarm by entering the security code and pressing OFF.

If the system has been programmed for silent panic, there will be no audible

alarms or displays, but a report will be sent to the central station, if

programmed to do so.

3. Notify the central station that all tests are finished and verify results with them.

Turning The System Over To The User

1. Fully explain the operation of the system to the user by going over each of its

functions as well as the User's Manual supplied.

2. In particular, explain the operation of each zone (entry/exit, perimeter, interior,

fire, etc.). Be sure the user understands how to operate any emergency

feature(s) programmed into the system.

IMPORTANT: In the spaces provided in the User's Manual, record the Entry and

Exit Delay times, and those functions that have been programmed into the

available pairs of PANIC key pairs ([*] + [1], [#] + [3], [*] + [#]).

3. Make sure the user understands the importance of testing the system at least

weekly, following the procedure provided in the User's Manual.

To The Installer

Regular maintenance and inspection (at least annually) by the installer and

frequent testing by the user are vital to continuous satisfactory operation of any

alarm system.

The installer should assume the responsibility of developing and offering a

regular maintenance program to the user as well as acquainting the user with the

proper operation and limitations of the alarm system and its component parts.

Recommendations must be included for a specific program of frequent testing (at

least weekly) to insure the system's proper operation at all times.

– 168 –

Trouble Conditions

The word "CHECK" on the keypad's display, accompanied by a rapid "beeping"

at the keypad, indicates that there is a trouble condition in the system. The

audible warning sound can be silenced by pressing any key. Instruct users to call

for service immediately upon seeing any of the following messages.

"Check" Messages

• "CHECK" accompanied by a display of one or more zone descriptor(s)

Indicates that a problem exists with those zone(s). Zone trouble may be

caused by one of the following conditions:

--A hardwired fire zone is open (broken wire)

--A Day/Night zone (Zone Type 5) is faulted

--A polling loop zone is not seen by the control panel

--A polling loop zone has been tampered (cover removed on a 4190)

--A wireless zone has not checked in during the time programmed in

field 1*31

--A 5800 series transmitter has been tampered (cover removed)

• "CHECK" accompanied by a numeric display of "87"

Indicates the 4285 VIP Module is not communicating with the control panel.

• "CHECK" accompanied by a numeric display of "97"

Indicates that a short exists on the Polling Loop and may eliminate some of

the protection. Fault "97" can be assigned an alpha descriptor when using the

alpha keypad.

• "CHECK" accompanied by a numeric display of "88", "89", "90", or "91"

Indicates a wireless receiver problem. These faults indicate the following:

88: The 2nd receiver has not heard from any supervised RF

transmitters for the period of time programmed in field 1*30.

89: The 2nd receiver is not communicating with the control panel.

90: The 1st receiver has not heard from any supervised RF

transmitters for the period of time programmed in field 1*30.

91: The 1st receiver is not communicating with the control panel.

If the problem has been corrected, key an OFF sequence (Security Code plus

OFF) twice to clear the display.

– 169 –

Other System Messages

• "COMM. FAILURE" (alpha) or "FC" (fixed-word) at the Keypad

Indicates that a failure occurred in the telephone communication portion of

your system.

• "LO BAT" (alpha) or "BAT" (fixed-word) and a zone descriptor, accompanied

by a once per minute beep at the Keypad

Indicates that a low battery condition exists in the wireless transmitter

displayed. The audible warning sound may be silenced by pressing any key.

• "SYSTEM LO BAT" (alpha) or "BAT" with no zone number (fixed-word)

indicates that a low battery condition exists with the system's backup battery.

• "RCVR SET UP ERROR" (alpha) or "E8" (fixed-word) at the keypad

Indicates that the system has more wireless zones programmed than the

wireless receiver can support. If this is not corrected, none of the zones in the

system will be protected. If additional wireless zones are desired, use an

appropriate receiver.

• "MODEM COMM" (alpha) or "CC" (fixed-word)

Indicates that the control is on-line with the remote computer and the control is

not operating. Panel's response to alarm and trouble conditions will be

delayed until on-line session is completed.

Power Failure

If the POWER indicator is off, and the message "AC LOSS" (alpha) or "NO AC"

(fixed-word) is displayed, the keypad is operating on battery power only. Check to

see that your system's plug-in transformer has not been accidentally pulled out.

Instruct the user to call a service representative immediately if AC power cannot

be restored.

– 170 –

REGULATORY AGENCY STATEMENTS

UL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

The following requirements apply to both UL Residential and UL Commercial

Burglary installations:

1. All partitions must be owned and managed by the same person(s).

2. All partitions must be part of one building at one street address.

3. The audible alarm device(s) must be placed where it/they can be heard by all

partitions.

4. The Control cabinet must be protected from unauthorized access. This can be

done by installing a tamper switch on the cabinet door (not supplied with

VISTA 50P; supplied with VISTA 50PUL) or by installing a UL Listed passive

infrared detector positioned to detect cabinet access. Wire the selected device

to any EOLR supervised zone (zone 1-8). Program this zone for day

trouble/night alarm (type 05) or 24 hour audible alarm (type 07) response. The

24 hour alarm response must be used for multiple partitioned systems.

5. Remote Downloading and auto-disarming are not UL Listed features.

UL609 GRADE A LOCAL MERCANTILE PREMISES/LOCAL MERCANTILE

SAFE & VAULT

1. Use the VISTA 50PUL.

2. All zones must be configured for EOLR supervision (*41=0). Wireless sensors

may not be used. If 4190WH RPMs are used, set field *24 to "0" to enable

tamper detection.

3. Attach a door tamper switch (supplied) to the VISTA 50PUL cabinet backbox.

For safe and vault installations, a shock sensor (not supplied) must also be

attached to the backbox. (Also see MOUNTING THE CABINET section)

4. Wire an Ademco AB12 Grade A Bell/Box to the bell output. Bell wires must be

run in conduit. Program the bell output for 16 or more minute timeout and for

confirmation of arming ding. (Also see EXTERNAL SOUNDERS section)

5. Wire the VISTA 50PUL tamper switch and AB12 Bell/Box tamper switches to

any EOLR supervised zone (zones 1-8). Program this zone for day

trouble/night alarm (type 05) or 24 hour audible alarm (type 07) response. The

24 hour alarm response must be used for multiple partitioned systems.

6. Entry delays must not exceed 45 seconds and exit delays must not exceed 60

seconds.

UL365 POLICE STATION CONNECTED BURGLAR ALARM

Follow the instructions for UL609 local instructions.

For Grade A Service:

• You may use the VISTA-50PUL dialer alone, or the 7720 Long Range Radio

alone.

• When using the dialer, program it to send burglary alarm, low battery and

communicator test reports. Field *27 must be set to "024" (or less) so that test

reports are sent at least once every 24 hours.

• When using the 7720, connect it to the VISTA-50PUL burglary/audible panic

alarm panic alarm trigger.

For Grade AA Service:

• You must use a 7920SE Long Range Radio.

• Connect the 7920SE to the VISTA-50PUL burglary/audible panic alarm panic

alarm trigger.

– 171 –

UL611/UL1610 CENTRAL STATION BURGLARY ALARM

1. Follow the instructions for UL609 Local installations given above.

For Grade A Service:

• You must use the VISTA-50PUL's dialer with a 7720 Long Range Radio.

• Connect the Control's burglary/audible panic alarm trigger (on J7 header) and

the 659EN's phone line monitor output to the 7720. The 7720 will send a

report to the central station when a telephone line fault condition is detected.

• Also connect the 7720's radio fault output to one of the VISTA-50PUL's EOLR

supervised zones (i.e., 1-8). Program this zone for a trouble by day/alarm by

night (type 05) or a 24-hour alarm (type 07, 08) response to radio faults.

• Program the Control's dialer to send burglary alarm, trouble, opening/closing,,

and low battery reports.

For Grade AA Service:

• Follow the instructions for Grade A service except use the 7920SE in place of

the 7720.

CALIFORNIA STATE FIRE MARSHAL (CSFM) AND UL RESIDENTIAL FIRE

24 HOUR BATTERY BACKUP REQUIREMENTS.

The California State Fire Marshal and UL have regulations which require that

all residential fire alarm control panels must be provided with backup battery

which has sufficient capacity to operate the panel and its attached peripherals

devices for 24 hours in the intended standby condition, followed by at least 4

minutes in the intended fire alarm signaling condition.

The VISTA 50P can meet this requirement without using a supplemental

power supply, provided that the panel's outputs (including the current drawn

from the auxiliary power output terminals) are limited as shown below:

• Output current is limited to 750mA maximum total auxiliary power, polling loop

and bell output current.

• Maximum auxiliary current is 300mA (including polling loop current)

• Use 14AH battery (Yuasa model NP7-12 recommended, use two connected in

parallel. A dual battery harness is provided with Ademco No. 4100EOLR

Resistor kit (kit also contains EOL resistors having spade lug/heat shrink

tubing construction which has been approved by UL and CSFM for fire zone

usage). Both batteries will fit inside the panel's cabinet.

– 172 –

PC+;+&$(E19))=/%1$.%9/7E19))%77%9/EQC11RE7.$.+)+/.P

4pPK!VtJPSMVQL!pTK!kVVQ!LVKLVO!LG!B&&!NVtJPNVMVQLK!TQO!pTK!kVVQ!nGJQO!TUUVSLTkjV!nGN!JKVH!!4pV!B&&!NVtJPNVK

LpV!nGjjGqPQR!KLTLVMVQL!nGN!lGJN!PQnGNMTLPGQc

4pPK!VtJPSMVQL!RVQVNTLVK!TQO!JKVK!NTOPG!nNVtJVQUl!VQVNRl!TQO!Pn!QGL!PQKLTjjVO!TQO!JKVO!SNGSVNjl`!LpTL!PK`!PQ!KLNPUL

TUUGNOTQUV!qPLp!LpV!MTQJnTULJNVN]K!PQKLNJULPGQK`!MTl!UTJKV!PQLVNnVNVQUV!LG!NTOPG!TQO!LVjVrPKPGQ!NVUVSLPGQH!7L!pTK

kVVQ!LlSV!LVKLVO!TQO!nGJQO!LG!UGMSjl!qPLp!LpV!jPMPLK!nGN!T!&jTKK!.!UGMSJLPQR!OVrPUV!PQ!TUUGNOTQUV!qPLp!LpV

KSVUPnPUTLPGQK!PQ!@TNL!5,!Gn!B&&!3JjVK`!qpPUp!TNV!OVKPRQVO!LG!SNGrPOV!NVTKGQTkjV!SNGLVULPGQ!TRTPQKL!KJUp

PQLVNnVNVQUV!PQ!T!NVKPOVQLPTj!PQKLTjjTLPGQH!!1GqVrVN`!LpVNV!PK!QG!RJTNTQLVV!LpTL!PQLVNnVNVQUV!qPjj!QGL!GUUJN!PQ!T

STNLPUJjTN!PQKLTjjTLPGQH!7n!LpPK!VtJPSMVQL!OGVK!UTJKV!PQLVNnVNVQUV!LG!NTOPG!GN!LVjVrPKPGQ!NVUVSLPGQ`!qpPUp!UTQ!kV

OVLVNMPQVO!kl!LJNQPQR!LpV!VtJPSMVQL!Gnn!TQO!GQ`!LpV!JKVN!PK!VQUGJNTRVO!LG!LNl!LG!UGNNVUL!LpV!PQLVNnVNVQUV!kl!GQV!GN

MGNV!Gn!LpV!nGjjGqPQR!MVTKJNVKc

u 7n!JKPQR!TQ!PQOGGN!TQLVQQT`!pTrV!T!tJTjPLl!GJLOGGN!TQLVQQT!PQKLTjjVOH

u 3VGNPVQL!LpV!NVUVPrPQR!TQLVQQT!JQLPj!PQLVNnVNVQUV!PK!NVOJUVO!GN!VjPMPQTLVOH

u -GrV!LpV!NVUVPrVN!TqTl!nNGM!LpV!UGQLNGjbUGMMJQPUTLGNH

u -GrV!LpV!TQLVQQT!jVTOK!TqTl!nNGM!TQl!qPNV!NJQK!LG!LpV!UGQLNGjbUGMMJQPUTLGNH

u @jJR!LpV!UGQLNGjbUGMMJQPUTLGN!PQLG!T!OPnnVNVQL!GJLjVL!KG!LpTL!PL!TQO!LpV!NVUVPrVN!TNV!GQ!OPnnVNVQL!kNTQUp

UPNUJPLKH

7n!QVUVKKTNl`!LpV!JKVN!KpGJjO!UGQKJjL!LpV!OVTjVN!GN!TQ!VoSVNPVQUVO!NTOPGbLVjVrPKPGQ!LVUpQPUPTQ!nGN!TOOPLPGQTj

KJRRVKLPGQKH

4pV!JKVN!GN!PQKLTjjVN!MTl!nPQO!LpV!nGjjGqPQR!kGGsjVL!SNVSTNVO!kl!LpV!BVOVNTj!&GMMJQPUTLPGQK!&GMMPKKPGQ

pVjSnJjc

X7QLVNnVNVQUV!1TQOkGGsX

4pPK!kGGsjVL!PK!TrTPjTkjV!nNGM!LpV!/H0H!=GrVNQMVQL!@NPQLPQR!'nnPUV`!ATKpPQRLGQ`!6&!:"*":H

4pV!JKVN!KpTjj!QGL!MTsV!TQl!UpTQRVK!GN!MGOPnPUTLPGQK!LG!LpV!VtJPSMVQL!JQjVKK!TJLpGNPmVO!kl!LpV!7QKLTjjTLPGQ

7QKLNJULPGQK!GN!/KVN]K!-TQJTjH!!/QTJLpGNPmVO!UpTQRVK!GN!MGOPnPUTLPGQK!UGJjO!rGPO!LpV!JKVN]K!TJLpGNPLl!LG!GSVNTLV

LpV!VtJPSMVQLH

%/E.8+E+@+/.E9CE.+(+-89/+E9-+&$.%9/$(E-&92(+)7

7Q!LpV! VrVQL!Gn!LVjVSpGQV! GSVNTLPGQTj! SNGkjVMK`!OPKUGQQVUL!LpV! UGQLNGj! STQVj!kl!NVMGrPQR! LpV! SjJR!nNGM!LpV

3D#58! F&$#2$! PQ! &TQTOTI! qTjj! vTUsH! ! AV! NVUGMMVQO! LpTL! lGJ! OVMGQKLNTLV! OPKUGQQVULPQR! LpV! SpGQVK! GQ

PQKLTjjTLPGQ!Gn!LpV!KlKLVMH!!6G!QGL!OPKUGQQVUL!LpV!SpGQV!UGQQVULPGQ!PQKPOV!LpV!&GQLNGj!@TQVjH!!6GPQR!KG!qPjj!NVKJjL

PQ!LpV!jGKK!Gn!lGJN!SpGQV!jPQVKH!!7n!LpV!NVRJjTN!SpGQV!qGNsK!UGNNVULjl!TnLVN!LpV!&GQLNGj!@TQVjEpTK!kVVQ!OPKUGQQVULVO

nNGM!LpV!SpGQV!jPQVK`!LpV!&GQLNGj!@TQVj!pTK!T!SNGkjVM!TQO!KpGJjO!kV!NVLJNQVO!nGN!NVSTPNH!!7n!JSGQ!OPKUGQQVULPGQ!Gn

LpV!&GQLNGj!@TQVj`!LpVNV!PK!KLPjj!T!SNGkjVM!GQ!LpV!jPQV`!QGLPnl!LpV!LVjVSpGQV!UGMSTQl!LpTL!LpVl!pTrV!T!SNGkjVM!TQO

NVtJVKL!SNGMSL!NVSTPN!KVNrPUVH!!4pV!JKVN!MTl!QGL!JQOVN!TQl!UPNUJMKLTQUVK!FPQ!GN!GJL!Gn!qTNNTQLlI!TLLVMSL!TQl

KVNrPUV!GN!NVSTPNK!LG!LpV!KlKLVMH!!7L!MJKL!kV!NVLJNQVO!LG!LpV!nTULGNl!GN!TQ!TJLpGNPmVO!KVNrPUV!TRVQUl!nGN!Tjj!NVSTPNKH

C11E-$&.E*:E/9.%1+

4pPK!VtJPSMVQL!UGMSjPVK!qPLp!@TNL!>2!Gn!LpV!B&&!NJjVKH!'Q!LpV!nNGQL!UGrVN!Gn!LpPK!VtJPSMVQL!PK!T!jTkVj!LpTL

UGQLTPQK`!TMGQR!GLpVN!PQnGNMTLPGQ`!LpV!B&&!NVRPKLNTLPGQ!QJMkVN!TQO!NPQRVN!VtJPrTjVQUV!QJMkVN!F3)9I!nGN!LpPK

VtJPSMVQLH!7n!NVtJVKLVO`!LpPK!PQnGNMTLPGQ!MJKL!kV!SNGrPOVO!LG!LpV!LVjVSpGQV!UGMSTQlH

4pPK!VtJPSMVQL!JKVK!LpV!nGjjGqPQR!vTUsKc

$Q!3D#58!PK!JKVO!LG!UGQQVUL!LpPK!VtJPSMVQL!LG!LpV!LVjVSpGQV!QVLqGNsH

4pV!3)9!PK!JKVO!LG!OVLVNMPQV!LpV!tJTQLPLl!Gn!OVrPUVK!qpPUp!MTl!kV!UGQQVULVO!LG!LpV!LVjVSpGQV!jPQVH!)oUVKKPrV

3)9K!GQ!LpV!LVjVSpGQV!jPQV!MTl!NVKJjL!PQ!LpV!OVrPUVK!QGL!NPQRPQR!PQ!NVKSGQKV!LG!TQ!PQUGMPQR!UTjjH!7Q!MGKL`!kJL!QGL

Tjj!TNVTK`!LpV!KJM!Gn!LpV!3)9K!KpGJjO!QGL!VoUVVO!nPrV!F,H"IH!4G!kV!UVNLTPQ!Gn!LpV!QJMkVN!Gn!OVrPUVK!LpTL!MTl!kV

UGQQVULVO!LG!LpV!jPQV`!TK!OVLVNMPQVO!kl!LpV!LGLTj!3)9K`!UGQLTUL!LpV!LVjVSpGQV!UGMSTQl!LG!OVLVNMPQV!LpV!MToPMJM

3)9!nGN!LpV!UTjjPQR!TNVTH

7n!LpPK!VtJPSMVQL!UTJKVK!pTNM!LG!LpV!LVjVSpGQV!QVLqGNs`!LpV!LVjVSpGQV!UGMSTQl!qPjj!QGLPnl!lGJ!PQ!TOrTQUV!LpTL

LVMSGNTNl!OPKUGQLPQJTQUV!Gn!KVNrPUV!MTl!kV!NVtJPNVOH!7n!TOrTQUV!QGLPUV!PK!QGL!SNTULPUTj`!LpV!LVjVSpGQV!UGMSTQl

qPjj!QGLPnl!LpV!UJKLGMVN!TK!KGGQ!TK!SGKKPkjVH!$jKG`!lGJ!qPjj!kV!TOrPKVO!Gn!lGJN!NPRpL!LG!nPjV!T!UGMSjTPQL!qPLp!LpV

B&&!Pn!lGJ!kVjPVrV!QVUVKKTNlH

4pV!LVjVSpGQV!UGMSTQl!MTl!MTsV!UpTQRVK!PQ!PLK!nTUPjPLPVK`!VtJPSMVQL`!GSVNTLPGQK`!GN!SNGUVOJNVK!LpTL!UGJjO!TnnVUL

LpV!GSVNTLPGQ!Gn!LpV!VtJPSMVQLH!7n!LpPK!pTSSVQK`!LpV!LVjVSpGQV!UGMSTQl!qPjj!SNGrPOV!TOrTQUV!QGLPUV!PQ!GNOVN!nGN

lGJ!LG!MTsV!LpV!QVUVKKTNl!MGOPnPUTLPGQK!PQ!GNOVN!LG!MTPQLTPQ!JQPQLVNNJSLVO!KVNrPUVH

7n!LNGJkjV!PK!VoSVNPVQUVO!qPLp!LpPK!VtJPSMVQL`!SjVTKV!UGQLTUL!LpV!MTQJnTULJNVN!nGN!NVSTPN!TQO!qTNNTQLl!PQnGNMTLPGQH

7n!LpV!LNGJkjV!PK!UTJKPQR!pTNM!LG!LpV!LVjVSpGQV!QVLqGNs`!LpV!LVjVSpGQV!UGMSTQl!MTl!NVtJVKL!lGJ!NVMGrV!LpV

VtJPSMVQL!nNGM!LpV!QVLqGNs!JQLPj!LpV!SNGkjVM!PK!NVKGjrVOH

4pVNV! TNV! QG! JKVN! KVNrPUVTkjV! UGMSGQVQLK! PQ! LpPK! SNGOJUL`! TQO! Tjj! QVUVKKTNl! NVSTPNK! MJKL! kV! MTOV! kl! LpV

MTQJnTULJNVNH!'LpVN!NVSTPN!MVLpGOK!MTl!PQrTjPOTLV!LpV!B&&!NVRPKLNTLPGQ!GQ!LpPK!SNGOJULH

4pPK!VtJPSMVQL!UTQQGL!kV!JKVO!GQ!LVjVSpGQV!UGMSTQlaSNGrPOVO!UGPQ!KVNrPUVH!&GQQVULPGQ!LG!@TNLl!%PQV!0VNrPUV!PK

KJkvVUL!LG!KLTLV!LTNPnnKH

4pPK!VtJPSMVQL!PK!pVTNPQRaTPO!UGMSTLPkjVH

ApVQ!SNGRNTMMPQR!GN!MTsPQR!LVKL!UTjjK!LG!TQ!VMVNRVQUl!QJMkVN`!kNPVnjl!VoSjTPQ!LG!LpV!OPKSTLUpVN!LpV!NVTKGQ!nGN

LpV!UTjjH!@VNnGNM!KJUp!TULPrPLPVK!PQ!LpV!GnnaSVTs!pGJNKd!KJUp!TK!VTNjl!MGNQPQR!GN!jTLV!VrVQPQRH

– 173 –

1$/$;%$/E;+-$&.)+/.E9CE19))=/%1$.%9/7

Q;91RE7.$.+)+/.

/9.%1+

4pV!&TQTOPTQ!6VSTNLMVQL!Gn!&GMMJQPUTLPGQK!jTkVj!POVQLPnPVK!UVNLPnPVO!VtJPSMVQLH!4pPK!UVNLPnPUTLPGQ!MVTQK!LpTL

LpV!VtJPSMVQL!MVVLK!UVNLTPQ!LVjVUGMMJQPUTLPGQK!QVLqGNs!SNGLVULPrV`!GSVNTLPGQTj!TQO!KTnVLl!NVtJPNVMVQLKH!4pV

6VSTNLMVQL!OGVK!QGL!RJTNTQLVV!LpV!VtJPSMVQL!qPjj!GSVNTLV!LG!LpV!JKVN]K!KTLPKnTULPGQH

.VnGNV!PQKLTjjPQR!LpPK!VtJPSMVQL`!JKVNK!KpGJjO!VQKJNV!LpTL!PL!PK!SVNMPKKPkjV!LG!kV!UGQQVULVO!LG!LpV!nTUPjPLPVK!Gn!LpV

jGUTj! LVjVUGMMJQPUTLPGQK! UGMSTQlH! 4pV! VtJPSMVQL! MJKL! TjKG! kV! PQKLTjjVO! JKPQR! TQ! TUUVSLTkjV! MVLpGO! Gn

UGQQVULPGQH!7Q!KGMV!UTKVK`!LpV!UGMSTQl]K!PQKPOV!qPNPQR!TKKGUPTLVO!qPLp!T!KPQRjV!jPQV!PQOPrPOJTj!KVNrPUV!MTl!kV

VoLVQOVO!kl!MVTQK!Gn!UVNLPnPVO!UGQQVULGN!TKKVMkjl!FLVjVSpGQV!VoLVQKPGQ!UGNOIH!4pV!UJKLGMVN!KpGJjO!kV!TqTNV

LpTL!UGMSjPTQUV!qPLp!LpV!TkGrV!UGQOPLPGQK!MTl!QGL!SNVrVQL!OVRNTOTLPGQ!Gn!KVNrPUV!PQ!KGMV!KPLJTLPGQKH

3VSTPNK!LG!UVNLPnPVO!VtJPSMVQL!KpGJjO!kV!MTOV!kl!TQ!TJLpGNPmVO!&TQTOPTQ!MTPQLVQTQUV!nTUPjPLl!OVKPRQTLVO!kl!LpV

KJSSjPVNH!$Ql!NVSTPNK!GN!TjLVNTLPGQK!MTOV!kl!LpV!JKVN!LG!LpPK!VtJPSMVQL`!GN!VtJPSMVQL!MTjnJQULPGQK`!MTl!RPrV!LpV

LVjVUGMMJQPUTLPGQK!UGMSTQl!UTJKV!LG!NVtJVKL!LpV!JKVN!LG!OPKUGQQVUL!LpV!VtJPSMVQLH

/KVNK!KpGJjO!VQKJNV!nGN!LpVPN!GqQ!SNGLVULPGQ!LpTL!LpV!VjVULNPUTj!RNGJQO!UGQQVULPGQK!Gn!LpV!SGqVN!JLPjPLl`!LVjVSpGQV

jPQVK! TQO! PQLVNQTj! MVLTjjPU! qTLVN! SPSV! KlKLVM`! Pn! SNVKVQL`! TNV! UGQQVULVO! LGRVLpVNH! 4pPK! SNVUTJLPGQ! MTl! kV

STNLPUJjTNjl!PMSGNLTQL!PQ!NJNTj!TNVTKH

1SMLJFKT!! /KVN!KpGJjO! QGL!TLLVMSL! LG!MTsV! KJUp!UGQQVULPGQK!LpVMKVjrVK`!kJL!KpGJjO!UGQLTUL!LpV!TSSNGSNPTLV

VjVULNPU!PQKSVULPGQ!TJLpGNPLl`!GN!VjVULNPUPTQ`!TK!TSSNGSNPTLVH

4pV!%GTO!9JMkVN!F%9I!TKKPRQVO!LG!VTUp!LVNMPQTj!OVrPUV!OVQGLVK!LpV!SVNUVQLTRV!Gn!LpV!LGLTj!jGTO!LG!kV!UGQQVULVO

LG!T!LVjVSpGQV!jGGS!qpPUp!PK!JKVO!kl!LpV!OVrPUV`!LG!SNVrVQL!GrVNjGTOPQRH!4pV!LVNMPQTLPGQ!GQ!T!jGGS!MTl!UGQKPKL!Gn

TQl!UGMkPQTLPGQ!Gn!OVrPUVK!KJkvVUL!GQjl!LG!LpV!NVtJPNVMVQL!LpTL!LpV!LGLTj!Gn!LpV!%GTO!9JMkVNK!Gn!Tjj!LpV!OVrPUVK

OGVK!QGL!VoUVVO!5""H

$@%7

%]wLPtJVLLV!OJ!MPQPKLxNV!OVK!&GMMJQPUTLPGQK!OJ!&TQTOT!POVQLPnPV!jV!MTLwNPVj!pGMGjGRJwH!!&VLLV!wLPtJVLLV!UVNLPnPV

tJV! jV! MTLwNPVj! VKL! UGQnGNMV! y! UVNLTPQVK! QGNMVK! OV! SNGLVULPGQ`! O]VoSjGPLTLPGQ! VL! OV! KwUJNPLw! OVK! NwKVTJo! OV

LwjwUGMMJQPUTLPGQKH! %V! MPQPKLxNV! Q]TKKJNV! LGJLVnGPK! STK! tJV! jV! MTLwNPVj! nGQULPGQQVNT! y! jT! KTLPKnTULPGQ! OV

j]JLPjPKTLVJNH

$rTQL! O]PQKLTjjVN! UV! MTLwNPVj`! j]JLPjPKTLVJN! OGPL! K]TKKJNVN! tJ]Pj! VKL! SVNMPK! OV! jV! NTUUGNOVN! TJo! PQKLTjjTLPGQK! OV

j]VQLNVSNPKV! jGUTjV! OV! LwjwUGMMJQPUTLPGQKH! %V! MTLwNPVj! OGPL! wRTjVMVQL! zLNV! PQKLTjjw! VQ! KJPrTQL! JQV! MwLpGOV

TUUVSLwV!OV!NTUUGNOVMVQLH!6TQK!UVNLTPQK!UTK`!jVK!nPjK!PQLwNPVJNK!OV!j]VQLNVSNPKV!JLPjPKwK!SGJN!JQ!KVNrPUV!PQOPrPOJVj!y

jT!jPRQV!JQPtJV!SVJrVQL!zLNV!SNGjGQRwK!TJ!MGlVQ!O]JQ!OPKSGKPLPn!pGMGjGRJw!OV!NTUUGNOVMVQL!FUGNOGQ!SNGjGQRTLVJN

LwjwSpGQPtJV!PQLVNQVIH!%]TkGQQw!QV!OGPL!STK!GJkjPVN!tJ]Pj!VKL!SGKKPkjV!tJV!jT!UGQnGNMPLw!TJo!UGQOPLPGQK!wQGQUwVK

UPaOVKKJK!Q]VMSxUpVL!STK!jT!OwRNTOTLPGQ!OJ!KVNrPUV!OTQK!UVNLTPQVK!KPLJTLPGQKH!$ULJVjjVMVQL`!jVK!VQLNVSNPKVK!OV

LwjwUGMMJQPUTLPGQK!QV!SVNMVLLVQL!STK!tJV!j]GQ!NTUUGNOV!jVJN!MTLwNPVj!TJo!!SNPKVK!O]TkGQQwK`!KTJn!OTQK!jVK!UTK

SNVUPK!SNwrJK!STN!jVK!LTNPnK!STNLPUJjPVNK!OV!UVK!VQLNVSNPKVKH

%VK!NwSTNTLPGQK!OJ!MTLwNPVj!pGMGjGRJw!OGPrVQL!zLNV!VnnVULJwVK!STK!JQ!UVQLNV!O]VQLNVLPVQ!UTQTOPVQ!TJLGNPKw!OwKPRQw

STN!jV!nGJNQPKKVJNH!%T!UGMSTRQPV!OV!LwjwUGMMJQPUTLPGQK!SVJL!OVMTQOVN!y!j]JLPjPKTLVJN!OV!OwkNTQUpVN!JQ!TSSTNVPj!y

jT!KJPLV!OV!NwSTNTLPGQK!GJ!OV!MGOPnPUTLPGQK!VnnVULJwVK!STN!j]JLPjPKTLVJN!GJ!y!UTJKV!OV!MTJrTPK!nGQULPGQQVMVQLH

@GJN!KT! SNGSNV! SNGLVULPGQ`! j]JLPjPKTLVJN!OGPL!K]TKKJNVN! tJV! LGJK! jVK!nPjK!OV!MPKV! VQ! LVNNV! OV!jT!KGJNUV!O]wQVNRPV

wjVULNPtJV`!OVK!jPRQVK!LwjwSpGQPtJVK!OV!NwKVTJ!OV!UGQOJPLVK!O]VTJ!K]Pj!l!VQ!T`!KGPVQL!NTUUGNOwK!VQKVMkjVH!&VLLV

SNwUTJLPGQ!VKL!STNLPUJjPxNVMVQL!PMSGNLTQLV!OTQK!jVK!NwRPGQK!NJNTjVKH

$UHVLJWWHXHKLTE!%]JLPjPKTLVJN!QV!OGPL!STK!LVQLVN!OV!nTPNV!UVK!NTUUGNOVMVQLK!jJPaMzMVd!Pj!OGPL!TrGPN!NVUGJNK!y!JQ

KVNrPUV!O]PQKSVULPGQ!OVK!PQKLTjjTLPGQK!wjVULNPtJVK`!GJ!y!JQ!wjVULNPUPVQ`!KVjGQ!jV!UTKH

%]PQOPUV!OV!UpTNRV!F7&I!TKKPRQw!y!UpTtJV!OPKSGKPLPn!LVNMPQTj!SGJN!wrPLVN!LGJLV!KJNUpTNRV!PQOPtJV!jV!SGJNUVQLTRV!OV

jT!UpTNRV!LGLTjV!tJP!SVJL!zLNV!NTUUGNOw!y!JQ!UPNUJPL!!LwjwSpGQPtJV!kGJUjw!JLPjPKw!STN!UV!OPKSGKPLPnH!%T!LVNMPQTPKGQ!OJ

UPNUJPL!kGJUjw! SVJL!zLNV!UGQKLPLJwV! OV!Q]PMSGNLV!tJVjjV! UGMkPQTPKGQ!OV!OPKSGKPLPnK`! SGJNrJ! tJV!jT!KGMMV! OVK

PQOPUVK!OV!UpTNRV!OV!j]VQKVMkjV!OVK!OPKSGKPLPnK!QV!OwSTKKV!STK!5""H

– 174 –

DIP SWITCH TABLES

DIP SWITCH TABLES FOR ADDRESSABLE POLLING LOOP DEVICES

4208 ZONE EXPANDER

DIP

SHOWN SET FOR

ID 10 (A)

SIDE VIEW

(UP)

12345

DN UP

POS.1: LOOPS 1 & 2

RESPONSE TIME:

W/TABLE FAST SLOW

AUPDN

BDNUP

4190WH ZONE EXPANDER

4192D/4192SDT/4192CP

SMOKE DETECTORS

APPLIES TO TABLE A UPLY

SHOWN SET FOR ID 10

SIDE VIEW

(DN)

12345678

POS.1: MUST BE DOWN WITH TABLE: A B

POS.1 MUST BE: DN UP

SIDE VIEW

(DN)

THIS TABLE FOR DIPS

WITH WORD “DN”

(“—” = DN) A

DEVICE

DIP SWITCH POSITION

2345

10-16 — — — UP

17-24 — — UP —

25-32 — — UP UP

33-40 — UP — —

41-48 — UP — UP

49-56 — UP UP —

57-64 — UP UP UP

THIS TABLE FOR DIPS

WITH WORD “UP”

(“—” = DN)

DIP

APPLIES TO TABLE A & B UPLY

SHOWN SET FOR ID 10 (A)

12345678

SIDE VIEW

(UP)

DIP

DEVICE

DIP SWITCH POSITION

2345

10-16 UP UP UP —

17-24 UP UP — UP

25-32 UP UP — —

33-40 UP — UP UP

41-48 UP — UP —

49-56 UP — — UP

57-64 UP — — —

DEVICE DIP SWITCH POSITION

ID 2345678

10 –––

UP –UP –

11 –––UP –UP UP

12 –––UP UP ––

13 –––

UP UP –UP

14 –––UP UP UP –

15 –––UP UP UP UP

16 ––UP ––––

17 ––

UP –––UP

18 ––UP ––UP –

19 ––

UP ––UP UP

20 ––UP –UP ––

21 ––UP –UP –UP

22 ––UP –UP UP –

23 ––

UP –UP UP UP

24 ––UP UP –––

25 ––UP UP ––UP

26 ––UP UP –UP –

27 ––UP UP –UP UP

28 ––UP UP UP ––

29 ––

UP UP UP –UP

30 ––UP UP UP UP –

31 ––UP UP UP UP UP

32 –UP –––––

33 –UP ––––UP

34 –UP –––UP –

35 –UP –––UP UP

36 –UP ––UP ––

37 –UP ––UP –UP

38 –UP ––UP UP –

39 –UP ––UP UP UP

40 –UP –UP –––

41 –UP –UP ––UP

42 –UP –UP –UP –

43 –UP –UP –UP UP

44 –UP –UP UP ––

45 –UP –UP UP –UP

46 –UP –UP UP UP –

47 –UP –UP UP UP UP

48 –UP UP ––––

49 –UP UP –––UP

50 –UP UP ––UP –

51 –UP UP ––UP UP

52 –UP UP –UP ––

53 –UP UP –UP –UP

54 –UP UP –UP UP –

55 –UP UP –UP UP UP

56 –UP UP UP –––

57 –UP UP UP ––UP

58 –UP UP UP –UP –

59 –UP UP UP –UP UP

60 –UP UP UP UP ––

61 –UP UP UP UP –UP

62 –UP UP UP UP UP –

63 –UP UP UP UP UP UP

64 UP ––– –––

65 UP ––– ––UP

66 UP ––– –UP –

67 UP ––– –UP UP

68 UP –––UP ––

69 UP –––UP –UP

70 UP –––UP UP –

71 UP –––UP UP UP

72 UP ––UP –––

73 UP ––UP ––UP

74 UP ––UP –UP –

75 UP ––UP –UP UP

76 UP ––UP UP ––

77 UP ––UP UP –UP

78 UP ––UP UP UP –

79 UP ––UP UP UP UP

80 UP –UP ––––

81 UP –UP –––UP

82 UP –UP ––UP –

83 UP –UP ––UP UP

84 UP –UP –UP ––

85 UP –UP –UP –UP

86 UP –UP –UP UP –

87 UP –UP –UP UP UP

88 UP –UP UP –––

89 UP –UP UP ––UP

BIT

VALUE: 64 32 16 8 4 2 1

THIS TABLE FOR DIPS WITH

WORD "DN"

(“–” = DN) A

DEVICE DIP SWITCH POSITION

ID 2345678

10 UP UP UP –UP –UP

11 UP UP UP –UP ––

12 UP UP UP ––UP UP

13 UP UP UP ––UP –

14 UP UP UP –––UP

15 UP UP UP ––––

16 UP UP –UP UP UP UP

17 UP UP –UP UP UP –

18 UP UP –UP UP –UP

19 UP UP –UP UP ––

20 UP UP –UP –UP UP

21 UP UP –UP –UP –

22 UP UP –UP ––UP

23 UP UP –UP –––

24 UP UP ––UP UP UP

25 UP UP ––UP UP –

26 UP UP ––UP –UP

27 UP UP ––UP ––

28 UP UP –– –UP UP

29 UP UP –– –UP –

30 UP UP ––––UP

31 UP UP –––––

32 UP –UP UP UP UP UP

33 UP –UP UP UP UP –

34 UP –UP UP UP –UP

35 UP –UP UP UP ––

36 UP –UP UP –UP UP

37 UP –UP UP –UP –

38 UP –UP UP ––UP

39 UP –UP UP –––

40 UP –UP –UP UP UP

41 UP –UP –UP UP –

42 UP –UP –UP –UP

43 UP –UP –UP ––

44 UP –UP ––UP UP

45 UP –UP ––UP –

46 UP –UP –– –UP

47 UP –UP –– ––

48 UP ––UP UP UP UP

49 UP ––UP UP UP –

50 UP ––UP UP –UP

51 UP ––UP UP ––

52 UP ––UP –UP UP

53 UP ––UP –UP –

54 UP ––UP ––UP

55 UP ––UP –––

56 UP –– –UP UP UP

57 UP –– –UP UP –

58 UP –– –UP –UP

59 UP –– –UP ––

60 UP –– – –UP UP

61 UP –– – –UP –

62 UP –––––UP

63 UP ––––––

64 –UP UP UP UP UP UP

65 –UP UP UP UP UP –

66 –UP UP UP UP –UP

67 –UP UP UP UP ––

68 –UP UP UP –UP UP

69 –UP UP UP –UP –

70 –UP UP UP ––UP

71 –UP UP UP –––

72 –UP UP –UP UP UP

73 –UP UP –UP UP –

74 –UP UP –UP –UP

75 –UP UP –UP ––

76 –UP UP ––UP UP

77 –UP UP ––UP –

78 –UP UP –– –UP

79 –UP UP –– ––

80 –UP –UP UP UP UP

81 –UP –UP UP UP –

82 –UP –UP UP –UP

83 –UP –UP UP ––

84 –UP –UP –UP UP

85 –UP –UP –UP –

86 –UP –UP ––UP

87 –UP –UP –––

88 –UP ––UP UP UP

89 –UP ––UP UP –

BIT

VALUE: 64 32 16 8 4 2 1

THIS TABLE FOR DIPS WITH

WORD "UP"

(“–” = DN) B

– 175 –

DIP SWITCH TABLES FOR POLLING LOOP DEVICES

4275 PIR

MIRROR

DIP

SHOWN SET FOR

ID 10 (A)

SIDE VIEW

(UP)

1234567

POS 6: UP (A), DN (B) = INST. MODE

DN (A), UP (B) = PULSE COUNT

POS. 7: UP (A), DN (B) = WALK TEST

DN (A), UP (B) = W/T DISABLE

}

4194 REED CONTACT

(SURFACE MOUNT)

DIP

SHOWN SET FOR

ID 10

123456

—

4278 PIR

MIRROR

DIP

SHOWN SET FOR ID 10 SIDE VIEW

(

)

12345678

POS 7: UP = NORMAL MODE

DN = INSTANT MODE

POS. 8: UP = W/T DISABLE

DN = WALK TEST

}

+ —

SIDE VIEW

(

)

THIS TABLE FOR DIPS

WITH WORD “DN” A

DEVICE

DIP SWITCH POSITION

12345

10 — UP — UP —

11 — UP — UP UP

12 — UP UP — —

13 — UP UP — UP

14 — UPUPUP—

15 — UPUPUPUP

16 UP————

17 UP — — — UP

18 UP — — UP —

19 UP — — UP UP

20 UP — UP — —

21 UP — UP — UP

22 UP — UP UP —

23 UP — UP UP UP

24 UP UP — — —

25 UP UP — — UP

26 UP UP — UP —

27 UP UP — UP UP

28 UP UP UP — —

29 UP UP UP — UP

30 UP UP UP UP —

31 UP UP UP UP UP

DEVICE

DIP SWITCH POSITION

123456

10 UP UP — UP — UP

11 UP UP — UP — —

12 UP UP — — UP UP

13 UP UP — — UP —

14 UP UP — — — UP

15 UP UP — — — —

16 UP — UPUPUPUP

17 UP — UP UP UP —

18 UP — UPUP—UP

19 UP — UP UP — —

20 UP — UP — UP UP

21 UP — UP — UP —

22 UP — UP — — UP

23 UP—UP———

24 UP — — UP UP UP

25 UP — — UP UP —

26 UP — — UP — UP

27 UP — — UP — —

28 UP — — — UP UP

29 UP — — — UP —

30 UP————UP

31 UP—— ———

32 — UPUPUPUPUP

33 — UPUPUPUP—

34 — UPUPUP—UP

35 — UPUPUP— —

36 — UP UP — UP UP

37 — UP UP — UP —

38 — UP UP — — UP

39 —UPUP———

40 — UP — UP UP UP

41 — UP — UP UP —

42 — UP — UP — UP

43 — UP — UP — —

44 — UP — — UP UP

45 — UP — — UP —

46 — UP — — — UP

47 —UP————

48 — — UP UP UP UP

49 — — UP UP UP —

50 — — UP UP — UP

51 — — UP UP — —

52 — — UP — UP UP

53 — — UP — UP —

54 — — UP — — UP

55 — —UP———

56 — — — UPUPUP

57 — — — UP UP —

58 — — —UP—UP

59 — — — UP — —

60 — — — — UP UP

61 ————UP—

62 —————UP

63 — — ————

BIT

VALUE: 32 16 8 4 2 1

DEVICE

DIP SWITCH POSITION

123456

10 — — UP — UP —

11 — — UP — UP UP

12 — — UP UP — —

13 — — UP UP — UP

14 — — UP UP UP —

15 — — UP UP UP UP

16 —Up————

17 — UP — — — UP

18 — UP — — UP —

19 — UP — — UP UP

20 — UP — UP — —

21 — UP — UP — UP

22 — UP — UP UP —

23 — UP — UP UP UP

24 —UPUP———

25 — UP UP — — UP

26 — UP UP — UP —

27 — UP UP — UP UP

28 — UPUPUP— —

29 — UPUPUP—UP

30 — UPUPUPUP—

31 — UPUPUPUPUP

32 UP—— ———

33 UP — — — — UP

34 UP — — — UP —

35 UP — — — UP UP

36 UP — — UP — —

37 UP — — UP — UP

38 UP — — UP UP —

39 UP — — UP UP UP

40 UP—UP———

41 UP — UP — — UP

42 UP — UP — UP —

43 UP — UP — UP UP

44 UP — UP UP — —

45 UP — UP UP — UP

46 UP — UP UP UP —

47 UP — UP UP UP UP

48 UP UP — — — —

49 UP UP — — — UP

50 UP UP — — UP —

51 Up UP — — UP UP

52 UP UP — UP — —

53 UP UP — UP — UP

54 UP UP — UP UP —

55 UP UP — UP UP UP

56 UP UP UP — — —

57 UP UP UP — — UP

58 UP UP UP — UP —

59 UP UP UP — UP UP

60 UP UP UP UP — —

61 UP UP UP UP — UP

62 UP UP UP UP UP —

63 UP UP UP UP UP UP

BIT

VALUE: 32 16 8 4 2 1

THIS TABLE FOR DIPS

WITH WORD “UP” B

DEVICE

DIP SWITCH POSITION

12345

10 UP — UP — UP

11 UP — UP — —

12 UP — — UP UP

13 UP — — UP —

14 UP — — — UP

15 UP————

16 — UPUPUPUP

17 — UPUPUP—

18 — UP UP — UP

19 — UP UP — —

20 — UP — UP UP

21 — UP — UP —

22 — UP — — UP

23 — UP — — —

24 — — UP UP UP

25 — — UP UP —

26 — — UP — UP

27 — — UP — —

28 — — — UP UP

29 — — — UP —

30 ————UP

31 —————

BIT

VALUE: 16 8 4 2 1

– 176 –

DIP SWITCH TABLES FOR 5700 RF SYSTEM WIRELESS DEVICES

HOUSE ID (1 SHOWN)

123456

12345

12345678

12345678910

5706/5707 SMOKE

DETECTORTRANSMITTER

5775 PIR

DETECTOR/TRANSMITTER

HOUSE ID

SWITCH SETTING FOR ALL

DEVICES EXCEPT 5716

5727 KEYPAD

DEVICE

DIP SWITCH POSITION

12345

UP UP UP UP —

2UPUPUP—UP

3UPUPUP——

4 UP UP — UP UP

5UPUP—UP—

6UPUP——UP

7UPUP———

8 UP — UP UP UP

9 UP — UP UP —

10 UP — UP — UP

11 UP — UP — —

12 UP — — UP UP

13 UP — — UP —

14 UP — — — UP

15 UP————

16 — UPUPUPUP

17 — UPUPUP—

18 — UP UP — UP

19 — UP UP — —

20 — UP — UP UP

21 — UP — UP —

22 — UP — — UP

23 — UP — — —

24 — — UP UP UP

25 — — UP UP —

26 — — UP — UP

27 — — UP — —

28 — — — UP UP

29 — — — UP —

30 ————UP

31 —————

BIT

VALUE: 16 8 4 2 1

DIP

SIDE

VIEW (

)

SIDE

VIEW (

)

SIDE

VIEW (

)

SIDE

VIEW

(

)

5701 PANIC TRANSMITTER

POS.6 UP= XMTR ID 62

DN= XMTR ID 63

DIP

XMTR ID

FIXED AT

“00”

XMTR ID

(48 SHOWN)

XMTR

DIP SWITCH POSITION

678

48 UP UP UP

49 UP UP —

50 UP — UP

51 UP — —

52 — UP UP

53 — UP —

54 — — UP

55 — — —

XMTR

DIP SWITCH POSITION

6789

32 UP UP UP UP

33 UP UP UP —

34 UP UP — UP

35 UP UP — —

36 UP — UP UP

37 UP — UP —

38 UP — — UP

39 UP———

40 — UPUPUP

41 — UP UP —

42 — UP — UP

43 — UP — —

44 — — UP UP

45 — — UP —

46 — — — UP

47 ————

}

DIP

HOUSE ID (1 SHOWN)

UP = PULSE COUNT

— = INST. MODE

XMTR ID

(32 SHOWN)

}

MIRROR

DIP

XMTR

DIP SWITCH POSITION

67891011

1 UPUPUPUPUP —

2 UPUPUPUP — UP

3 UPUPUPUP — —

4 UP UP UP — UP UP

5UPUPUP—UP—

6UPUPUP——UP

7UPUPUP———

8 UP UP — UP UP UP

9 UP UP — UP UP —

10 UP UP — UP — UP

11 UP UP — UP — —

12 UP UP — — UP UP

13 UP UP — — UP —

14 UP UP — — — UP

15 UP UP — — — —

16 UP — UPUPUPUP

17 UP — UP UP UP —

18 UP — UP UP — UP

19 UP — UP UP — —

20 UP — UP — UP UP

21 UP — UP — UP —

22 UP—UP— —UP

23 UP — UP — — —

24 UP — — UP UP UP

25 UP — — UP UP —

26 UP — — UP — UP

27 UP — — UP — —

28 UP — — — UP UP

29 UP — — — UP —

30 UP————UP

31 UP—————

32 — UPUPUPUPUP

BIT

VALUE: 32 16 8 4 2 1

XMTR

DIP SWITCH POSITION

67891011

33 — UPUPUPUP —

34 — UPUPUP — UP

35 — UPUPUP — —

36 — UP UP — UP UP

37 — UP UP — UP —

38 — UP UP — — UP

39 — UP UP — — —

40 — UP — UP UP UP

41 — UP — UP UP —

42 — UP — UP — UP

43 — UP — UP — —

44 — UP — — UP UP

45 —UP— —UP—

46 — UP — — — UP

47 — UP — — — —

48 — — UP UP UP UP

49 — — U UP UP —

50 — — UP UP — UP

51 — — UP UP — —

52 — — UP — UP UP

53 — — UP — UP —

54 — — UP — — UP

55 — — UP — — —

56 — — — UP UP UP

57 — — — UP UP —

58 — — — UP — UP

59 — — — UP — —

60 — — — — UP UP

61 ————UP—

62 —————UP

63 ——————

BIT

VALUE 32 16 8 4 2 1

5715

UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER 5711/5711WM

DOOR/WINDOW TRANSMITTER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

XMTR ID

(33 SHOWN)

}

POS.12: UP = N.O.

— = N.C

(Avoid ID 32-37 with N.O.)

SIDE

VIEW

(

)

}

POS.1: UP = NORMAL RESPONSE

DN = FAST RESPONSE

POS. 2:UP = NO COVER TAMPER

DN = COVER TAMPER (use N.C. setting)

DIP

TERMINAL

BLOCK

DIP

HOUSE ID (1 SHOWN)

HOUSE

DIP SWITCH POSITION

54321

1 — UP UP UP UP

2 UP — UP UP UP

3——UPUPUP

4 UP UP — UP UP

5—UP—UPUP

6UP——UPUP

7 — — — UP UP

8UPUPUP—UP

9 — UP UP — UP

10 UP — UP — UP

11 — — UP — UP

12 UP UP — — UP

13 — UP — — UP

14 UP — — — UP

15 ————UP

16 UP UP UP UP —

17 — UPUPUP —

18 UP — UP UP —

19 — — UP UP —

20 UP UP — UP —

21 — UP — UP —

22 UP — — UP —

23 — — — UP —

24 UP UP UP — —

25 —— UP UP — —

26 UP — UP — —

27 — — UP — —

28 UP UP — — —

29 — UP — — —

30 UP————

31 —————

BIT

VALUE: 1 2 4 8 16

TRANSMITTER

DIP SWITCH POSITION

65432 1

1 — UP UP UP UP UP

2 UP — UP UP UP UP

3 — — UPUPUPUP

4 UP UP — UP UP UP

5—UP—UPUPUP

6UP——UPUPUP

7 — — — UP UP UP

8 UP UP UP — UP UP

9 — UP UP — UP UP

10 UP — UP — UP UP

11 — — UP — UP UP

12 UP UP — — UP UP

13 — UP — — UP UP

14 UP — — — UP UP

15 — — — — UP UP

16 UP UP UP UP — UP

17 — UPUPUP — UP

18 UP — UP UP — UP

19 — — UP UP — UP

20 UP UP — UP — UP

21 — UP — UP — UP

22 UP — — UP — UP

23 — — — UP — UP

24 UP UP UP — — UP

25 — UP UP — — UP

26 UP—UP— —UP

27 — — UP — — UP

28 UP UP — — — UP

29 — UP — — — UP

30 UP————UP

31 —————UP

32 UP UP UP UP UP —

33 — UPUPUPUP —

34 UP — UP UP UP —

35 — — UP UP UP —

36 UP UP — UP UP —

37 — UP — UP UP —

38 UP — — UP UP —

39 — — — UP UP —

40 UP UP UP — UP —

41 — UP UP — UP —

42 UP — UP — UP —

43 — — UP — UP —

44 UP UP — — UP —

45 —UP— —UP—

46 UP — — — UP —

47 ————UP—

48 UP UP UP UP — —

49 — UPUPUP — —

50 UP — UP UP — —

51 — — UP UP — —

52 UP UP — UP — —

53 — UP — UP — —

54 UP — — UP — —

55 — — — UP — —

56 UP UP UP — — —

57 — UP UP — — —

58 UP — UP — — —

59 — — UP — — —

60 UP UP — — — —

61 — UP — — — —

62 UP—————

63 ——————

BIT

VALUE: 1 2 4 8 16 32

654321

POS. 6: UP = N.O.

DN = N.C.

SW3

654321

XMTR ID (33 SHOWN)

HOUSE ID (1 SHOWN)

SW4

SIDE

VIEW (

)

DIP

SW4

SW3

TERMINALS

5716 DOOR/WINDOW TRANSMITTER

IMPORTANT

SET SWITCHES WITH

BATTERY REMOVED

For 5700 series transmitters not shown in this table, refer to the instructions accompanying each transmitter.

– 177 –

SUMMARY OF SYSTEM COMMANDS

+UHKLE(FYYJKYE1FXXSKGW

Q$OZNSE[H\ZSGEFKO\R

)rVQL!%GR!6PKSjTl!f!&GOV_{Y|!_!>"

)rVQL!%GR!@NPQL!f!&GOV!_!{Y|!_>5!F7QKLTjjVN!'QjlI

&jVTN!)rVQL!%GR!f!&GOV!_!Y!_!>:!F7QKLTjjVN!'QjlI

<JVHOHWWE7\WLHX

1FXXSKGW

1GJKV!7O!0QPnnVN!-GOVf&GOV!_!{Y|!_!:!F7QKLTjjVN!'QjlI

4NTQKMPLLVN!7O!4VKLf!&GOV!_!{Y|!_!#!F7QKLTjjVN!'QjlI

=Gb9G!=G!4VKLf&GOV!_!,!F4VKL!;VlI

=WHVE1FGHE1FXXSKGW

F$jSpT!sVlSTO!GQjlI

$OO!$!/KVN!&GOVf/KVN!&GOV!_!2_!9Vq!/KVN!9JMkVN!_!9Vq!/KVN]K!&GOV

&pTQRV!$!&GOVf/KVN!&GOV!_!2!_!/KVN!9JMkVN!_!9Vq!/KVN]K!&GOV

6VjVLV!$!/KVN]K!&GOVf+GJN!/KVN!&GOV!_!2!_!/KVN!9JMkVN!4G!.V!6VjVLVO!_!+GJN

&GOV!$RTPQ

(PVq!/KVN!&TSTkPjPLlf!/KVN]K!&GOV!_!^!_!^

0VL!3VTja4PMV!&jGUs!F7QKLTjjVN`!-TKLVN!'QjlIf&GOV!_!Y!_>#

$VXJKYECMK]LJFKW $NMPQR!$qTl )QLVN!&GOV!_!$qTl!{:|H

$NMPQR!0LTl )QLVN!&GOV!_!0LTl!{#|H

$NMPQR!7QKLTQL )QLVN!&GOV!_!7QKLTQL!{<|H

$NMPQR!-ToPMJM )QLVN!&GOV!_!-ToPMJM!{*|H

EJPUs!$NM /KV!Y!;Vl!7QKLVTO!'n!/KVN!&GOV!BGjjGqVO!.l!$Ql!'n

4pV!$kGrV!$NMPQR!-GOV!;VlKH

F$jSpT!sVlSTO!GQjlI =jGkTj!$NMPQR 7n!)QTkjVO!BGN!4pV!/KVN`!4pV!;VlSTO!APjj!6PKSjTl!$

@NGMSLH!$QKqVN!4pV!@NGMSLVO!EJVKLPGQK

6PKTNMPQR )QLVN!&GOV!_!'nn!{5|H

.lSTKKPQR! CGQVK )QLVN! &GOV! _! .lSTKK! {>|! _! CGQV! 9JMkVNH! 4G

$JLGMTLPUTjjl!.lSTKK!$jj!BTJjLVO!CGQVK`!/KV

EJPUs!.lSTKK XEJPUs!.lSTKKX!-VLpGOc!)QLVN!&GOV!_!.lSTKK!_!{Y|H

&pPMV!-GOV )QLVN! &GOV! _! &pPMV! {?|H! 4G! 4JNQ! &pPMV! -GOV! 'nn`

)QLVN!&GOV!_!&pPMV!$RTPQH

F$jSpT!sVlSTO!GQjlI @TNLPLPGQ!=GLGf /KVN!&GOV!_!^!_!@TNLPLPGQ!9JMkVN!"a2

='4'!1GMV!@TNLPLPGQf/KVN!&GOV!_!^!_!"

@TQPUK ^_5!CGQV!?,!F$!;VlI

^_Y!CGQV!??!!F.!;VlI

Y_#!!CGQV!?>!F&!;VlI

F$jSpT!sVlSTO!GQjlI (PVq!6GqQjGTOVO!-VKKTRVKf!@NVKK!"!BGN!,!0VUGQOK

6PKSjTl!$jj!CGQV!6VKUNPSLGNKf@NVKK!^!BGN!,!0VUGQOK

6PKSjTl!/KVN!0Vjn!1VjSf!1GjO!$Ql!;Vl!BGN!,!0VUGQOK

-VFYVSXXJKYE1FXXSKGW 0PLV!7QPLPTLVO!6GqQjGTOf/KVN!&GOV!_!Y!_!5

6PNVUL!APNV!6GqQjGTO!)QTkjVf!/KVN!&GOV!_!Y!_!,

)QLVN!@NGRNTM!-GOVf7QKLTjjVN!&GOV!_!2""

)oPL!@NGRNTM!-GOVf^??!'N!^?2

7]NHGMOJKYE1FXXSKGW

F$jSpT!sVlSTO!GQjlI

7QKLTjjVN!@NGRNTMMVO!0UpVOJjV!)rVQLKf7QKLTjjVN!&GOV!_!Y!_!2"

4VMSGNTNl!0UpVOJjV!)OPLPQRf/KVN!&GOV!_!Y!_!25!F7QKLTjjVN`!-TKLVN`!-TQTRVN

'QjlI

)oLVQO!&jGKPQR!APQOGqf/KVN!&GOV!_!Y!_!2:!F7QKLTjjVN`!-TKLVN`!-TQTRVN!'QjlI

)QO!/KVN!'JLSJL!6VrPUV!@NGRNTMMPQRf/KVN!&GOV!_!Y!_!2#

9MLZMLE;HUJ]HE1FKLVFO

F$jSpT!sVlSTO!GQjlI

$ULPrTLV!'JLSJL!6VrPUV!$K!@NGRNTMMVO!f/KVN!&GOV!_!Y!_!<5

$ULPrTLV!'JLSJL!6VrPUV!$K!@NGRNTMMVO!f/KVN!&GOV!_!Y!_!<:

$ULPrTLV!$UUVKK!3VjTl!BGN!&JNNVQL!@TNLPLPGQf/KVN!&GOV!_!"

$ULPrTLV!'JLSJL!6VrPUV!-TQJTjjlf/KVN!&GOV!_!Y<"H

– 178 –

SPECIFICATIONS

@%7.$E?"-^@%7.$E?"-=(E19/.&9(7

-N\WJ]SOT 5:a5b:XA!8!5*a5b:X1!8!#X6!F(704$!,"@I

5*a5b:XA!8!52X1!8!*H#X6!F(704$!,"@/%I

+OH]LVJ]SOT

('%4$=)!79@/4c! BNGM!$OVMUG!9GH!5#>5!@jJRa7Q!4NTQKnGNMVN!FJKV!5#>5&9!PQ!&TQTOTI!GN

*#""!LNTQKnGNMVN!FnGN!8a5"!PQKLTjjTLPGQKI!NTLVO!5>H,($&`!*"!($H

$%$3-!0'/96)3!'/4@/4c! 5"(6&a5#H2(6&`!:H2!TMSK!MToH`!F/%5":#`!/%>"?!PQKLTjjTLPGQKId!<,"M$

jVKK!TJoH!UJNNVQL!ONTq!F/%?2,!PQKLTjjTLPGQKIH

$/87%7$3+!@'A)3!'/4@/4c ?H>(6&a5#H2(6&`!<,"M$!MToH!!BGN!/%!PQKLTjjTLPGQK`!LpV!TUUVKKGNPVK

UGQQVULVO!LG!LpV!GJLSJL!MJKL!kV!/%!%PKLVO`!TQO!NTLVO!LG!GSVNTLV!PQ!LpV!TkGrV

rGjLTRV!NTQRVH

.$&;a/@!.$44)3+c! 5:(6&`!*$1!GN!<$1!RVj!UVjjH!!+/$0$!9@*a5:!F5:(`!*$1I!GN!9@<a5:

F5:(`!<$1I!NVUGMMVQOVOH

04$96.+c! *!pGJNK!MPQH!qPLp!<,"!M$!TJoH!jGTO!JKPQR!<!$1!kTLLVNlH

&73&/74!@3'4)&4'30c!! @4&!UPNUJPL!kNVTsVNK!TNV!JKVO!GQ!kTLLVNl!PQSJL!LG!SNGLVUL!TRTPQKL!NVrVNKV

kTLLVNl!UGQQVULPGQK!TQO!GQ!TjTNM!KGJQOVN!GJLSJL!LG!SNGLVUL!TRTPQKL!qPNPQR

nTJjLK!F0pGNLKIH

$!KGjPO!KLTLV!UPNUJPL!kNVTsVN!PK!JKVO!GQ!TJoPjPTNl!SGqVN!GJLSJL!LG!SNGLVUL!TRTPQKL

qPNPQR!nTJjLK!FKpGNLKIH

;%>%.$(E19))=/%1$.9&

B'3-$40!0/@@'34)6c

$6)-&'!17=1!0@))6

$6)-&'!*_:!)8@3)00

$6)-&'!%'A!0@))6

$6)-&'!&'94$&4!76

0)0&'$

3$67'97&0!%'A!0@))6

%79)!0)7C)c!!6GJkjV!@GjV

379=)3!)E/7($%)9&)c!"H<.

B&&!3)=7043$47'9!9'Hc!$&#?2/a>25?:a$%a)

6#4,$;^?#4,$;E&+)9.+E5+3-$;7

-N\WJ]SOT

APOLpc 2H*!PQUpVK

1VPRpLc *H<,!PQUpVK

6VSLpc 5H5!PQUpVK

+OH]LVJ]SOT (GjLTRV!7QSJLc!!5:(6&

&JNNVQL!6NTPQc!>"!M$!F*5#<$6I

!!!!!!!?"!M$!F,5#<$6I

%KLHVIS]HE<JVJKYT

3)6c!!5:(6&!PQSJL!F_I!TJoPjPTNl!SGqVN

.%/)c!!9GL!/KVO

=3))9c!!6TLT!LG!UGQLNGj!STQVj

+)%%'Ac!!6TLT!nNGM!UGQLNGj!STQVj

.%$&;c!=NGJQO!TQO!FaI!UGQQVULPGQ!nNGM!KJSSjVMVQLTj!SGqVN!KJSSjlH

*#4,^*#40E&HXFLHE5H\ZSG

-N\WJ]SOT

APOLpc >H:,!PQUpVK

1VPRpLc *H<,!!PQUpVK

6VSLpc 5H:,!!PQUpVK!!F>5#<!f!5!PQUp!I

+OH]LVJ]SOT (GjLTRV!7QSJLc!!5:(6&

&JNNVQL!6NTPQc!5""!M$!F>5#?Ib!2,M$!F>5#<I

%KLHVIS]HE<JVJKYT

3)6c!!5:(6&!PQSJL!F_I!TJoPjPTNl!SGqVN

.%/)c!!9GL!/KVO

=3))9c!!6TLT!LG!UGQLNGj!STQVj

+)%%'Ac!!6TLT!nNGM!UGQLNGj!STQVj

.%$&;c!=NGJQO!TQO!FaI!UGQQVULPGQ!nNGM!KJSSjVMVQLTj!SGqVN!KJSSjlH

– 179 –

CONTACTING TECHNICAL SUPPORT

PLEASE,

2HIFVHE\FME]SOOE.H]NKJ]SOE7MZZFVL_E`HEWMVHE\FMT

! &+$;E.8+E%/7.&=1.%9/7a

! 1NH][ESOOEbJVJKYE]FKKH]LJFKWc

! ;HLHVXJKHE LNSLE LNHE ZFbHVE WMZZO\E SKG^FVE `S][MZE `SLLHV\E SVHE WMZZO\JKY

ZVFZHVEUFOLSYHWc

! @HVJI\E\FMVEZVFYVSXXJKYEJKIFVXSLJFKEbNHVHESZZOJ]S`OHc

! 2HEWMVHESOOE[H\ZSGWESKGEGHUJ]HWESVHESGGVHWWHGEZVFZHVO\c

! /FLHE LNHE ZVFZHVE XFGHOE KMX`HVE FIE LNJWE ZVFGM]L_E SKGE LNHE UHVWJFKE OHUHOE QJI

[KFbKRESOFKYEbJLNESK\EGF]MXHKLSLJFKELNSLE]SXHEbJLNELNHEZVFGM]Lc

! /FLHE\FMVE$;+)19E]MWLFXHVEKMX`HVESKG^FVE]FXZSK\EKSXHc

8SUJKYELNJWEJKIFVXSLJFKENSKG\EbJOOEXS[HEJLEHSWJHVEIFVEMWELFEWHVUHE\FMEdMJ][O\ESKG

HIIH]LJUHO\c

+GJ!MTl!UGQLTUL!4VUpQPUTj!0JSSGNL!rPT!4Gjj!BNVV!BToH!@jVTKV!PQUjJOV!lGJN!NVLJNQ!nTo

QJMkVNH! +GJ! qPjj! NVUVPrV! T! NVSjl! qPLpPQ! :*! pGJNKH! +GJ! MTl! TjKG! UGQLTUL! 4VUpQPUTj

0JSSGNL!rPT!MGOVM!LG!$4%70a..0`!4VUp!0JSSGNL]K!)jVULNGQPU!.JjjVLPQ!.GTNO!0lKLVMH

3VSjPVK!TNV!SGKLVO!qPLpPQ!:*!pGJNKH

-)./&0#)./&1+*234*)5&'6((#$/7&&89:;;9<=>9?=@A&!:&)BCB9<&(BCB&-B'B1B,

"+./&0#)./&1+*234*)5&'6((#$/7&&89:;;9=>:9@=<@&!:&)BCB9>&(BCB&DB'B1B,

1+*234*)5&'6((#$/&E)F&G6CH+$7&89:;;9==?9>;:<

I1JK'9LL'&-5+*/$#34*&L655+/43&L#)$%&'M./+C7&89>8<9=@<9N@:;

F5:""!a!?>""!.TJO`!2!6TLT!.PLK`!5!0LTNLb0LGS!.PL`!9G!@TNPLlI

– 180 –

INDEX

ASCII CHART ....................................... 117

Supervised RF ........................................ 49

5711 ........................................................ 48

5802MN................................................... 50

5816 ........................................................ 51

12/24 HOUR TIME

STAMP FORMAT .................... 83, 105

11361 ........................................ 13, 86, 178

1361CN ................................................... 86

24-hour Audible Alarm ............................ 93

24-hour Auxiliary Alarm ........................... 93

24-hour Silent Alarm ............................... 93

3+1 and 4+1 Expanded Formats ........... 142

3+1 and 4+1 Standard Formats ............ 142

4+1 ........................................................ 145

4+2 ........................................................ 145

4+2 Format ............................................ 142

4100SM ..................................... 16, 82, 153

4137AD ....................................... 2, 89, 178

4139SN ................................................... 40

4142TR ............................................. 14, 57

X-10 ................................................... 14, 57

4146 ........................................................ 76

4146 keyswitch .......................................... 3

4190 ........................................................ 88

4191SN ................................................... 40

4192CP ............................................. 40, 88

4192SD ............................................. 40, 88

4192SDT ........................................... 40, 88

4194 .................................................. 38, 88

4197 .................................................. 38, 88

4204 Relay Module ................................. 88

4208 .................................................. 39, 88

4275 .................................................. 39, 88

4278 ............................................ 38, 39, 88

4281 ................................... RF Receiver 88

4281H ...................................................... 41

4281L ...................................................... 41

4281M ..................................................... 41

4285 VIP Module .............................. 65, 66

4285 VIP Module........................ Options 67

4300 transformer ............................... 15, 57

487-12 ..................................................... 21

488-12 ..................................................... 21

5137AD ............................... 2, 89, 113, 178

5137TRK ................................................. 22

5700 Series Transmitter Supervision ...... 46

5700 series wireless................................ 42

5701 ........................................................ 48

5706 ........................................................ 48

5715WH .................................................. 48

5716 ........................................................ 48

5716WM .................................................. 48

5727 ........................................................ 48

5742 ........................................................ 48

5743 ........................................................ 48

5775 ........................................................ 48

5800 Series Transmitter Input Types ...... 49

5800 series transmitters .......................... 49

5800TM ................................................... 44

5801 .................................................. 49, 50

5802 .................................................. 49, 50

5802CP ............................................. 49, 50

5802MN ................................................... 49

5803 .................................................. 49, 50

5806 ........................................................ 50

5816 ........................................................ 49

5817 .................................................. 49, 51

5818 ........................................................ 51

5827 ........................................................ 49

5827BD ....................................... 44, 48, 49

5849 ........................................................ 51

5881 RF Receiver ................................... 88

5882L/5882H ........................................... 41

5890 ........................................................ 51

6137, 6128, 4137AD ............................... 20

6139 .................................... 2, 89, 113, 178

6139, 5137AD ......................................... 20

6139TRK ................................................. 22

675 .................................................... 72, 88

675 Ground Start Module .................. 13, 74

702 .......................................................... 81

702 sirens ................................................ 80

719 .......................................................... 81

719 sirens ................................................ 80

740 .......................................................... 81

747 .......................................................... 81

7720 ........................................................ 72

7920SE ................................................... 72

ABB1031 ................................................. 81

AC Loss Keypad Sounding ..................... 95

AC Loss Siren ......................................... 80

AC Outlet Ground ............................. 15, 86

AC Power Loss

External Alarm ................................ 88

Keypad Sounding ............................ 88

AC Randomize ........................................ 88

Access Control .......................... 3, 126, 163

Access Control Relay ........................... 105

Access Control Schedules ............. 126, 136

Ademco 4+2 Express .................... 144, 178

Ademco Contact ID ...... 142, 144, 157, 178

Ademco High Speed ..................... 144, 178

Ademco LOW SPEED ........................... 178

Alarm Report Code ................................. 67

Alarm Sounder Duration .................... 80, 94

Alpha Descriptors, entering ................... 108

ALPHA VOCABULARY .......................... 117

Amseco motor bell & box ........................ 81

Amseco PAL 328N ................................. 75

Arm Window .......................................... 137

Arm-Away ............................................... 93

Arm-Stay ................................................. 93

arm/disarm ............................................. 132

Arm/Disarm commands ......................... 132

Arming Away .......................................... 161

Arming Functions ................................... 161

Arming Instant ........................................ 161

Arming Maximum ................................... 161

Arming Stay ........................................... 161

Arming Window ..................................... 106

ATLIS-BBS ............................................. 179

Audio Alarm Verification ..................... 4, 69

Auto Arming ........................................... 122

Auto Disarming ...................................... 123

Auto-Arm Delay ................... 106, 122, 126

Auto-Arm warning ......................... 106, 126

Auto-Disarm Delay ........................ 106, 126

Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment ...... t 78

Auxiliary Device Current Draw

Worksheet....................................... 88

Auxiliary Output Enable ............ 74, 76, 104

Back-Up Battery .............................. 15, 178

Basic Hardwired Zones........................... 25

Basic Scheduling Menu Structure ......... 127

Battery .................................................... 88

Battery Life .............................................. 49

Battery Selection Table........................... 89

Baud 1200 ............................................. 105

Baud 300 ................................................ 105

Burg. Alarm Comm. Delay .................... 101

Burg. Trigger For Response Type 8 ........ 96

Button Transmitters 49

Bypass Commands ............................... 132

Bypassing Zones ................................... 161

Cabinet Lock .............................................. 0

California State Fire Marshal ................. 171

Call Waiting Defeat ................................ 103

Call Waiting Defeat Logic ....................... 91

Canadian Department of

Communications ............................ 173

Check Messages .................................. 168

Check-in Signal ....................................... 49

Checksum ....................................... 99, 145

Chime Mode .......................................... 161

Chime on External Siren ................. 80, 104

Circuit Protectors ................................... 178

Cold Water Pipe ................................ 15, 86

Comm. Failure ....................................... 167

Comm. Split Report Selection ................. 103

Common Characteristics of

Polling Loop Zones ......................... 33

Common Characteristics of

Wireless Zones ............................... 41

Common Lobby Logic ................................ 6

Communication Defaults ......................... 16

Compatible Glass Break Detectors......... 30

Confirmation of Arming Ding ................... 95

Connecting a 4100SM Module for ..............

Direct Wire Downloading ............... 153

Connector J7 ........................................... 72

Consoles Maximum wire length............... 20

Contact ID Event Codes

Table of ......................................... 144

Contact ID Reporting .............. 141, 143, 145

Cross-Zoning ........................................... 91

CTS ......................................................... 83

Custom Index .................................. 68, 121

Custom Message................................... 113

Custom Message Display ...................... 116

Custom Words ............................... 113, 114

Daily Open/Close Worksheet ................ 129

Daylight Savings Time ........................... 105

DB25 ........................................................ 83

Default Screen ....................................... 116

Delay Closing Time ............................... 163

Device Programming ..... 23, 44, 58, 68, 118

Dial Tone Detection.................................. 99

Dial Tone Pause....................................... 98

Digital Communicator ............................ 178

DIP Switch Tables ................................. 174

DIP Switches. .......................................... 49

Disable Download Callback.................... 104

Disarm Delay ......................................... 123

Disarm Window ..................................... 137

Disarming ........................................ 93, 161

Download Command Enables ................. 98

Download ID No. ..................................... 98

Download Phone No. .............................. 98

Downloaded Messages

Viewing .......................................... 164

DSR ......................................................... 83

DTR ......................................................... 83

Dual Reporting........................................ 100

Duress ................................................... 155

Earth Ground Considerations .................. 86

ECP Address ........................................... 62

EDP Printer .............................................. 82

Enable 5800 RF Button Force Bypass ... 104

Enable 5800 RF Button Global Arm ...... [104

Enable Dialer Reports ........................... 101

Enable Force Arm for Auto-Arm ............. 106

Enable GOTO for This Partition.............. 107

Enable J7 Triggers by Partition .............. 107

Enable Open/Close Report for

Installer Code. ................................. 98

Entry Warning ........................................ 101

Entry/Exit Delay ........................................ 92

EOL resistor .......................... 22, 28, 32, 76

Event Log Printer On-Line ................ 83, 105

Event Log Types .............................. 83, 105

Event Log Printer Connections ............... 82

Event Logging Procedures ...................... 83

Event Log Report Codes ....................... 103

Exception Reports ................................. 123

Exit Delay Rese ...................................... t 90

Exit Error by User .................................... 90

Exit Error by Zone ................................... 90

Exit Error Logic ........................................ 90

Express Reporting .................................. 145

False Alarm Reduction ............................ 90

FCC ....................................................... 172

FCC Registration No ............................. 178

Federal Communications Commission

(FCC) Statement ................................... 172

First Test Report Time ........................... 100

Force Arm ..................................... 123, 126

Formats ................................................. 141

General Information ................................. 72

Global Arm ............................................. 162

Global Disarm ........................................ 162

GoTo ...................................................... 163

Ground Start Module ............................... 74

Handshake ............................................ 141

High Speed ............................................ 145

Holiday Definitions & Schedule

Worksheet ..................................... 131

Holiday Schedules.......................... 126, 131

IEI 735L series detectors......................... 30

IgnoreExpansion Zone Tamper............... 96

Installer Code .......................................... 94

Installer's Message ................................ 116

Intelligent Test Reporting ......................... 96

Interference Handbook .......................... 172

Interior w/Delay ....................................... 93

– 181 –

Interior, Follower ..................................... 92

J7 ............................................................ 82

J8............................................................. 82

Keypad Connections ............................... 21

Keypad Panic Enables ........................... 95

Keypads .................................................. 20

Keyswitch Assignment 76, 77, 95

Limitation of Access ............................... 123

Limitation of Access by Time Worksheet 136

Limited Warranty ................................... 184

Line Seize ............................................. 178

Loop Number........................................... 37

LORRA ................................................ 3, 72

Low Speed Format ................... 99, 144, 145

Manager Code ............................... 155, 158

Manual Relay Activation Mode

( 70 Mode).......................................165

Master Code ........................... 155, 157, 158

Master Keypad Setup ................................ 8

Menu Mode ............................................. 49

Menu Mode Programming ...................... 19

Modem .................................................. 153

Mounting the Cabinet .............................. 10

Multiple Alarm Soundings ....................... 96

Multiple Alarms ........................................ 80

Multiple Alarms ........................................ 96

Multiple Partition Access ....................... 158

Non-Alarm Report Codes ....................... 100

Normally Closed or EOLR ....................... 98

Normally Closed or EOLR (Zones 2-8) ... 30

Not Ready ............................................. 161

NP4-12 ............................................ 89, 178

NP7-12 ............................................ 89, 178

Number of Partitions ............................. 105

Open/Close Reporting.................... 126, 132

Open/Close Reporting

for Keyswitch .............................. 77, 98

Open/Close Schedules ......... 125, 128, 130

Operator Code ...................................... 158

Operator Level A ................................... 155

Operator Level B ................................... 155

Operator Level C ................................... 155

Optional Expansion Zones ........................ 1

Output Devices ........................................ 58

PA400 ...................................................... 79

PA400B ................................................... 81

PA400R ................................................... 81

PABX ................................................ 13, 97

Panic Keys .............................................. 93

Partition Descriptors .............................. 115

Partitioning ................................................ 5

Perimeter Burglary. ................................. 92

Permanent Keypad Display Backlight .... 103

Phone Line Connections ......................... 12

Polling Loop ....................................... 33, 88

Polling Loop Current Draw Worksheet .... 88

Power Up in Previous State .............. 88, 96

Power-Up Procedure ......................... 13, 86

Prevent Fire Time-out........................ 80, 95

Prevent Zone XX Bypass ...................... 98

Primary Format ........................................ 99

Primary Phone Number ........................... 97

Primary Subscriber Acct .......................... 97

PRINTER BAUD RATE..................... 83 105

Programming Alpha Descriptors............ 113

Programming The Wireless Receiver .......44

Programming Time Windows .................129

QUICK ARM ...........................................162

QUICK ARM (partition-specific) ............. 97

RADIONICS LOW SPEED .....................178

RANDOMIZE AC LOSS REPORT .......... [95

real-time clock ..........................................83

RECEIVER TYPE .................................. 103

Relay Action .............................................60

relay activated events .............................126

relay commands .....................................132

relay descriptors .....................................113

Relay Group .............................................62

RELAY PROG? ........................................60

RELAY TIMEOUT XX MINUTES) ..........105

RELAY TIMEOUT YY SECONDS.......... 105

Relay Voice Descriptors ...........................63

Relays and Powerline Carrier devices......56

Remote Keypad Sounding .......................76

Remote Keyswitch.....................................76

REPORT CODES FOR EVENT LOG ......83

REPORT CODES FOR

ZONES 01-64, 81-91, 95-99)..........100

REPORT CODES FOR ZONES 65-80 ...103

RESPONSE TYPES ..............................101

RESTORE REPORT TIMING .............. ..101

Restrict ....................................................123

Restrict disarm.........................................126

Restriction ................................................62

RF RCVR CHECK-IN INTERVAL ............44

RF RCVR SUPERVISION CHECK-IN I

NTERVAL ..................................... 102

RF TRANSMITTER CHECK-IN

NTERVAL .........................................52

RF TRANSMITTER CHECK-IN I

NTERVAL ....................................... 103

RF TX LOW BATTERY REPORT

ENABLE ...........................................52

RF TX LOW BATTERY REPORT

ENABLE......................................... 102

RING DETECTION COUNT ...............67, 99

RINGER EQUIVALENCE ......................178

ringer equivalence number .....................172

RJ31X .................................................... 172

RS232 ..................................................... 83

Schedule number ................................... 132

Programming ......................................... 126

SCHEDULING RELATED DIALER

REPORTS ..................................... 106

SECONDARY FORMAT ......................... 99

SECONDARY PHONE NUMBER........... \ 97

SECONDARY SUBSCRIBER ACCT ..... 101

SCHEDULING OPTIONS ...................... 122

SETTING THE REAL-TIME CLOCK ..... 154

Section 22

KEYPAD FUNCTIONS .................. 161

Section 23

TESTING THE SYSTEM ............... 166

SEND CANCEL IF ALARM + OFF

(partition-specific) ......................... 104

Serial Number Learning/Deleting ........... 111

SESCOA ................................................ 178

Sescoa/Radionics .................................. 145

SESCOA/RADIONICS SELECT ............. 100

SOUNDER OPTION ....................... 24, 119

SOUNDERS

Compatible ..................................... 81

External .......................................... 79

SPECIFICATIONS ................................. 178

Standard Phone Line Connections ......... 12

STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT

PRIMARY........................................ 100

STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT

SECONDARY ............................... 100

STANDBY CURRENT DRAW ................ 88

START .................................................... 60

Start Event ...................................... 61

Start Time ...................................... 128

STOP ...................................................... 60

substitute word ................................ 68, 121

SUMMARY ............................................. 184

SUMMARY OF CONNECTIONS ........... 184

Supervised Fire ....................................... 93

SUPERVISION PULSES FOR LORRA . 107

Supplementary Power Supply ................ 21

SUPPRESS TX SUPERVISION

SOUND ........................................... 104

SUPPRESS TX SUPERVISION

SOUNDING ..................................... 52

Swinger Suppression .............................. 96

SWINGER SUPPRESSION (

partition-specific)........................... 101

System Operation ................................... 61

tamper protection .................................... 49

TECHNICAL SUPPORT

CONTACT ..................................... 179

Temporary schedule Worksheet ............ 137

Temporary Schedules ............................ 137

Programming ......................................... 138

TEST REPORT INTERVAL ..................... 96

THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING 16

the Open/Close Trigger ........................... 75

Time Driven ............................................. 56

Time Window ................................ 128, 136

Beginning ....................................... 133

During ............................................ 133

End ................................................. 133

time window number .............................. 132

Time Windows 1 .............................. 24, 126

Time Windows Definitions Worksheet ... 128

Time-Driven Event Programming .......... 134

Time-Driven Event Worksheet .............. 132

timers ..................................................... 139

TOUCH-TONE OR ROTARY DIAL ......... 97

TOUCH-TONE W/ROTARY

BACKUP......................................... 103

Trouble by Day/Alarm by Nigh ............... t 93

Trouble Conditions ................................ 168

Turning The System Over To The User 167

UL 15, 21

UL AC LOSS SIREN ............................... 95

UL Household Fire/Burglary applications 45

UL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. 170

UL installations ........................................ 65

UL Listed applications ............................. 74

UL1023 Household & UL609 Commercial

Burglary Installations ....................... 80

UL365 POLICE STATION CONNECTED

BURGLAR ALARM ....................... 170

UL609 GRADE A LOCAL MERCANTILE

PREMISES/LOCAL MERCANTILE

SAFE & VAULT ............................. 170

UL611/UL1610 CENTRAL STATION

BURGLARY ALARM ..................... 171

Unsupervised RF 49

USE PARTITION DESCRIPTORS ........ 107

User Codes ............................................ 155

Adding a Master Manager or Operator .. 158

Changeing a Master Manager or

Operator ........................................ 158

Deleting a Master Manager or

Operator ........................................ 158

General Information ............................... 155

Using The Built-In

User's Manual ................................ 164

Viewing Data Fields ................................. 17

VIP Module .............................................. 65

VIP MODULE PHONE CODE ................. 67

VIP MODULE PHONE CODE ................. 95

Voltage Triggers .................................. 3, 72

WIRELESS KEYPAD

ASSIGNMENT ................................. 52, 104

WIRELESS KEYPAD

TAMPER DETECT ........................ 103

wireless "keys" ......................................... 49

Wireless Zone Assignments for

5700 Series Transmitters ................ 47

wiring length/gauge chart ........................ 20

X-10 ......................................................... 56

ZONE 9 FAST/NORMAL RESPONSE .... 30

ZONE 9 RESPONSE TIME ................... 94

Zone Cust

Deleting a zone ............................... 63

ZONE DESCRIPTOR ............................ 113

Zone Descriptors ................................... 113

Zone List

Deleting ........................................... 63

Zone List Programming ........................... 63

ZONE PROG?" ....................................... 36

ZONE PROG? ................................... 30, 52

Zone Programming ................................ 109

ZONE RESPONSE TYPE ....................... 67

ZONE RESPONSE TYPES .................... 94

Zone Type ........................... 31, 36, 53, 109

ZONE TYPE RESTORES .................... 100

Zone Types .............................................. 61

– 182 –

WARNING!

THE LIMITATIONS OF THIS ALARM SYSTEM

While this System is an advanced wireless security system, it does not offer guaranteed protection against burglary, fire or

other emergency. Any alarm system, whether commercial or residential, is subject to compromise or failure to warn for a vari-

ety of reasons. For example:

• Intruders may gain access through unprotected openings or have the technical sophistication to bypass an alarm sensor or

disconnect an alarm warning device.

• Intrusion detectors (e.g., passive infrared detectors), smoke detectors, and many other sensing devices will not work with-

out power. Battery-operated devices will not work without batteries, with dead batteries, or if the batteries are not put in

properly. Devices powered solely by AC will not work if their AC power supply is cut off for any reason, however briefly.

• Signals sent by wireless transmitters may be blocked or reflected by metal before they reach the alarm receiver. Even if the

signal path has been recently checked during a weekly test, blockage can occur if a metal object is moved into the path.

• A user may not be able to reach a panic or emergency button quickly enough.

• While smoke detectors have played a key role in reducing residential fire deaths in the United States, they may not activate

or provide early warning for a variety of reasons in as many as 35% of all fires, according to data published by the Federal

Emergency Management Agency. Some of the reasons smoke detectors used in conjunction with this System may not

work are as follows. Smoke detectors may have been improperly installed and positioned. Smoke detectors may not sense

fires that start where smoke cannot reach the detectors, such as in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other side of

closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level of a residence or building. A second floor de-

tector, for example, may not sense a first floor or basement fire. Finally, smoke detectors have sensing limitations. No

smoke detector can sense every kind of fire every time. In general, detectors may not always warn about fires caused by

carelessness and safety hazards like smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable

materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches, or arson. Depending on the nature of the fire and/or

location of the smoke detectors, the detector, even if it operates as anticipated, may not provide sufficient warning to allow

all occupants to escape in time to prevent injury or death.

• Passive Infrared Motion Detectors can only detect intrusion within the designed ranges as diagrammed in their installation

manual. Passive Infrared Detectors do not provide volumetric area protection. They do create multiple beams of protection,

and intrusion can only be detected in unobstructed areas covered by those beams. They cannot detect motion or intrusion

that takes place behind walls, ceilings, floors, closed doors, glass partitions, glass doors, or windows. Mechanical

tampering, masking, painting or spraying of any material on the mirrors, windows or any part of the optical system can re-

duce their detection ability. Passive Infrared Detectors sense changes in temperature; however, as the ambient tempera-

ture of the protected area approaches the temperature range of 90° to 105°F (32° to 40°C), the detection performance can

decrease.

• Alarm warning devices such as sirens, bells or horns may not alert people or wake up sleepers if they are located on the

other side of closed or partly open doors. If warning devices are located on a different level of the residence from the bed-

rooms, then they are less likely to waken or alert people inside the bedrooms. Even persons who are awake may not hear

the warning if the alarm is muffled by noise from a stereo, radio, air conditioner or other appliance, or by passing traffic. Fi-

nally, alarm warning devices, however loud, may not warn hearing-impaired people.

• Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premises to a central monitoring station may be out of service or

temporarily out of service. Telephone lines are also subject to compromise by sophisticated intruders.

• Even if the system responds to the emergency as intended, however, occupants may have insufficient time to protect them-

selves from the emergency situation. In the case of a monitored alarm system, authorities may not respond appropriately.

• This equipment, like other electrical devices, is subject to component failure. Even though this equipment is designed to

last as long as 20 years, the electronic components could fail at any time.

The most common cause of an alarm system not functioning when an intrusion or fire occurs is inadequate maintenance. This

alarm system should be tested weekly to make sure all sensors and transmitters are working properly. The security console

(and remote keypad) should be tested as well.

Wireless transmitters (used in some systems) are designed to provide long battery life under normal operating conditions.

Longevity of batteries may be as much as 4 to 7 years, depending on the environment, usage, and the specific wireless device

being used. External factors such as humidity, high or low temperatures, as well as large swings in temperature, may all

reduce the actual battery life in a given installation. This wireless system, however, can identify a true low battery situation,

thus allowing time to arrange a change of battery to maintain protection for that given point within the system.

Installing an alarm system may make the owner eligible for a lower insurance rate, but an alarm system is not a substitute for

insurance. Homeowners, property owners and renters should continue to act prudently in protecting themselves and continue

to insure their lives and property.

We continue to develop new and improved protection devices. Users of alarm systems owe it to themselves and their loved

ones to learn about these developments.

– 183 –

–

N.C. N.C.

N.O.

2k EOLR

(note 1) 2k EOLR

(note 1)

+–

BELL

SIREN

NO CONNECTION

TRANSFORMER

16.5VAC, 40VA

ADEMCO No.1361

(IN CANADA

USE No. 1361CN)

or 4300 IF

X-10 DEVICES

WILL BE USED

Connect to

24hr. 120VAC,

60 Hz Outlet Red Blk Grn Yel

REMOTE KEYPAD

Use 4137AD/6137/6128

5137AD/6139

(Addressable keypads) only

–

N.C. N.C.

2k EOLR

(note 1) 2k EOLR

(note 1)

–

N.C.

–

N.C. N.C.

2k EOLR

(note 1,4)

TIP

(BROWN)

RING

(GRAY)

TIP

(GREEN)

RING

(RED)

Handset Incoming

Phone Line

Telephone connections

using Ademco No. 620

RJ31X direct connect

cord.

EARTH GROUND

Connect to good earth

ground to maintain im-

munity to transients.

See Instructions for

proper grounding.

SMOKE

4190

RPM

4278

PIR

Polling loop rating: 64mA

maximum. See Installa-

tion Instructions for

maximum number of

devices supported and

maximum wire run length.

VISTA-50P/VISTA-50PUL

SUMMARY OF CONNECTIONS

USE UL LISTED ENERGY CABLE FOR ALL CONNECTIONS

Zone resistance (Excluding EOLR):

ZONE 1,8: 100 OHMS MAXIMUM

ALL OTHER ZONES: 300 OHMS MAXIMUM

ZONE 1

ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE 5 ZONE 6 ZONE 7 ZONE 8 ZONE 9

2-WIRE SMOKE

DETECTOR LOOP

(Also supports NO/NC Burg contacts)

POLLING LOOP

Programmable Response

(Fast/Normal) Loop

LATCHING TYPE GLASS

BREAK DETECTOR LOOP

Data in

Data out

12345678910 11121314151617181920 212223242526

27 28 29 30

RED (+)BLK (–)

Connect to

12VDC, 4AH

or 12VDC, 7AH

GEL CELL

BATTERY

CHARGING

VOLTAGE

13.7 VDC

See

Installation

Instructions for

required

capacity

Replace

every

3 years

NOTE:

WHEN POWERING UP

THE PANEL, PLUG THE

TRANSFORMER IN BEFORE

CONNECTING THE BATTERY.

See Installation Instructions

for max # of keypads

and for max wire run length.

ALARM SOUNDER OUTPUT 10VDC - 13.8VDC

AUXILARY POWER OUTPUT

9.6VDC - 13.8VDC,

750 mA maximum

Note: Include current drawn

by keypads and polling loop

devices when making

auxiliary power calculations.

+–

NOTES:

1. Zone 1 may be selected for EOLR supervised

or normally closed (no EOLR) operation via

cut jumper. (Cut red jumper for normally closed

operation. Do not cut for Fire Usage). Zones 2-8

may be selected for either operation via program

field *41.

Zone 1 supports 2-wire smoke detectors.

See Installation Instructions for recommended type

and maximum number of detectors supported.

Zone 7 may be used for remote keyswitch arming/disarming.

See Installation Instructions for wiring instructions.

Zone 8 supports 2-wire latching type glass break detectors.

See Installation Instructions for recommended type and

maximum number of detectors supported.

4. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1. Not Used

2. Ground-

3. Out 1 (Ground Start)

4. Ground-

5. Out 2 (fire)

6. Ground-

7. Out 3 (burg/aud. panic)

8. Ground

9. Out 4 (silent panic/

duress)

Optional programming:

Out 1: Open/close or keypad-like sounding

Out 2: Armed LED

Out 4: Ready LED

Ratings for Out 1:

Active: 10VDC-13.8VDC through 4k OHMS

Not Active: 100 OHMS to ground

Ratings for out 2-4:

Active: 10VDC-13.8VDC through 5k OHMS

Not Active: 1k OHMS to ground

N.C.

N.O.

N.O. N.O.

2k EOLR

(note 1,2)

N.O. N.O. N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

2k EOLR

(note 1) 2k EOLR

(note 1,3)

N.C.

+–

GLASS

BREAK

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

MAKE CONNECTIONS USING

No. 4142TR CABLE

WARNING: OWNER'S INSTRUCTION NOTICE NOT TO BE REMOVED

Fire

Usage

Burg.

Usage

CONNECTION OF THE FIRE ALARM

SIGNAL TO A FIRE ALARM HEAD-

QUARTERS OR A CENTRAL STATION

SHALL BE PERMITED ONLY WITH

THE APPROVAL OF THE LOCAL

AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION.

THE BURGLAR ALARM SIGNAL SHALL

NOT BE CONNECTED TO A POLICE

EMERGENCY NUMBER.

1. In 2 (Printer DTR)

2. Ground

3. In 3 (4300 sync)

4. In 4 (4300 sync)

5. Ground

6. Out 5 (4300 data)

7. Out 6 (Printer RXD)

8. Ground

9. Ground

Red Jumper

(note 1)

DOC LOAD NO.: 5

J7 Header J8 Header

BATTERY

TABS

4192SD

SMOKE

WARNING: TO PREVENT

RISK OF ELECTRICAL

SHOCK, DISCONNECT

TELCO JACK BEFORE

SERVICING THIS PANEL.

THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN

ACCORDANCE WITH THE NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION

ASSOCIATION'S STANDARD 72 (NATIONAL FIRE

PROTECTION ASSOC., BATTERYMARCH PARK.

QUINCY, MA. 02269). PRINTED INFORMATION

DESCRIBING PROPER INSTALLATION, OPERATION,

TESTING, MAINTENANCE, EVACUATION PLANNING

AND REPAIR SERVICE IS TO BE PROVIDED WITH

THIS EQUIPMENT.

FOR COMPLETE

INFORMATION,

SEE INSTRUCTIONS

N5944-6 for VISTA-50P/

VISTA-50PUL

WEEKLY TESTING IS REQUIRED TO ENSURE PROPER OPERATION OF THIS SYSTEM.

Zone response time:

ZONES 1-8: 350mSec-500mSec

ZONE 9: Programmable for

Fast: 10mSec-15mSec

Normal: 350mSec-500mSec

(default response)

COMPLIES WITH FCC RULES, PART 68

FCC REGISTRATION NO. AC398U-68192-AL-E

RINGER EQUIVALENCE: 0.7B

THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF

FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE

FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE

MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND

(2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE

RECEIVED, INCLUDING INTERFERENCE

THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.

(Refer to Installation Instructions for information concerning Direct Wire

Downloading and printer connections using the 4100SM Serial Module.)

ALL CIRCUITS ARE

POWER LIMITED. Notes For UL Household Fire Installations

1. Use 12VDC, 14AH battery

2. Maximum auxiliary current,

including polling loop 300mA

3. Combined alarm and auxilary power output

and polling loop current must be limited to 750mA

for UL985 Household Fire Installations.

ALARM DEVICE MANUFACTURING CO.

A DIVISION OF PITTWAY CORPORATION

165 Eileen Way, Syosset, New York 11791

àN5944-6V1<ä

N5944-6V1 Rev B 4/99

ADEMCO LIMITED WARRANTY

Alarm Device Manufacturing Company, a Division of Pittway Corporation, and its divisions, subsidiaries and affiliates ("Seller"),

165 Eileen Way, Syosset, New York 11791, warrants its products to be in conformance with its own plans and specifications

and to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for 18 months from the date stamp

control on the product or, for products not having an Ademco date stamp, for 12 months from date of original purchase unless

the installation instructions or catalog sets forth a shorter period, in which case the shorter period shall apply. Seller's

obligation shall be limited to repairing or replacing, at its option, free of charge for materials or labor, any product which is

proved not in compliance with Seller's specifications or proves defective in materials or workmanship under normal use and

service. Seller shall have no obligation under this Limited Warranty or otherwise if the product is altered or improperly repaired

or serviced by anyone other than Ademco factory service. For warranty service, return product transportation prepaid, to

Ademco Factory Service, 165 Eileen Way, Syosset, New York 11791.

THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE OR OTHERWISE, WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREOF. IN NO CASE

SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF

THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OR UPON ANY OTHER BASIS OF LIABILITY

WHATSOEVER, EVEN IF THE LOSS OR DAMAGE IS CAUSED BY THE SELLER'S OWN NEGLIGENCE OR FAULT.

Seller does not represent that the products it sells may not be compromised or circumvented; that the products will prevent any

personal injury or property loss by burglary, robbery, fire or otherwise; or that the products will in all cases provide adequate

warning or protection. Customer understands that a properly installed and maintained alarm may only reduce the risk of a bur-

glary, robbery, fire or other events occurring without providing an alarm, but it is not insurance or a guarantee that such will not

occur or that there will be no personal injury or property loss as a result. CONSEQUENTLY, SELLER SHALL HAVE NO

LIABILITY FOR ANY PERSONAL INJURY, PROPERTY DAMAGE OR OTHER LOSS BASED ON A CLAIM THE PRODUCT

FAILED TO GIVE WARNING. HOWEVER, IF SELLER IS HELD LIABLE, WHETHER DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FOR ANY

LOSS OR DAMAGE ARISING UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE, REGARDLESS OF CAUSE OR

ORIGIN, SELLER'S MAXIMUM LIABILITY SHALL NOT IN ANY CASE EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE

PRODUCT, WHICH SHALL BE THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AGAINST SELLER. This warranty replaces

any previous warranties and is the only warranty made by Seller on this product. No increase or alteration, written or verbal, of

the obligations of this Limited Warranty is authorized.

165 Eileen Way, Syosset, New York 11791

Vista 50P V1 Installation Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation